Search the source libraries

Adverse childhood experiences and maternal anxiety and depression: a meta-analysis.

Background: It has been proposed that adverse childhood experiences (ACEs) can put women at risk for mental illness in the pregnancy and postpartum periods. While some studies have found strong support for this proposition, others have found weak or no support. This study is a meta-analysis of the association between ACEs and maternal mental health to resolve between-study discrepancies, and to examine potential moderators of associations. Methods: Three electronic databases (i.e., MEDLINE, Embase, and PsycINFO) were searched up to November 2018 by a health sciences librarian. A hand search was conducted in January 2020 and relevant studies were added. Included studies reported on associations between ACEs and maternal depression and/or anxiety in the perinatal period (pregnancy to 1-year postpartum). Pregnancy and postpartum outcomes were examined separately for both depression and anxiety. Random-effect meta-analyses were conducted. Moderator analyses were conducted using meta-regression. Study quality was evaluated using a 15-point scale. Results: The initial search yielded 4646 non-duplicate records and full text review occurred for 196 articles. A total of 15 studies (N = 7788) were included in the meta-analyses, of which 2 were also described narratively. Publication year ranged from 1998 to 2019. Mothers were approximately 28.93 years of age when they retrospectively reported on their ACEs. All studies had maternal self-report questionnaires for the mental health outcomes. Study quality ranged from 7 to 12. The pooled effect sizes between ACEs and prenatal (N = 12; r = .19; 95% CI= .13, .24) and postpartum (N = 7; r = .23; 95% CI = .06 to .39) depressive symptoms were significant. The pooled effect size between ACEs and prenatal anxiety was also significant (N = 5; r = .14; 95% CI= .07, .21). Moderator analyses indicated that timing of depressive and anxiety symptoms may be important for understanding associations. Conclusions: ACEs confer risk to maternal mental health, albeit effect sizes are small to moderate in magnitude. Trauma-informed approaches, as well as increased mental health support during and after pregnancy, may help to offset the relative risk of ACEs on maternal mental health.

BMC psychiatry · meta-analysis · 128 citationsread the source →

Efficacy and Safety of Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation as an Add-on Treatment for Bipolar Depression: A Randomized Clinical Trial.

Importance: More effective, tolerable interventions for bipolar depression treatment are needed. Transcranial direct current stimulation (tDCS) is a novel therapeutic modality with few severe adverse events that showed promising results for unipolar depression. Objective: To determine the efficacy and safety of tDCS as an add-on treatment for bipolar depression. Design, setting, and participants: A randomized, sham-controlled, double-blind trial (the Bipolar Depression Electrical Treatment Trial [BETTER]) was conducted from July 1, 2014, to March 30, 2016, at an outpatient, single-center academic setting. Participants included 59 adults with type I or II bipolar disorder in a major depressive episode and receiving a stable pharmacologic regimen with 17-item Hamilton Depression Rating Scale (HDRS-17) scores higher than 17. Data were analyzed in the intention-to-treat sample. Interventions: Ten daily 30-minute, 2-mA, anodal-left and cathodal-right prefrontal sessions of active or sham tDCS on weekdays and then 1 session every fortnight until week 6. Main outcomes and measures: Change in HDRS-17 scores at week 6. Results: Fifty-nine patients (40 [68%] women), with a mean (SD) age of 45.9 (12) years participated; 36 (61%) with bipolar I and 23 (39%) with bipolar II disorder were randomized and 52 finished the trial. In the intention-to-treat analysis, patients in the active tDCS condition showed significantly superior improvement compared with those receiving sham (βint = -1.68; number needed to treat, 5.8; 95% CI, 3.3-25.8; P = .01). Cumulative response rates were higher in the active vs sham groups (67.6% vs 30.4%; number needed to treat, 2.69; 95% CI, 1.84-4.99; P = .01), but not remission rates (37.4% vs 19.1%; number needed to treat, 5.46; 95% CI, 3.38-14.2; P = .18). Adverse events, including treatment-emergent affective switches, were similar between groups, except for localized skin redness that was higher in the active group (54% vs 19%; P = .01). Conclusions and relevance: In this trial, tDCS was an effective, safe, and tolerable add-on intervention for this small bipolar depression sample. Further trials should examine tDCS efficacy in a larger sample. Trial registration: clinicaltrials.gov Identifier: NCT02152878.

JAMA psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 103 citationsread the source →

The Marriage Checkup: a randomized controlled trial of annual relationship health checkups.

Objective: This study assessed the efficacy of the Marriage Checkup (MC) for improving relationship health and intimacy. Method: Cohabiting married couples (N = 215, Mage women = 44.5 years, men = 47 years, 93.1% Caucasian) recruited from a northeastern U.S. metropolitan area through print and electronic media were randomly assigned to MC treatment or wait-list control. Treatment but not control couples participated in assessment and feedback visits, at the beginning of the study and again 1 year later. All couples completed 9 sets of questionnaires over 2 years. Outcome measures included the Quality of Marriage Index, the Global Distress subscale of the Marital Satisfaction Inventory-Revised, the Intimate Safety Questionnaire, and the Relational Acceptance Questionnaire. Results: A latent growth curve model indicated significant between-group differences in intimacy at every measurement point after baseline (d ranged from .20 to .55, Md = .37), significant between-group differences in women's felt acceptance for every measurement point after baseline (d ranged from .17 to .47, Md = .34), significant between-group differences in men's felt acceptance through the 1-year 2-week follow-up (d across follow-up ranged from .11 to .40, Md = .25), and significant between-group differences in relationship distress through 1-year 6-month follow-up (d across follow-up ranged from .11 to .39, Md = .23). Conclusions: Longitudinal analysis of the MC supports the hypothesis that the MC significantly improves intimacy, acceptance, and satisfaction. Implications for dissemination are discussed.

Journal of consulting and clinical psychology · randomised controlled trial · 58 citationsread the source →

Mental health and psychosocial support in humanitarian settings: linking practice and research.

This review links practice, funding, and evidence for interventions for mental health and psychosocial wellbeing in humanitarian settings. We studied practice by reviewing reports of mental health and psychosocial support activities (2007-10); funding by analysis of the financial tracking service and the creditor reporting system (2007-09); and interventions by systematic review and meta-analysis. In 160 reports, the five most commonly reported activities were basic counselling for individuals (39%); facilitation of community support of vulnerable individuals (23%); provision of child-friendly spaces (21%); support of community-initiated social support (21%); and basic counselling for groups and families (20%). Most interventions took place and were funded outside national mental health and protection systems. 32 controlled studies of interventions were identified, 13 of which were randomised controlled trials (RCTs) that met the criteria for meta-analysis. Two studies showed promising effects for strengthening community and family supports. Psychosocial wellbeing was not included as an outcome in the meta-analysis, because its definition varied across studies. In adults with symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), meta-analysis of seven RCTs showed beneficial effects for several interventions (psychotherapy and psychosocial supports) compared with usual care or waiting list (standardised mean difference [SMD] -0·38, 95% CI -0·55 to -0·20). In children, meta-analysis of four RCTs failed to show an effect for symptoms of PTSD (-0·36, -0·83 to 0·10), but showed a beneficial effect of interventions (group psychotherapy, school-based support, and other psychosocial support) for internalising symptoms (six RCTs; SMD -0·24, -0·40 to -0·09). Overall, research and evidence focuses on interventions that are infrequently implemented, whereas the most commonly used interventions have had little rigorous scrutiny.

Lancet (London, England) · systematic review · 289 citationsread the source →

Efficacy of a novel biphasic controlled-release methylphenidate formula in adults with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder: results of a double-blind, placebo-controlled crossover study.

Objective: To evaluate the efficacy and safety of a new biphasic multilayer-release (MLR) methylphenidate formulation in a double-blind, placebo-controlled crossover study of adults with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). Method: Adults 18 to 60 years of age with a DSM-IV diagnosis of ADHD entered a no-medication baseline week and were then randomly assigned to once-daily MLR methylphenidate or matching placebo. Patients were titrated to optimal effect over 1 to 3 weeks followed by 2 weeks of treatment on a stable dose. The same titration protocol was repeated with the alternate treatment. Clinical Global Impressions scale (CGI) and Conners' Adult ADHD Rating Scales (Self-rated, CAARS-S, and Observer-rated, CAARS-O) were collected at weekly clinic visits. The study was conducted between October 2003 and April 2004. Results: Fifty patients were randomly assigned to treatment, and 39 were analyzed in a per-protocol population (23 men, 16 women; mean age = 37.9 years). CGI-Improvement scores of subjects taking MLR methylphenidate were significantly improved compared with placebo (Global Improvement: 2.6 vs. 3.7; p = .0015). MLR methylphenidate produced improvements over placebo on the ADHD Index T scores of the CAARS-S (12.2 vs. 5.4 [change from baseline score]; p = .0083) and the CAARS-O (10.9 vs. 6.6 [change from baseline score]; p = .1404). The most frequent adverse events for MLR methylphenidate and placebo were headache (26% and 24%, respectively), anorexia (22% and 6%), insomnia (22% and 8%), nervousness (20% and 4%), and nausea (16% and 8%). There were no serious adverse events. Conclusions: Once-daily MLR methylphenidate produces significant improvements in ADHD symptoms and situational behavior in adult patients with ADHD, with a prolonged duration of effect and minimal side effects, thus having the potential to improve compliance and, therefore, treatment outcomes in routine clinical use.

The Journal of clinical psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 37 citationsread the source →

Behavioural activation therapy for post-stroke depression: the BEADS feasibility RCT.

Background: There is currently insufficient evidence for the clinical effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of psychological therapies for post-stroke depression. Objective: To evaluate the feasibility of undertaking a definitive trial to evaluate the clinical effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of behavioural activation (BA) compared with usual stroke care for treating post-stroke depression. Design: Parallel-group, feasibility, multicentre, randomised controlled trial with nested qualitative research and a health economic evaluation. Setting: Acute and community stroke services in three sites in England. Participants: Community-dwelling adults 3 months to 5 years post stroke who are depressed, as determined by the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9) or the Visual Analogue Mood Scales 'Sad' item. Exclusions: patients who are blind and/or deaf, have dementia, are unable to communicate in English, do not have mental capacity to consent, are receiving treatment for depression at the time of stroke onset or are currently receiving psychological intervention. Randomisation and blinding: Participants were randomised (1 : 1 ratio) to BA or usual stroke care. Randomisation was conducted using a computer-generated list with random permuted blocks of varying sizes, stratified by site. Participants and therapists were aware of the allocation, but outcome assessors were blind. Interventions: The intervention arm received up to 15 sessions of BA over 4 months. BA aims to improve mood by increasing people's level of enjoyable or valued activities. The control arm received usual care only. Main outcome measures: Primary feasibility outcomes concerned feasibility of recruitment to the main trial, acceptability of research procedures and measures, appropriateness of baseline and outcome measures, retention of participants and potential value of conducting the definitive trial. Secondary feasibility outcomes concerned the delivery of the intervention. The primary clinical outcome 6 months post randomisation was the PHQ-9. Secondary clinical outcomes were Stroke Aphasic Depression Questionnaire - Hospital version, Nottingham Leisure Questionnaire, Nottingham Extended Activities of Daily Living, Carer Strain Index, EuroQol-5 Dimensions, five-level version and health-care resource use questionnaire. Results: Forty-eight participants were recruited in 27 centre-months of recruitment, at a recruitment rate of 1.8 participants per centre per month. The 25 participants randomised to receive BA attended a mean of 8.5 therapy sessions [standard deviation (SD) 4.4 therapy sessions]; 23 participants were allocated to usual care. Outcome assessments were completed by 39 (81%) participants (BA, n = 18; usual care, n = 21). Mean PHQ-9 scores at 6-month follow-up were 10.1 points (SD 6.9 points) and 14.4 points (SD 5.1 points) in the BA and control groups, respectively, a difference of -3.8 (95% confidence interval -6.9 to -0.6) after adjusting for baseline PHQ-9 score and centre, representing a reduction in depression in the BA arm. Therapy was delivered as intended. BA was acceptable to participants, carers and therapists. Value-of-information analysis indicates that the benefits of conducting a definitive trial would be likely to outweigh the costs. It is estimated that a sample size of between 580 and 623 participants would be needed for a definitive trial. Limitations: Target recruitment was not achieved, although we identified methods to improve recruitment. Conclusions: The Behavioural Activation Therapy for Depression after Stroke trial was feasible with regard to the majority of outcomes. The outstanding issue is whether or not a sufficient number of participants could be recruited within a reasonable time frame for a definitive trial. Future work is required to identify whether or not there are sufficient sites that are able to deliver the services required for a definitive trial. Trial registration: Current Controlled Trials ISRCTN12715175. Funding: This project was funded by the NIHR Health Technology Assessment programme and will be published in full in Health Technology Assessment; Vol. 23, No. 47. See the NIHR Journals Library website for further project information.

Health technology assessment (Winchester, England) · randomised controlled trial · 43 citationsread the source →

Dietary diversity and mental health in preschoolers in rural China.

Objective: To investigate the prevalence of mental health problems among preschoolers in rural China and examine the relationship between dietary diversity and mental health. Design: A cross-sectional survey analysis was performed. Child mental health was assessed with the Strengths and Difficulties Questionnaire (SDQ). Child dietary diversity was assessed with the dietary diversity score (DDS), which was calculated based on nine food groups using a 24-h recall method. Data were analysed using unadjusted and adjusted logistic regression models. Setting: Two nationally designated poverty counties in Hunan Province of China. Participants: Preschoolers (n 1334) aged 3-5 years, preschools (n 26). Results: Of 950 preschoolers with data on both dietary diversity and mental health, 663 (70 %) were classified as having at least one kind of mental health problem. The prevalences of emotional symptoms, conduct problems, symptoms of hyperactive/inattention, peer relationship problems and poor prosocial behaviour were 39, 27, 23, 12 and 26 %, respectively. Male preschoolers showed higher risks of having mental health problems than their female counterparts on each SDQ subscale except for conduct problems. Moreover, a higher DDS was significantly associated with a lower likelihood of having symptoms of hyperactivity/inattention, peer relationship problems and prosocial behaviour problems after adjustment for confounders (preschoolers' age, gender, cognitive ability, parental migration status, primary caregiver's education and household socio-economic status). Conclusions: The prevalence of mental health problems was high among preschoolers in rural China. Improving child dietary diversity might be an important strategy to consider in the design of interventions to improve child mental health.

Public health nutrition · 15 citationsread the source →

Breastfeeding outcome comparison by parity.

Objective: Anecdotally, breastfeeding experiences differ between those who have previously nursed an infant and those who are primiparous. This analysis contrasted breastfeeding outcomes between primiparous women and those with previous experience spanning from maternity stay through 6 months postpartum. Study design: A secondary analysis was conducted of data collected in a randomized, controlled trial with mothers and "well" newborns ≥34 weeks of gestation comparing two post-hospital discharge care models. Mothers completed an in-person interview during the postpartum stay and phone surveys at 2 weeks, 2 months, and 6 months where questionnaires related to breastfeeding were completed. All participants intended to breastfeed. Chi-squared and Wilcoxon rank sum tests were used to test for differences between parity groups. Breastfeeding duration by parity group was compared using a Kaplan-Meier plot and a logrank test. A Cox proportional hazards model was used to evaluate the relationship between breastfeeding duration and parity after adjusting for covariates. Results: Among 1,099 mothers available for analysis, 542 (49%) were primiparous. Multiparous mothers had a longer intended breastfeeding duration (median, 9 vs. 6 months; p<0.001). Following delivery, primiparous mothers had a longer median time to first breastfeeding attempt (119 vs. 96 minutes; p<0.001) and were more likely to have eight or fewer feeding attempts in the first 24 hours (33% vs. 44%; p<0.001)). More primiparous women reported early breastfeeding problems (35% vs. 20%; p<0.001) and mixed feeding at hospital discharge (39% vs. 23%; p<0.001) despite reporting less breastfeeding-associated pain during the first week (p=0.04). Multiparous women were more likely to breastfeed through 6 months (p<0.001). In a multivariable Cox model for breastfeeding duration, an interaction existed between intended breastfeeding duration and parity (p=0.006); among those intending to breastfeed for 12 months, multiparous mothers had a significantly lower hazard of stopping breastfeeding (hazard ratio=0.66; p=0.03) than primiparous mothers. Conclusions: Women who have breastfed previously have significantly different breastfeeding experiences than primiparous women. Pre- and postdelivery breastfeeding support should differentially target primiparous women to improve breastfeeding outcomes.

Breastfeeding medicine : the official journal of the Academy of Breastfeeding Medicine · 108 citationsread the source →

Data Mining and Content Analysis of the Chinese Social Media Platform Weibo During the Early COVID-19 Outbreak: Retrospective Observational Infoveillance Study.

Background: The coronavirus disease (COVID-19) pandemic, which began in Wuhan, China in December 2019, is rapidly spreading worldwide with over 1.9 million cases as of mid-April 2020. Infoveillance approaches using social media can help characterize disease distribution and public knowledge, attitudes, and behaviors critical to the early stages of an outbreak. Objective: The aim of this study is to conduct a quantitative and qualitative assessment of Chinese social media posts originating in Wuhan City on the Chinese microblogging platform Weibo during the early stages of the COVID-19 outbreak. Methods: Chinese-language messages from Wuhan were collected for 39 days between December 23, 2019, and January 30, 2020, on Weibo. For quantitative analysis, the total daily cases of COVID-19 in Wuhan were obtained from the Chinese National Health Commission, and a linear regression model was used to determine if Weibo COVID-19 posts were predictive of the number of cases reported. Qualitative content analysis and an inductive manual coding approach were used to identify parent classifications of news and user-generated COVID-19 topics. Results: A total of 115,299 Weibo posts were collected during the study time frame consisting of an average of 2956 posts per day (minimum 0, maximum 13,587). Quantitative analysis found a positive correlation between the number of Weibo posts and the number of reported cases from Wuhan, with approximately 10 more COVID-19 cases per 40 social media posts (P<.001). This effect size was also larger than what was observed for the rest of China excluding Hubei Province (where Wuhan is the capital city) and held when comparing the number of Weibo posts to the incidence proportion of cases in Hubei Province. Qualitative analysis of 11,893 posts during the first 21 days of the study period with COVID-19-related posts uncovered four parent classifications including Weibo discussions about the causative agent of the disease, changing epidemiological characteristics of the outbreak, public reaction to outbreak control and response measures, and other topics. Generally, these themes also exhibited public uncertainty and changing knowledge and attitudes about COVID-19, including posts exhibiting both protective and higher-risk behaviors. Conclusions: The results of this study provide initial insight into the origins of the COVID-19 outbreak based on quantitative and qualitative analysis of Chinese social media data at the initial epicenter in Wuhan City. Future studies should continue to explore the utility of social media data to predict COVID-19 disease severity, measure public reaction and behavior, and evaluate effectiveness of outbreak communication.

JMIR public health and surveillance · 93 citationsread the source →

Are interventions focused on gender-norms effective in preventing domestic violence against women in low and lower-middle income countries? A systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: One in three women experience intimate partner violence worldwide, according to many primary studies. However, systematic review and meta-analysis of intimate partner violence is very limited. Therefore, we set to summarize the findings of existing primary studies to generate evidence for informed decisions to tackle domestic violence against women in low and lower-middle income countries. Methods: Studies were searched from main databases (Medline via PubMed, EMBASE, CINAHL, PopLine and Web of Science), Google scholar and other relevant sources using electronic and manual techniques. Published and unpublished studies written in English and conducted among women aged (15-49 years) from 1994 to 2017 were eligible. Data were extracted independently by two authors, and recorded in Microsoft Excel sheet. Heterogeneity between included studies was assessed using I2, and publication bias was explored using visual inspection of funnel plot. Statistical analysis was carried out to determine the pooled prevalence using Comprehensive Meta-Analysis software. In addition, sub-group analysis was carried out by study-setting and types of intimate partner violence. Results: Fifty two studies were included in the systematic review. Of these, 33 studies were included in the meta-analysis. The pooled prevalence of lifetime intimate partner violence was 55% (95% CI: 52, 59%). Of these, main categories were lifetime physical violence [39% (95% CI: 33, 45%); psychological violence [45% (95% CI: 40, 52%)] and sexual violence [20% (95% CI: 17, 23%)]. Furthermore, the pooled prevalence of current intimate partner violence was 38% (95% CI: 34, 43%). Of these, physical violence [25% (95% CI: 21, 28%)]; psychological violence [30% (95% CI: 24, 36%)] and sexual violence [7.0% (95% CI: 6.6, 7.5%)] were the pooled prevalence for the major types of intimate partner violence. In addition, concurrent intimate partner violence was 13% (95% CI: 12, 15%). Individual, relationship, community and societal level factors were associated with intimate partner violence. Traditional community gender-norm transformation, stakeholders' engagement, women's empowerment, intervention integration and policy/legal framework were highly recommended interventions to prevent intimate partner violence. Conclusion: Lifetime and current intimate partner violence is common and unacceptably high. Therefore, concerned bodies will need to design and implement strategies to transform traditional gender norms, engage stakeholders, empower women and integrate service to prevent violence against women. Protocol registration: PROSPERO: 2017: CRD42017079977 .

Reproductive health · meta-analysis · 43 citationsread the source →

The effectiveness of third wave cognitive behavioural therapies for children and adolescents: A systematic review and meta-analysis.

Objectives: Third wave cognitive behavioural therapies are increasingly used with children and adolescents. This meta-analysis aimed to determine the effectiveness of four third-wave interventions (acceptance and commitment therapy, compassion focused therapy, mindfulness-based cognitive therapy, and metacognitive therapy) for youth. Methods: Four electronic databases were used to identify randomized controlled trials, which tested effects related to health, well-being and functioning. Sensitivity analyses considering study quality were conducted and moderators were explored. Results: The results based on 50 RCTs meeting inclusion criteria indicated emotional symptoms/internalizing problems (g = -.68, 95% CI -.98 to -.37, k = 43, N = 3265), behavioural difficulties/externalizing problems (g = -.62, 95% CI -1.01 to -.22, k = 23, N = 1659), interference from difficulties (g = -.46, 95% CI -.87 to -.05, k = 21, N = 1786), third wave processes (g = .39, 95% CI .17 to .62, k = 22, N = 1900), wellbeing/flourishing (g = .76, 95% CI .35 to 1.17, k = 21, N = 1303) and physical health/pain (g = .72, 95% CI .01 to 1.44, k = 9, N = 1171) yielded significant effects. Effect for quality of life (g = .62, 95% CI -.08 to 1.31, k = 12, N = 1271) was non-significant. When analysing only those studies rated moderate-high quality, third wave interventions yielded significant superiority effects compared to controls for emotional symptoms/internalizing problems (g = -.55, 95% CI -.82 to -.27, k = 28, N = 2110), interference from difficulties (g = -.48, 95% CI -.90 to -.05, k = 21, N = 1605), third wave processes (g = .27, 95% CI .11 to .43, k = 18, N = 1692), well-being/flourishing (g = .50, 95% CI .18 to .81, k = 16, N = 1063), and quality of life (g = .32, 95% CI .04 to .60, k = 10, N = 1212). Behavioural difficulties/externalizing problems (g = -.38, 95% CI -.86 to .10, k = 15, N = 1351) and physical health/pain (g = .52, 95% CI -.14 to 1.17, k = 8, N = 1139) ceased to be significant. Widespread heterogeneity raised concerns about generalizability and follow-up data was relatively sparse. Conclusions: This meta-analysis finds promising results for use of third wave CBT with youth, though the review has limitations.

The British journal of clinical psychology · meta-analysis · 19 citationsread the source →

The psychological and mental impact of coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) on medical staff and general public - A systematic review and meta-analysis.

The coronavirus disease 2019 (COVID-19) pandemic has caused enormous psychological impact worldwide. We conducted a systematic review and meta-analysis on the psychological and mental impact of COVID-19 among healthcare workers, the general population, and patients with higher COVID-19 risk published between 1 Nov 2019 to 25 May 2020. We conducted literature research using Embase, PubMed, Google scholar and WHO COVID-19 databases. Among the initial search of 9207 studies, 62 studies with 162,639 participants from 17 countries were included in the review. The pooled prevalence of anxiety and depression was 33% (95% confidence interval: 28%-38%) and 28% (23%-32%), respectively. The prevalence of anxiety and depression was the highest among patients with pre-existing conditions and COVID-19 infection (56% [39%-73%] and 55% [48%-62%]), and it was similar between healthcare workers and the general public. Studies from China, Italy, Turkey, Spain and Iran reported higher-than-pooled prevalence among healthcare workers and the general public. Common risk factors included being women, being nurses, having lower socioeconomic status, having high risks of contracting COVID-19, and social isolation. Protective factors included having sufficient medical resources, up-to-date and accurate information, and taking precautionary measures. In conclusion, psychological interventions targeting high-risk populations with heavy psychological distress are in urgent need.

Psychiatry research · meta-analysis · 1028 citationsread the source →

Interventions to Address Food Insecurity Among Adults in Canada and the US: A Systematic Review and Meta-analysis.

Importance: Inadequate access to food is a risk factor for poor health and the effectiveness of federal programs targeting food insecurity, such as the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP), are well-documented. The associations between other types of interventions to provide adequate food access and food insecurity status, health outcomes, and health care utilization, however, are unclear. Objective: To review evidence on the association between food insecurity interventions and food insecurity status, clinically-relevant health outcomes, and health care utilization among adults, excluding SNAP. Data sources: A systematic search for English-language literature was performed in PubMed Central and Cochrane Trials databases (inception to January 23, 2020), the Social Interventions Research and Evaluation Network database (December 10, 2019); and the gray literature using Google (February 1, 2021). Study selection: Studies of any design that assessed the association between food insecurity interventions for adult participants and food insecurity status, health outcomes, and health care utilization were screened for inclusion. Studies of interventions that described addressing participants' food needs or reporting food insecurity as an outcome were included. Interventions were categorized as home-delivered food, food offered at a secondary site, monetary assistance in the form of subsidies or income supplements, food desert interventions, and miscellaneous. Data extraction and synthesis: Data extraction was performed independently by 3 reviewers. Study quality was assessed using the Cochrane Risk of Bias Tool, the ROBINS-I (Risk of Bias in Non-Randomized Studies of Interventions) tool, and a modified version of the National Institutes of Health's Quality Assessment Tool for Before-After Studies With No Control. The certainty of evidence was based on GRADE (Grading of Recommendations Assessment, Development, and Evaluation) criteria and supplemented with mechanistic and parallel evidence. For outcomes within intervention categories with at least 3 studies, random effects meta-analysis was performed. Main outcomes and measures: Food insecurity (measured through surveys; eg, the 2-item Hunger Vital Sign), health outcomes (eg, hemoglobin A1c), and health care utilization (eg, hospitalizations, costs). Results: A total of 39 studies comprising 170 605 participants were included (8 randomized clinical trials and 31 observational studies). Of these, 14 studies provided high-certainty evidence of an association between offering food and reduced food insecurity (pooled random effects; adjusted odds ratio, 0.53; 95% CI, 0.33-0.67). Ten studies provided moderate-certainty evidence of an association between offering monetary assistance and reduced food insecurity (pooled random effects; adjusted odds ratio, 0.64; 95% CI, 0.49-0.84). There were fewer studies of the associations between interventions and health outcomes or health care utilization, and the evidence in these areas was of low or very low certainty that any food insecurity interventions were associated with changes in either. Conclusions and relevance: This systematic review with meta-analysis found that providing food and monetary assistance was associated with improved food insecurity measures; however, whether it translated to better health outcomes or reduced health care utilization was unclear.

JAMA health forum · meta-analysis · 69 citationsread the source →

Mental health of migrants with pre-migration exposure to armed conflict: a systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: Exposure to armed conflict has been associated with negative mental health consequences. We aimed to estimate the prevalence of generalised anxiety disorder, major depressive disorder, and post-traumatic stress disorder among migrants exposed to armed conflict. Methods: In this systematic review and meta-analysis, we searched online databases (Cochrane Library, Embase, LILACS, PsycInfo [via Ovid], PubMed, and Web of Science Core Collection) for relevant observational studies published between Jan 1, 1994, and June 28, 2021. We included studies that used standardised psychiatric interviews to assess generalised anxiety disorder, major depressive disorder, or post-traumatic stress disorder among migrants (refugees or internally displaced persons; aged ≥18 years) with pre-migration exposure to armed conflict. We excluded studies in which exposure to armed conflict could not be ascertained, studies that included a clinical population or people with chronic diseases that can trigger the onset of mental disease, and studies published before 1994. We used a random effects model to estimate each mental health disorder's pooled prevalence and random effects meta-regression to assess sources of heterogeneity. Two independent reviewers assessed the risk of bias for each study using the Joanna Briggs Institute Checklist for Prevalence Studies. The protocol was registered with PROSPERO, CRD42020209251. Findings: Of the 13 935 studies identified, 34 met our inclusion criteria; these studies accounted for 15 549 migrants. We estimated a prevalence of current post-traumatic stress disorder of 31% (95% CI 23-40); prevalence of current major depressive disorder of 25% (17-34); and prevalence of generalised anxiety disorder of 14% (5-35). Younger age was associated with a higher prevalence of current post-traumatic stress disorder (odds ratio 0·95 [95% CI 0·90-0·99]), lifetime post-traumatic stress disorder (0·88 [0·83-0·92]), and current generalised anxiety disorder (0·87 [0·78-0·97]). A longer time since displacement was associated with a lower lifetime prevalence of post-traumatic stress disorder (0·88 [0·81-0·95]) and major depressive disorder (0·81 [0·77-0·86]). Migrating to a middle-income (8·09 [3·06-21·40]) or low-income (39·29 [11·96-129·70]) country was associated with increased prevalence of generalised anxiety disorder. Interpretation: Migrants who are exposed to armed conflict are at high risk of mental health disorders. The mental health-care needs of migrants should be assessed soon after resettlement, and adequate care should be provided, with particular attention paid to young adults. Funding: Marie Skłodowska-Curie Actions (Horizon 2020-COFUND), MinCiencias (Colombia), and Swiss National Science Foundation.

The Lancet. Public health · meta-analysis · 111 citationsread the source →

Interleukin-6, C-reactive protein and biochemical parameters during prolonged intermittent fasting.

Background: It is well known that nutritional habits, sleeping patterns and meal frequency have profound effects on maintaining human health. Ramadan is a religious month for Islam, during which Muslims do not eat and drink during the daylight hours. The duration of restricted food and beverage intake is approximately 12 h/day for 1 month, which makes Ramadan a model of prolonged intermittent fasting. Methods: In order to evaluate the effects of long-lasting modifications of food intake on inflammatory markers and biochemical parameters 40 healthy volunteers of normal weight [20 females aged between 20 and 38 years, 20 males aged between 23 and 39 years, body mass index (BMI) <25 kg/m(2)] who fasted during Ramadan and another 28 healthy age- and BMI-matched volunteers (14 males, 14 females) who did not fast participated in the study. Venous blood samples were taken 1 week before Ramadan, during the last week of Ramadan and 3 weeks after Ramadan. Serum interleukin-6 (IL-6), C-reactive protein (CRP), homocysteine, vitamin B(12), folate, total cholesterol (TC), triglycerides, low-density lipoprotein (LDL) and high-density lipoprotein (HDL) levels were measured. Results: No significant changes were observed in serum total cholesterol, triglycerides and LDL levels. TC/HDL ratio (HDL risk factor) was decreased during and after Ramadan in both genders in the fasting group while there were no changes in the nonfasting group. IL-6 (p < 0.001), CRP (p < 0.001) and homocysteine (p < 0.01) levels were significantly low during Ramadan in the fasting subjects of both genders when compared to basal values (1 week before Ramadan). Conclusion: Our results demonstrate that prolonged intermittent fasting in a model like Ramadan has some positive effects on the inflammatory status of the body and on the risk factors for cardiovascular diseases such as homocysteine, CRP and TC/HDL ratio.

Annals of nutrition & metabolism · 122 citationsread the source →

Patient experiences with communication about sex during and after treatment for cancer.

Objective: We studied patients' experiences with oncology providers regarding communication about sexual issues during and after treatment for cancer. Methods: During development of the Patient-Reported Outcomes Measurement Information System (PROMIS(®)) Sexual Function measure, we collected focus group and survey data on communication with oncology professionals about sexual problems. We conducted 16 focus groups with patients and survivors (n = 109) and analyzed the discussions for major themes, including experiences discussing sex during oncology visits. During testing of the PROMIS Sexual Function measure, we assessed experiences discussing sexual problems with oncology professionals (n = 819) and measured bivariate associations between asking for information from clinicians and sexual function and satisfaction with sex life. Results: Most patients and survivors (74%) thought that discussions with oncology professionals about sexual problems were important, but whether they had ever received information about sexual function from a provider varied by cancer type (23% lung, 29% breast, 39% colorectal, and 79% prostate). Those who had asked an oncology professional about sexual problems had significantly greater interest in sexual activity as well as more sexual dysfunction. Conclusions: Sexual problems are a widespread concern among patients and survivors, but there is much variation in experiences of communication about sexual issues, and many patients do not receive the information they need from their oncology providers. There are large differences in sexual function between patients who do and do not ask providers about sexual problems. Sexual health has yet to be fully integrated into oncology care, even for cancers involving sex organs.

Psycho-oncology · 209 citationsread the source →

Psychotherapy for depression in older veterans via telemedicine: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority trial.

Background: Many older adults with major depression, particularly veterans, do not have access to evidence-based psychotherapy. Telemedicine could increase access to best-practice care for older adults facing barriers of mobility, stigma, and geographical isolation. We aimed to establish non-inferiority of behavioural activation therapy for major depression delivered via telemedicine to same-room care in largely male, older adult veterans. Methods: In this randomised, controlled, open-label, non-inferiority trial, we recruited veterans (aged ≥58 years) meeting DSM-IV criteria for major depressive disorder from the Ralph H Johnson Veterans Affairs Medical Center and four associated community outpatient-based clinics in the USA. We excluded actively psychotic or demented people, those with both suicidal ideation and clear intent, and those with substance dependence. The study coordinator randomly assigned participants (1:1; block size 2-6; stratified by race; computer-generated randomisation sequence by RGK) to eight sessions of behavioural activation for depression either via telemedicine or in the same room. The primary outcome was treatment response according to the Geriatric Depression Scale (GDS) and Beck Depression Inventory (BDI; defined as a 50% reduction in symptoms from baseline at 12 months), and Structured Clinical Interview for DSM-IV, clinician version (defined as no longer being diagnosed with major depressive disorder at 12 months follow-up), in the per-protocol population (those who completed at least four treatment sessions and for whom all outcome measurements were done). Those assessing outcomes were masked. The non-inferiority margin was 15%. This trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT00324701. Findings: Between April 1, 2007, and July 31, 2011, we screened 780 patients, and the study coordinator randomly assigned participants to either telemedicine (120 [50%]) or same-room treatment (121 [50%]). We included 100 (83%) patients in the per-protocol analysis in the telemedicine group and 104 (86%) in the same-room group. Treatment response according to GDS did not differ significantly between the telemedicine (22 [22·45%, 90% CI 15·52-29·38] patients) and same-room (21 [20·39%, 90% CI 13·86-26·92]) groups, with an absolute difference of 2·06% (90% CI -7·46 to 11·58). Response according to BDI also did not differ significantly (telemedicine 19 [24·05%, 90% CI 16·14-31·96] patients; same room 19 [23·17%, 90% CI 15·51-30·83]), with an absolute difference of 0·88% (90% CI -10·13 to 11·89). Response on the Structured Clinical Interview for DSM-IV, clinician version, also did not differ significantly (39 [43·33%, 90% CI 34·74-51·93] patients in the telemedicine group and 46 [48·42%, 90% CI 39·99-56·85] in the same-room group), with a difference of -5·09% (-17·13 to 6·95; p=0·487). Results from the intention-to-treat population were similar. MEM analyses showed that no significant differences existed between treatment trajectories over time for BDI and GDS. The criteria for non-inferiority were met. We did not note any adverse events. Interpretation: Telemedicine-delivered psychotherapy for older adults with major depression is not inferior to same-room treatment. This finding shows that evidence-based psychotherapy can be delivered, without modification, via home-based telemedicine, and that this method can be used to overcome barriers to care associated with distance from and difficulty with attendance at in-person sessions in older adults. Funding: US Department of Veterans Affairs.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 123 citationsread the source →

Benefits of Early Versus Delayed Palliative Care to Informal Family Caregivers of Patients With Advanced Cancer: Outcomes From the ENABLE III Randomized Controlled Trial.

Purpose: To determine the effect of early versus delayed initiation of a palliative care intervention for family caregivers (CGs) of patients with advanced cancer. Patients and methods: Between October 2010 and March 2013, CGs of patients with advanced cancer were randomly assigned to receive three structured weekly telephone coaching sessions, monthly follow-up, and a bereavement call either early after enrollment or 3 months later. CGs of patients with advanced cancer were recruited from a National Cancer Institute cancer center, a Veterans Administration Medical Center, and two community outreach clinics. Outcomes were quality of life (QOL), depression, and burden (objective, stress, and demand). Results: A total of 122 CGs (early, n = 61; delayed, n = 61) of 207 patients participated; average age was 60 years, and most were female (78.7%) and white (92.6%). Between-group differences in depression scores from enrollment to 3 months (before delayed group started intervention) favored the early group (mean difference, -3.4; SE, 1.5; d = -.32; P = .02). There were no differences in QOL (mean difference, -2; SE, 2.3; d = -.13; P = .39) or burden (objective: mean difference, 0.3; SE, .7; d = .09; P = .64; stress: mean difference, -.5; SE, .5; d = -.2; P = .29; demand: mean difference, 0; SE, .7; d = -.01; P = .97). In decedents' CGs, a terminal decline analysis indicated between-group differences favoring the early group for depression (mean difference, -3.8; SE, 1.5; d = -.39; P = .02) and stress burden (mean difference, -1.1; SE, .4; d = -.44; P = .01) but not for QOL (mean difference, -4.9; SE, 2.6; d = -.3; P = .07), objective burden (mean difference, -.6; SE, .6; d = -.18; P = .27), or demand burden (mean difference, -.7; SE, .6; d = -.23; P = .22). Conclusion: Early-group CGs had lower depression scores at 3 months and lower depression and stress burden in the terminal decline analysis. Palliative care for CGs should be initiated as early as possible to maximize benefits.

Journal of clinical oncology : official journal of the American Society of Clinical Oncology · randomised controlled trial · 342 citationsread the source →

Combined prevention for substance use, depression, and anxiety in adolescence: a cluster-randomised controlled trial of a digital online intervention.

Background: Substance use, depression, and anxiety in adolescence are major public health problems requiring new scalable prevention strategies. We aimed to assess the effectiveness of a combined online universal (ie, delivered to all pupils) school-based preventive intervention targeting substance use, depression, and anxiety in adolescence. Methods: We did a multicentre, cluster-randomised controlled trial in secondary schools in Australia, with pupils in year 8 or 9 (aged 13-14 years). Participating schools were randomly assigned (1:1:1:1) to one of four intervention conditions: (1) Climate Schools-Substance Use, focusing on substance use only; (2) Climate Schools-Mental Health, focusing on depression and anxiety only; (3) Climate Schools-Combined, focusing on the prevention of substance use, depression, and anxiety; or (4) active control. The interventions were delivered in school classrooms in an online delivery format and used a mixture of peer cartoon storyboards and classroom activities that were focused on alcohol, cannabis, anxiety, and depression. The interventions were delivered for 2 years and primary outcomes were knowledge related to alcohol, cannabis, and mental health; alcohol use, including heavy episodic drinking; and depression and anxiety symptoms at 12, 24, and 30 months after baseline. This trial is registered with the Australian New Zealand Clinical Trials Registry (ACTRN12613000723785) and an extended follow-up is underway. Findings: Between Sept 1, 2013, and Feb 28, 2014, we recruited 88 schools (12 391 pupils), of whom 71 schools and 6386 (51·5%) pupils were analysed (17 schools dropped out and 1308 pupils declined to participate). We allocated 18 schools (1739 [27·25%] pupils; 1690 [97·2%] completed at least one follow-up) to the substance use condition, 18 schools (1594 [25·0%] pupils; 1560 [97·9%] completed at least one follow-up) to the mental health condition, 16 schools (1497 [23·4%] pupils; 1443 [96·4%] completed at least one follow-up) to the combined condition, and 19 schools (1556 [23·4%] pupils; 1513 [97·2%] completed at least one follow-up) to the control condition. Compared with controls, the combined intervention group had increased knowledge related to alcohol and cannabis at 12, 24, and 30 months (standardised mean difference [SMD] for alcohol 0·26 [95% CI 0·14 to 0·39] and for cannabis 0·17 [0·06 to 0·28] at 30 months), increased knowledge related to mental health at 24 months (0·17 [0·08 to 0·27]), reduced growth in their odds of drinking and heavy episodic drinking at 12, 24, and 30 months (odds ratio for drinking 0·25 [95% CI 0·12 to 0·51], and for heavy episodic drinking 0·15 [0·04 to 0·58] at 30 months), and reduced increases in anxiety symptoms at 12 and 30 months (SMD -0·12 [95% CI -0·22 to -0·01] at 30 months). We found no difference in symptoms or probable diagnosis of depression. The combined intervention group also showed improvement in alcohol use outcomes compared with the substance use and mental health interventions and improvements in anxiety outcomes when compared with the mental health intervention only. Interpretation: Combined online prevention of substance use, depression, and anxiety led to increased knowledge of alcohol, cannabis, and mental health, reduced increase in the odds of any drinking and heavy episodic drinking, and reduced symptoms of anxiety over a 30-month period. These findings provide the first evidence of the effectiveness of an online universal school-based preventive intervention targeting substance use, depression, and anxiety in adolescence. Funding: Australian National Health and Medical Research Council.

The Lancet. Digital health · randomised controlled trial · 62 citationsread the source →

Feedback-informed treatment versus usual psychological treatment for depression and anxiety: a multisite, open-label, cluster randomised controlled trial.

Background: Previous research suggests that the use of outcome feedback technology can enable psychological therapists to identify and resolve obstacles to clinical improvement. We aimed to assess the effectiveness of an outcome feedback quality assurance system applied in stepped care psychological services. Methods: This multisite, open-label, cluster randomised controlled trial was done at eight National Health Service (NHS) Trusts in England, involving therapists who were qualified to deliver evidence-based low-intensity or high-intensity psychological interventions. Adult patients (18 years or older) who accessed individual therapy with participating therapists were eligible for inclusion, except patients who accessed group therapies and those who attended less than two individual therapy sessions. Therapists were randomly assigned (1:1) to an outcome feedback intervention group or a treatment-as-usual control group by use of a computer-generated randomisation algorithm. The allocation of patients to therapists was quasi-random, whereby patients on waiting lists were allocated sequentially on the basis of therapist availability. All patients received low-intensity (less than eight sessions) or high-intensity (up to 20 sessions) psychological therapies for the duration of the 1-year study period. An automated computer algorithm alerted therapists in the outcome feedback group to patients who were not on track, and primed them to review these patients in clinical supervision. The primary outcome was symptom severity on validated depression (Patient Health Questionnaire-9 [PHQ-9]) and anxiety (Generalised Anxiety Disorder-7 [GAD-7]) measures after treatment of varying durations, which were compared between groups with multilevel modelling, controlling for cluster (therapist) effects. We used an intention-to-treat approach. This trial was prospectively registered with ISRCTN, number ISRCTN12459454. Findings: In total, 79 therapists were recruited to the study between Jan 8, 2016, and July 15, 2016, but two did not participate. Of these participants, 39 (51%) were randomly assigned to the outcome feedback group and 38 (49%) to the control group. Overall, 2233 patients were included in the trial (1176 [53%] were treated by therapists in the outcome feedback group, and 1057 [47%] by therapists in the control group). Patients classified as not on track had less severe symptoms after treatment if they were allocated to the outcome feedback group than those in the control group (PHQ-9 d=0·23, B=-1·03 [95% CI -1·84 to -0·23], p=0·012; GAD-7 d=0·19, B=-0·85 [-1·56 to -0·14], p=0·019). Interpretation: Supplementing psychological therapy with low-cost feedback technology can reduce symptom severity in patients at risk of poor response to treatment. This evidence supports the implementation of outcome feedback in stepped care psychological services. Funding: English NHS and Department of Health Sciences, University of York, York, UK.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 86 citationsread the source →

Circumcision versus preputioplasty for balanitis xerotica obliterans: a randomised controlled feasibility trial.

Objectives: To determine: (i) feasibility for a randomised controlled trial (RCT) comparing circumcision to preputioplasty and intralesional triamcinolone (PIT) to treat balanitis xerotica obliterans (BXO) and (ii) patient outcomes to inform future study design. Patients and methods: Approval was obtained from the UK Health Research Authority and local Research Ethics Committee (Reference 16/NW/0364) and the trial protocol registered with ClinicalTrials.gov (NCT02854995). A total of 20 boys (aged 2-16 years) with BXO were randomised to either circumcision or PIT (online parallel group 1:1 allocation, non-blinded). Exclusion criteria were: (i) previous penile surgery and (ii) contraindication for either treatment. Follow-up (including satisfaction questionnaire) was at 6 weeks, 3 and 12 months. Data are presented as median (interquartile range [IQR]), continuous variables were compared by t-test. Results: A total of 54 boys were approached over 18 months: 23 (45%) were recruited and randomised. The commonest reason for non-entry was treatment preference: 12 preferred circumcision, 18 preferred PIT. Four patients withdrew after randomisation, three did not want circumcision and one did not want PIT. The groups were similar in terms of age (median [IQR] 11 [6-12] vs 8 [7-10] years, P = 0.53) and duration of symptoms (median [IQR] 6 [6-15] vs 6 [2-24] months, P = 0.77). There were no protocol breaches, serious adverse events or postoperative meatal stenosis. There was one self-resolving haematoma after PIT and one suture granuloma after circumcision. Two boys went on to have a circumcision after PIT. Overall, satisfaction levels were high for both groups. Conclusion: A definitive RCT of circumcision vs PIT for BXO appears feasible, with 39% of those approached completing the trial. More families preferred PIT. A robust comparison in the form of a multicentred RCT is required.

BJU international · randomised controlled trial · 5 citationsread the source →

Novel community health worker strategy for HIV service engagement in a hyperendemic community in Rakai, Uganda: A pragmatic, cluster-randomized trial.

Background: Effective implementation strategies are needed to increase engagement in HIV services in hyperendemic settings. We conducted a pragmatic cluster-randomized trial in a high-risk, highly mobile fishing community (HIV prevalence: approximately 38%) in Rakai, Uganda, to assess the impact of a community health worker-delivered, theory-based (situated Information, Motivation, and Behavior Skills), motivational interviewing-informed, and mobile phone application-supported counseling strategy called "Health Scouts" to promote engagement in HIV treatment and prevention services. Methods and findings: The study community was divided into 40 contiguous, randomly allocated clusters (20 intervention clusters, n = 1,054 participants at baseline; 20 control clusters, n = 1,094 participants at baseline). From September 2015 to December 2018, the Health Scouts were deployed in intervention clusters. Community-wide, cross-sectional surveys of consenting 15 to 49-year-old residents were conducted at approximately 15 months (mid-study) and at approximately 39 months (end-study) assessing the primary programmatic outcomes of self-reported linkage to HIV care, antiretroviral therapy (ART) use, and male circumcision, and the primary biologic outcome of HIV viral suppression (<400 copies/mL). Secondary outcomes included HIV testing coverage, HIV incidence, and consistent condom use. The primary intent-to-treat analysis used log-linear binomial regression with generalized estimating equation to estimate prevalence risk ratios (PRR) in the intervention versus control arm. A total of 2,533 (45% female, mean age: 31 years) and 1,903 (46% female; mean age 32 years) residents completed the mid-study and end-study surveys, respectively. At mid-study, there were no differences in outcomes between arms. At end-study, self-reported receipt of the Health Scouts intervention was 38% in the intervention arm and 23% in the control arm, suggesting moderate intervention uptake in the intervention arm and substantial contamination in the control arm. At end-study, intention-to-treat analysis found higher HIV care coverage (PRR: 1.06, 95% CI: 1.01 to 1.10, p = 0.011) and ART coverage (PRR: 1.05, 95% CI: 1.01 to 1.10, p = 0.028) among HIV-positive participants in the intervention compared with the control arm. Male circumcision coverage among all men (PRR: 1.05, 95% CI: 0.96 to 1.14, p = 0.31) and HIV viral suppression among HIV-positive participants (PRR: 1.04, 95% CI: 0.98 to 1.12, p = 0.20) were higher in the intervention arm, but differences were not statistically significant. No differences were seen in secondary outcomes. Study limitations include reliance on self-report for programmatic outcomes and substantial contamination which may have diluted estimates of effect. Conclusions: A novel community health worker intervention improved HIV care and ART coverage in an HIV hyperendemic setting but did not clearly improve male circumcision coverage or HIV viral suppression. This community-based, implementation strategy may be a useful component in some settings for HIV epidemic control. Trial registration: ClinicalTrials.gov NCT02556957.

PLoS medicine · randomised controlled trial · 20 citationsread the source →

Advance care planning in patients with advanced cancer: A 6-country, cluster-randomised clinical trial.

Background: Advance care planning (ACP) supports individuals to define, discuss, and record goals and preferences for future medical treatment and care. Despite being internationally recommended, randomised clinical trials of ACP in patients with advanced cancer are scarce. Methods and findings: To test the implementation of ACP in patients with advanced cancer, we conducted a cluster-randomised trial in 23 hospitals across Belgium, Denmark, Italy, Netherlands, Slovenia, and United Kingdom in 2015-2018. Patients with advanced lung (stage III/IV) or colorectal (stage IV) cancer, WHO performance status 0-3, and at least 3 months life expectancy were eligible. The ACTION Respecting Choices ACP intervention as offered to patients in the intervention arm included scripted ACP conversations between patients, family members, and certified facilitators; standardised leaflets; and standardised advance directives. Control patients received care as usual. Main outcome measures were quality of life (operationalised as European Organisation for Research and Treatment of Cancer [EORTC] emotional functioning) and symptoms. Secondary outcomes were coping, patient satisfaction, shared decision-making, patient involvement in decision-making, inclusion of advance directives (ADs) in hospital files, and use of hospital care. In all, 1,117 patients were included (442 intervention; 675 control), and 809 (72%) completed the 12-week questionnaire. Patients' age ranged from 18 to 91 years, with a mean of 66; 39% were female. The mean number of ACP conversations per patient was 1.3. Fidelity was 86%. Sixteen percent of patients found ACP conversations distressing. Mean change in patients' quality of life did not differ between intervention and control groups (T-score -1.8 versus -0.8, p = 0.59), nor did changes in symptoms, coping, patient satisfaction, and shared decision-making. Specialist palliative care (37% versus 27%, p = 0.002) and AD inclusion in hospital files (10% versus 3%, p < 0.001) were more likely in the intervention group. A key limitation of the study is that recruitment rates were lower in intervention than in control hospitals. Conclusions: Our results show that quality of life effects were not different between patients who had ACP conversations and those who received usual care. The increased use of specialist palliative care and AD inclusion in hospital files of intervention patients is meaningful and requires further study. Our findings suggest that alternative approaches to support patient-centred end-of-life care in this population are needed. Trial registration: ISRCTN registry ISRCTN63110516.

PLoS medicine · randomised controlled trial · 101 citationsread the source →

Fezolinetant for treatment of moderate-to-severe vasomotor symptoms associated with menopause (SKYLIGHT 1): a phase 3 randomised controlled study.

Background: Neurokinin 3 receptor antagonists are potential non-hormonal therapies for the treatment of vasomotor symptoms in menopausal women as options are scarce for those who cannot or do not want to take hormone therapy. Fezolinetant is one of the first non-hormonal neurokinin 3 receptor antagonists in development for the treatment of vasomotor symptoms due to menopause. This study investigated the safety and efficacy of fezolinetant for the treatment of moderate-to-severe vasomotor symptoms associated with menopause. Methods: SKYLIGHT 1 is a randomised, double-blind, placebo-controlled, 12-week, phase 3 trial with a 40-week active treatment extension. This trial was done at 97 facilities across the USA, Canada, Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland, Spain, and the UK. Women aged 40-65 years with an average of seven or more moderate-to-severe hot flashes per day were randomly assigned (1:1:1) to once-daily exact-matched placebo, fezolinetant 30 mg, or fezolinetant 45 mg. Randomisation was done using a web-based interactive response system and investigators, project team members, clinical staff, and participants were masked to treatment assignment. Coprimary endpoints were mean change in frequency and severity of vasomotor symptoms from baseline to weeks 4 and 12. The efficacy and safety analyses comprised all randomly assigned participants who received at least one dose of study drug. This trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov (NCT04003155) and is completed. Findings: Between July 11, 2019, and Aug 11, 2021, 2205 women were recruited of whom 175 were assigned to placebo, 176 to fezolinetant 30 mg, and 176 to fezolinetant 45 mg (175 in the placebo group, 174 in the fezolinetant 30 mg group, and 173 in the fezolinetant 45 mg received at least one dose [safety analysis set]). One participant randomly assigned to fezolinetant 45 mg received fezolinetant 30 mg in error, so the efficacy analysis set (full analysis set) consisted of 173 in the fezolinetant 30 mg group and 174 in the fezolinetant 45 mg group. 23 participants in the placebo group, 31 in the fezolinetant 30 mg group, and 13 in the fezolinetant 45 mg group discontinued treatment before week 12, mostly due to adverse events or participant withdrawal. Compared with placebo, fezolinetant 30 mg and fezolinetant 45 mg significantly reduced the frequency of vasomotor symptoms at week 4 (difference in change in least squares mean -1·87 [SE 0·42; p<0·001], -2·07 [SE 0·42; p<0·001]) and week 12 (-2·39 [SE 0·44; p<0·001], -2·55 [SE 0·43; p<0·001]). Compared with placebo, fezolinetant 30 mg and 45 mg significantly reduced the severity of vasomotor symptoms at week 4 (-0·15 [0·06; p=0·012], -0·19 [0·06; p=0·002]) and week 12 (-0·24 [0·08; p=0·002], -0·20 [0·08; p=0·007]). Improvements in frequency and severity of vasomotor symptoms were observed after 1 week and maintained over 52 weeks. During the first 12 weeks, treatment-emergent adverse events occurred in 65 (37%) of 174 women in the fezolinetant 30 mg group, 75 (43%) of 173 in the fezolinetant 45 mg group, and 78 (45%) of 175 in the placebo group. The incidence of liver enzyme elevations was low (placebo n=1; fezolinetant 30 mg n=2; fezolinetant 45 mg n=0) and these events were generally asymptomatic, transient, and resolved while on treatment or after treatment discontinuation. Interpretation: Data support the clinical use of fezolinetant as a non-hormonal treatment for vasomotor symptoms associated with menopause. The study was placebo-controlled for 12 weeks followed by a 40-week blinded extension to assess the maintenance of effect. Furthermore, the population studied was diverse and representative of the potential target population for fezolinetant therapy. Further characterisation of the benefit of fezolinetant on quality of life, including on symptoms of mood and sexual wellbeing, merits investigation. Funding: Astellas Pharma.

Lancet (London, England) · randomised controlled trial · 172 citationsread the source →

Metabolic and bariatric surgery versus intensive non-surgical treatment for adolescents with severe obesity (AMOS2): a multicentre, randomised, controlled trial in Sweden.

Background: Severe obesity in adolescents has a profound impact on current and future health. Metabolic and bariatric surgery (MBS) is increasingly used in adolescents internationally. However, to our knowledge, there are no randomised trials examining the currently most used surgical techniques. Our aim was to evaluate changes in BMI and secondary health and safety outcomes after MBS. Methods: The Adolescent Morbid Obesity Surgery 2 (AMOS2) study is a randomised, open-label, multicentre trial done at three university hospitals in Sweden (located in Stockholm, Gothenburg, and Malmö). Adolescents aged 13-16 years with a BMI of at least 35 kg/m2, who had attended treatment for obesity for at least 1 year, passed assessments from a paediatric psychologist and a paediatrician, and had a Tanner pubertal stage of at least 3, were randomly assigned (1:1) to MBS or intensive non-surgical treatment. Exclusion criteria included monogenic or syndromic obesity, major psychiatric illness, and regular self-induced vomiting. Computerised randomisation was stratified for sex and recruitment site. Allocation was concealed for both staff and participants until the end of the inclusion day, and then all participants were unmasked to treatment intervention. One group underwent MBS (primarily gastric bypass), while the other group received intensive non-surgical treatment starting with 8 weeks of low-calorie diet. The primary outcome was 2-year change in BMI, analysed as intention-to-treat. The trial is registered at ClinicalTrials.gov, NCT02378259. Findings: 500 people were assessed for eligibility between Aug 27, 2014, and June 7, 2017. 450 participants were excluded (397 did not meet inclusion criteria, 39 declined to participate, and 14 were excluded for various other reasons). Of the 50 remaining participants, 25 (19 females and six males) were randomly assigned to receive MBS and 25 (18 females and seven males) were assigned to intensive non-surgical treatment. Three participants (6%; one in the MBS group and two in the intensive non-surgical treatment group) did not participate in the 2-year follow-up, and in total 47 (94%) participants were assessed for the primary endpoint. Mean age of participants was 15·8 years (SD 0·9) and mean BMI at baseline was 42·6 kg/m2 (SD 5·2). After 2 years, BMI change was -12·6 kg/m2 (-35·9 kg; n=24) among adolescents undergoing MBS (Roux-en-Y gastric bypass [n=23], sleeve gastrectomy [n=2]) and -0·2 kg/m2 (0·4 kg; [n=23]) among participants in the intensive non-surgical treatment group (mean difference -12·4 kg/m2 [95% CI -15·5 to -9·3]; p<0·0001). Five (20%) patients in the intensive non-surgical group crossed over to MBS during the second year. Adverse events (n=4) after MBS were mild but included one cholecystectomy. Regarding safety outcomes, surgical patients had a reduction in bone mineral density, while controls were unchanged after 2 years (z-score change mean difference -0·9 [95% CI -1·2 to -0·6]). There were no significant differences between the groups in vitamin and mineral levels, gastrointestinal symptoms (except less reflux in the surgical group), or in mental health at the 2-year follow-up. Interpretation: MBS is an effective and well tolerated treatment for adolescents with severe obesity resulting in substantial weight loss and improvements in several aspects of metabolic health and physical quality of life over 2 years, and should be considered in adolescents with severe obesity. Funding: Sweden's Innovation Agency, Swedish Research Council Health.

The Lancet. Child & adolescent health · randomised controlled trial · 45 citationsread the source →

Effects of a Home-Based and Volunteer-Administered Physical Training, Nutritional, and Social Support Program on Malnutrition and Frailty in Older Persons: A Randomized Controlled Trial.

Objectives: The aim of this study was to examine the effects of a home-based and volunteer-administered physical training and nutritional intervention program compared with social support intervention on nutritional and frailty status in prefrail and frail community-dwelling older persons. Design: This was a randomized controlled trial in which community-dwelling persons (mean age = 83 years) were recruited and randomly assigned to the physical training and nutritional intervention group (PTN, n = 39) and the social support group (SoSu, n = 41). The study was conducted by trained lay nonprofessionals. Setting: The community-dwelling older persons in both groups were visited twice a week by trained nonprofessional volunteers (buddies) in Vienna, Austria. Participants: Eighty prefrail and frail adults aged 65 years or older. Intervention: In the PTN group, both the buddies and older persons performed 6 strength exercises within a circuit training session and discussed nutrition-related aspects. The active control group (SoSu) had the opportunity to perform cognitive training in addition to the social contact. Measurements: Outcome measures as nutritional (Mini Nutritional Assessment long form [MNA-LF]) and frailty status (Frailty Instrument for Primary Care of the Survey of Health, Ageing and Retirement in Europe [SHARE-FI]) were obtained at baseline and after 12 weeks. Results: Significant improvements in the MNA-LF score (1.54 points, 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.51-2.56; P = .004) and the SHARE-FI score (-0.71 discrete factor score values, 95% CI -1.07, -0.35; P < .001) were observed in the PTN group after 12 weeks. In both groups, the prevalence of impaired nutritional status and frailty decreased significantly over time. The prevalence of impaired nutritional status decreased by 25% in the PTN group and by 23% in the SoSu group. Moreover, the prevalence of frailty decreased by 17% in the PTN group and by 16% in the SoSu group. The presence of impaired nutritional status at baseline was independently associated with greater changes in the nutritional (adjusted odds ratio [OR] 3.18, 95% CI 1.26-7.98; P = .014) and frailty status (adjusted OR 3.16, 95% CI 1.01-9.93; P = .049) after 12 weeks. Conclusion: The results indicate that a home-based physical training, nutritional, and social support intervention conducted by nonprofessionals is feasible and can help to tackle malnutrition and frailty in older persons living at home. Furthermore, social support alone also can result in improvement. In particular, older adults with impaired nutritional status at baseline can benefit more from the intervention. Such a home visit program might also have the potential to prevent future health risks and could allay isolation and loneliness.

Journal of the American Medical Directors Association · randomised controlled trial · 126 citationsread the source →

Effects of a parenting intervention to address maternal psychological wellbeing and child development and growth in rural Uganda: a community-based, cluster randomised trial.

Background: Parenting interventions have been implemented to improve the compromised developmental potential among 39% of children younger than 5 years living in low-income and middle-income countries. Maternal wellbeing is important for child development, especially in children younger than 3 years who are vulnerable and dependent on their mothers for nutrition and stimulation. We assessed an integrated, community-based parenting intervention that targeted both child development and maternal wellbeing in rural Uganda. Methods: In this community-based, cluster randomised trial, we assessed the effectiveness of a manualised, parenting intervention in Lira, Uganda. We selected and randomly assigned 12 parishes (1:1) to either parenting intervention or control (inclusion on a waitlist with a brief message on nutrition) groups using a computer-generated list of random numbers. Within each parish, we selected two to three eligible communities that had a parish office or a primary school in which a preschool could be established, more than 75 households with children younger than 6 years, and at least 15 socially disadvantaged families (ie, maternal education of primary school level or lower) with at least one child younger than 36 months. Participants within communities were mother-child dyads, where the child was 12-36 months of age at enrollment, and the mother had low maternal education. In the parenting intervention group, participants attended 12 fortnightly peer-led group sessions focusing on child care and maternal wellbeing. The primary outcomes were cognitive and receptive language development, as measured with the Bayley Scales of Infant Development, 3rd edn. Secondary outcomes included self-reported maternal depressive symptoms, using the Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale, and child growth. Theoretically-relevant parenting practices, including the Home Observation for Measurement of the Environment inventory, and mother-care variables, such as perceived spousal support, were also assessed as potential mediators. Baseline assessments were done in January, 2013, and endline assessments were done in November, 2013, 3 months after completion of the programme. Ethics approval was received from Mbarara and McGill universities. This trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, NCT01906606. Findings: Between December, 2012, and January, 2013, 13 communities (194 dyads) were randomly assigned to receive intervention, and 12 communities (154 dyads) were assigned to a waitlist control. 319 dyads completed baseline measures (171 in the intervention group and 148 in the control group), and 291 dyads completed endline measures (160 in the intervention group and 131 in the control group). At endline, children in the intervention group had significantly higher cognitive scores (58·90 vs 55·65, effect size 0·36, 95% CI 0·12-0·59) and receptive language scores (23·86 vs 22·40, 0·27, 0·03-0·50) than did children in the control group. Mothers in the intervention group reported significantly fewer depressive symptoms (15·36 vs 18·61, -0·391, 95% CI -0·62 to -0·16) than did mothers in the control group. However, no differences were found in child growth between groups. Interpretation: The 12 session integrated parenting intervention delivered by non-professional community members improved child development and maternal wellbeing in rural Uganda. Because this intervention was largely managed and implemented by a local organisation, using local community members and minimal resources, such a programme has the potential to be replicated and scaled up in other low-resource, village-based settings. Funding: Plan Uganda via Plan Finland (Ministry of Foreign Affairs) and Plan Australia (Australian Aid).

The Lancet. Global health · randomised controlled trial · 208 citationsread the source →

Predictors and course of chronic fatigue in long-term breast cancer survivors.

Background: The course of fatigue in long-term breast cancer survivors (BCSs) is unknown. The current study examined chronic fatigue (CF) cross-sectionally and longitudinally in relapse-free women up to 10 years after multimodal treatment for BC stage II/III. The prevalence of persistent fatigue (PF: having CF at two assessments separated by >2 years) and its predictors were also investigated. Methods: Data from questionnaires (including the Fatigue Questionnaire and questions regarding socio-demographics and physical symptoms) were collected twice from 249 BCSs: 2.5-7 years post-BC diagnosis (T1) and 2.5-3 years thereafter (T2). A physical examination including blood sampling was performed at T1. Results: CF was diagnosed in 33% of the women at T1 and in 39% at T2, including 57 (23%) subjects with PF. Current psychological distress, treatment-area related discomfort and high body mass index (BMI) were associated with CF at T1 and predicted PF. Increased leukocyte count also predicted PF. Treatment for mental problems prior to the BC, increased hsCRP-level and respiratory symptoms were associated with CF at T1 but did not predict PF. Conclusions: Women may experience fatigue up to 10 years after multimodal BC treatment, with about one third having CF and about one fourth having PF. Implications for cancer survivors: During follow-up, BCSs and their doctors should maximize their efforts to reduce psychological distress, overweight and pain within the BC-treated area, all linked to the development of persistent fatigue.

Journal of cancer survivorship : research and practice · 130 citationsread the source →

The Social Epidemiology of Human Immunodeficiency Virus/Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome

Social epidemiology is defined as the study of the distribution of health outcomes and their social determinants (1). It builds on the classic epidemiologic triangle of host, agent, and environment to focus explicitly on the role of social determinants in infectious disease transmission and progression. These determinants are the “features of and pathways by which societal conditions affect health” (2, p. 697). Early studies of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) focused on individual characteristics and behaviors in determining HIV risk, an approach that Fee and Krieger (3) refer to as “biomedical individualism.” Biomedical individualism is the basis of risk factor epidemiology; by contrast, the social epidemiology perspective emphasizes social conditions as fundamental causes of disease (4) (table 1). Social epidemiologists examine how persons become exposed to risk or protective factors and under what social conditions individual risk factors are related to disease. Social factors are thus the focus of analysis and are not simply adjusted for as potentially confounding factors or used as proxies for unavailable individual-level data. Social factors are indeed critical to understanding nonuniform infectious disease patterns that emerge as a result of the dependent nature of disease transmission or the idea that an outcome in one person is dependent upon outcomes and exposures in others (5, 6). Contact patterns that enhance HIV/AIDS vulnerability may be conceptualized at multiple levels. Figure 1 distinguishes determinants of HIV/AIDS at three levels: individual, social, and structural. Individual factors include biologic, demographic, and behavioral risk factors that may influence the risk of HIV acquisition and disease progression. Social-level factors include critical pathways by which community and network structures link persons to society. These structures are central to understanding the diffusion and differential distribution of HIV/AIDS in population subgroups. Structural-level factors include social and economic factors, as well as laws and policies. These factors, in turn, affect HIV transmission dynamics and the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS. Infectious disease epidemiology provides models of the mechanisms through which social determinants affect HIV transmission (7). For example, the basic reproductive number of an infectious disease, R0 (8), describes secondary infections that arise from a primary infection. In the equation R0 = βCD, β is the probability of infection per contact, C is the number of contacts, and D is the duration of infectivity. The goal of intervention efforts is to reduce the empirical value of these terms by modifying the social conditions under which individual risk factors lead to disease. Examples of factors that affect the component terms of R0 in HIV epidemiology are presented in table 2. In this review, we present existing evidence linking social and structural determinants to HIV/AIDS. In addition, we discuss the implications of these findings for future social epidemiology research on HIV/AIDS as well as the design of more effective HIV/AIDS interventions. We searched the published literature to identify conceptual and empirical research reports on the social epidemiology of HIV/AIDS. Five databases were searched: PsycINFO (American Psychological Association, Washington, DC), PubMed (MEDLINE; National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland), Social Science Citation Index (Web of Science; Thomson ISI, Stamford, Connecticut), Sociological Abstracts (CSA, Bethesda, Maryland), and Digital Dissertations (ProQuest; UMI, Ann Arbor, Michigan). Searches were designed to include the factors we specified in our framework as social or structural factors (figure 1). Searches were limited to published articles in the English language for the period 1981–2003. The following keywords were included in each search: AIDS/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, HIV, and epidemiol*. Additional searches were conducted by using combinations of keywords listed in Appendix table 1 corresponding with our framework. We identified four categories of social-level factors of importance to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: cultural context, social networks, neighborhood effects, and social capital. Each uses different conceptual and methodological approaches to examine the effects of social forces on population HIV/AIDS vulnerability. Anthropologist Edward Tylor defined culture as “that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, law, morals, custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member of society” (9, p. 1). Anthropologic and epidemiologic approaches may be integrated in a variety of ways to identify features of the social environment that affect HIV/AIDS risk. One way to explore how the social environment affects HIV/AIDS epidemiology is through the use of mixed research methods. Mixed-methods study designs integrate qualitative and quantitative research methods either sequentially or concurrently (10). In sequential study designs, qualitative methods may be used to explore a topic under study or to explain quantitative epidemiologic findings. Concurrent study designs are meant to confirm, cross-validate, or corroborate findings within a single study. A common type of concurrent mixed methods study is “triangulation,” and this approach has been used extensively in rapid assessments of illicit drug use and HIV/AIDS (11–13). Mixed methods approaches are particularly well suited to the investigation of the often hidden and stigmatizing behavioral and social factors underlying HIV epidemics. One exemplary study combining qualitative methods with quantitative methods was conducted by Beyrer et al. (14) to examine the role of overland heroin trafficking routes in shaping explosive HIV/AIDS epidemics among injection drug users in Southeast Asia. Piecing together data from a variety of sources, including existing epidemiologic data, key informant interviews, and laboratory data, this study revealed that distinct HIV subtypes emerged and recombined along drug trafficking routes originating in Myanmar, one of the world’s largest heroin producers. Along these trafficking routes, communities of injection drug users formed, facilitating the spread of HIV into local communities in Laos, Thailand, Vietnam, India, and China (refer, for example, to Panda et al. (15)). This illustration highlights the broader understanding of HIV/AIDS epidemiology that can be achieved by examining the interplay between contextual factors and social and behavioral factors. Investigation of social networks in HIV/AIDS began with the mapping of relationships between one of the first identified AIDS cases, an airline steward, and a large number of his male sex partners in the early 1980s (16). Social network analysis generates measures of the quality, density, position, and structure of relationships between persons, including dyads (partnerships), personal networks (“egocentric” networks), and larger communities (“sociometric” networks) (17, 18). Social networks can influence health outcomes in direct and indirect ways, including 1) social influence, 2) social engagement and participation, 3) prevalence of infectious disease and network member mixing, 4) access to material goods and informational resources, and 5) social support (19). Researchers have demonstrated that patterns in the structure of relationships—rather than differences in individual risk behaviors alone—explain observed HIV patterns (20, 21). The theoretical foundation for examining social networks in HIV research is closely tied to advances in sexually transmitted disease (STD) epidemiology. A key concept from STD epidemiology is the notion of the “core group,” a small group of disease transmitters responsible for a large proportion of cases (22). Friedman et al. (23) found that individuals’ locations within sociometric risk networks were associated with HIV risk among a group of injection drug users in New York City. Other concepts from STD epidemiology, such as partner concurrency, bridging, and mixing patterns, are also important in understanding HIV risk (24–29). Specific network characteristics that have been associated with HIV/AIDS include the size of subgroups and their distribution in a network (23), the centrality of HIV-positive persons within networks (30), partner selection patterns (24, 31–33), and concurrent sexual partnerships (28). Inclusion of these variables has been shown to improve transmission estimates in mathematical modeling (34, 35). Social and normative influences have also been associated with individual HIV risks (36, 37). Network-related social and normative influences are predictive of illicit drug use (38) and condom use behavior (37, 39), highlighting the importance of network-based interventions for HIV prevention (18). Kelly et al. (40, 41) developed a popular opinion leader model that has been effective in reducing HIV risk in several populations, including men who have sex with men and women in low-income housing (42). The success of this model has led to its adaption for international use by the National Institute of Mental Health Collaborative HIV/STD Prevention Trial in China, India, Peru, Russia, and Zimbabwe. Neighborhoods represent the intersection of social networks and physical spatial locations, a confluence Wallace (43) has called the “sociogeographic networks” through which infectious diseases spread. Early interest in the role of neighborhood social environment in disease transmission was sparked by a study in Colorado Springs, Colorado, in which researchers found that gonorrhea was highly focused geographically in core residential neighborhoods (44). Both direct and indirect mechanisms may determine how neighborhood-level factors shape population HIV/AIDS patterns. Direct mechanisms are those that increase the likelihood of a person coming into contact with someone who is HIV positive, for example, through residential segregation and the social isolation of marginalized populations. Indirect mechanisms include those that increase population vulnerability to HIV/AIDS, such as exposure to poor socioeconomic conditions, high unemployment, or the proliferation of illicit drug markets. A range of neighborhood-level factors have been examined in relation to infectious disease, including poverty and income (45, 46), residential segregation (47), and neighborhood physical environment (48, 49). Current research in neighborhood and area effects on health emphasizes the importance of moving beyond documentation of associations to analyze the social and epidemiologic mechanisms through which neighborhood effects might operate (50–54). Increasing concentrations of affluence and poverty are contributing to what demographer Douglas Massey has called “a radical change in the geographic basis of human society” (55, p. 395). Powerful social and economic forces in US cities are increasing neighborhood segregation by class and race/ethnicity (56, 57). Resulting social disorganization and loss of resources and services in poor neighborhoods are in turn shaping HIV/AIDS patterns at the neighborhood level. In a number of studies in New York City, for example, Wallace (58–63) has examined the complex interplay of public policies such as “planned shrinkage” with HIV epidemic dynamics in the Bronx, documenting the “synergy of plagues” that has accompanied rapid social change and the destruction of essential protective networks in poor communities. Using AIDS surveillance data, ecologic studies conducted in various US cities have also consistently found significant associations between income and poverty measures and neighborhood-level AIDS incidence and prevalence rates, and these findings have been consistent across census block groups (46), census tracts (64), and zip codes (65, 66). Length of survival an AIDS has also been with neighborhood measures of income and the of highly a of health at the population may also a role in shaping HIV/AIDS patterns, associations between HIV/AIDS and income at the neighborhood have not been well segregation by race/ethnicity is neighborhood-level that may an important role in HIV/AIDS may affect infectious disease patterns through the and isolation of persons in one increasing the probability of transmission within that For example, found that measures of residential isolation were protective for at risk of disease. Indirect effects of segregation are associated with of neighborhood and with for those in poor neighborhoods segregation may to understanding disease we of studies examining neighborhood segregation in relation to HIV/AIDS that have been The physical environment of neighborhoods has also been examined in relation to infectious disease. et al. examined gonorrhea and neighborhood physical environment in New by using an of physical to explore and to this the of physical such as and a in social in a of community this concept to public et al. found a significant between neighborhood physical and gonorrhea rates, a by a ecologic study of US physical environment may HIV risk by illicit drug use such as injection behaviors and of the mechanisms through which the observed associations may be and associations between the physical environment and HIV/AIDS is research is to support the design of neighborhood-level HIV/AIDS interventions. has differences are not result from social and economic by policies. are and to p. The of evidence ecologic associations between neighborhood-level factors and infectious disease that to be to identify of and defined social as of social structures that that is the of that in its not be p. Social may affect health through 1) the of 2) access to services and 3) of in a and 4) participation, to policies that are more to published studies have explicitly examined social in the of HIV/AIDS. In the and examined income and social as of STD and AIDS found social to be the of STD and AIDS In et al. examined one of social participation, as a for understanding community influences on HIV infection. found that in of and was in other social groups groups with high of social HIV risk. findings from these studies are and We identified categories of factors to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: structural and the and and Each is in the that highlights a of by often and forces that through as is more the the of p. is in patterns of on sexual and HIV A of how structural might influence HIV/AIDS risk is presented in 2. The and uses of race/ethnicity in epidemiologic research have been the of analysis and Social epidemiologists race/ethnicity as an of social forces than physical has that race/ethnicity is a for exposure to which may be defined as the and individual that and of p. The study of disease is of central importance in the study of HIV/AIDS In the for example, the of HIV HIV/AIDS and of also high HIV/AIDS with of behavioral risk factors at the individual have not observed HIV/AIDS or STD by race/ethnicity individual pathways by which HIV/AIDS in a group complex of economic and social patterns, of illicit and health Social epidemiology is and evidence as to what factors and these HIV/AIDS and found that sexual networks for in sexually transmitted infection in the National Health and Social et al. found that risk network structure in a of injection drug users in differences in HIV prevalence between and and structural factors key in shaping the patterns that to HIV/AIDS For example, the effects of sex from the of men may be relationships and sexual segregation by race/ethnicity also to shape social and risk networks in ways that to disease patterns. residential segregation was and associated with gonorrhea at the in the patterns might be observed for HIV/AIDS. is in the proportion of women among HIV/AIDS cases the for of HIV-positive in through and for of HIV-positive in HIV infections in women are at an and women are and more to HIV infection. theoretical for understanding in HIV/AIDS have been including and human beyond as a risk these approaches structural for in HIV/AIDS. focus has been on women in the of sex or transmission women HIV from their partner and reducing acquisition of HIV among men is key to reducing the spread of HIV to women the of and and than their male partners upon of HIV-positive in of of and HIV risks by women The effects of include individual to HIV and a of to HIV prevention The for and Prevention estimates that one of those with HIV not their HIV and have central in shaping to HIV/AIDS the effects of these social forces on the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS have not been well has been examined at the individual in studies of and and to of and in a that the of to p. et al. have defined as and that are at to have AIDS or HIV and at the and communities with which these are p. and have that a conceptual framework for understanding is our of and to as social that can be in relation to broader of and p. in et al. that HIV transmission and with AIDS the of or structural interventions change the in which and communities HIV infection The effective have been those in which communities have to and by increasing community of HIV Social interventions to and to affect community The for this is found in diffusion which on social networks, opinion and change these are by cultural through the in social networks within communities are essential for and behavior change to to HIV/AIDS structures refer to as well as to the and with their and et al. that laws can affect health in 1) may be a through which social determinants affect health direct and 2) may to social conditions associated with health outcomes indirect of direct effects of on HIV risk are on access to injection which have been associated with HIV incidence of an indirect of structures is the of laws on income which may social conditions that increase HIV vulnerability. key social determinants of HIV/AIDS, including poverty and income and community social change may affect HIV/AIDS patterns through population and and the and structures of Each of these factors may be as modifying between and persons in populations. the HIV infection than populations, of HIV prevalence in the or and may affect HIV transmission studies of have into 1) studies of the spread of HIV along and 2) studies of the that vulnerability to HIV/AIDS can the spread of HIV subtypes and to patterns of and evidence linking patterns and Beyrer et al. (14) found that distinct HIV subtypes were associated with different illicit drug trafficking routes in Southeast Asia. has to the spread of HIV in India, and In addition, studies have identified the importance of in the of for HIV/AIDS is a classic of an health have examined the role of in population HIV/AIDS patterns that might for the effects of on HIV/AIDS patterns include sexual and drug use patterns to in patterns, and of and persons, and on the health sex that men have also been associated with high HIV/AIDS prevalence at the This ecologic is to be by the effects of cultural at the local of the effects might have on and network patterns. the of resources in the public and and the environment a central role in the and of HIV/AIDS epidemics. of importance to HIV/AIDS include health social and illicit drug HIV/AIDS is a high on the health of and policies are to be contributing to increasing HIV/AIDS The complex and between policies and HIV/AIDS are to be policies affect health and by poverty in the distribution of and health have that structural designed to and in have a on the HIV/AIDS by increasing and and reducing in the health and social services as to how policies can be designed to to in HIV/AIDS Structural-level health policies and can to in HIV/AIDS HIV prevention have on individual behavior the of the HIV prevention is with of the for that the social and economic of HIV/AIDS The condom is an exemplary of an effective structural HIV prevention to the environment in which HIV risk behaviors the of may also affect in HIV/AIDS transmission by reducing among HIV-positive Social policies a critical role in the of those to HIV/AIDS, such as or Social policies such as and public affect access to resources and can also affect HIV transmission and access to quantitative research has social change to population health outcomes qualitative research has the importance of social in shaping risk In for example, et al. the effects of the and of which Social and Social on the basis of drug and in this study into the drug of income of and in behaviors in an to HIV to studies of the associations between social policies and HIV/AIDS are to the human of policies of with the of those to HIV/AIDS and to identify drug also has a significant on HIV/AIDS. drug particularly of is HIV epidemics in the The on has focused on to the of which of prevention and measures policies for those trafficking or illicit have in of persons for drug The direct of patterns to be For example, et al. found that on policies such as the of and of those with use from Social were associated with in is a risk factor for HIV risk behaviors have been shown to associated with of and HIV risk of in have access to can increase HIV/AIDS risk and by social and risk networks, or and increasing poverty and social in in risk behaviors in of have been For example, et al. found that the in was associated with among injection drug users in of the of heroin trafficking from In the of the of has also been associated with HIV/AIDS forces are often and of men from In a study for the found that a in the size of the from to as a proportion of population reduce HIV among by 1 to the of in are to reduce HIV in with HIV/AIDS prevention and for The of social epidemiology to the HIV/AIDS have in This is in to a that from a that risk factors for disease to one that the that patterns of disease in p. and methodological in the have this our understanding of multiple causes of risk in modeling geographic and databases linking public health data with on social factors enhance our to and in ways that more closely the of HIV/AIDS epidemics. social epidemiology research in HIV/AIDS determine how we can design more effective of interventions at multiple of social A number of key which of the larger social environment in HIV/AIDS transmission and disease are model complex and be has these include data variables and of analysis at multiple contextual effects, and complex with and p. approaches are for the effective of social-level interventions. persons are with HIV/AIDS, and an HIV infections in effective are high drug and in are to of an HIV more These the to underlying social and structural determinants of HIV/AIDS through policies and This was by from the National Institute on The of the New York of for for and A framework for the social epidemiology of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome The the the nature of the between of In are between factors at that to observed epidemic patterns. sexually transmitted infection. 2. through which various of structural might influence the risk of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency

Epidemiologic Reviews · meta-analysis · 394 citationsread the source →

Relaxin for the treatment of patients with acute heart failure (Pre-RELAX-AHF): a multicentre, randomised, placebo-controlled, parallel-group, dose-finding phase IIb study.

Background: Most patients admitted for acute heart failure have normal or increase blood pressure. Relaxin is a natural human peptide that affects multiple vascular control pathways, suggesting potential mechanisms of benefit for such patients. We assessed the dose response of relaxin's effect on symptom relief, other clinical outcomes, and safety. Methods: In a placebo-controlled, parallel-group, dose-ranging study, 234 patients with acute heart failure, dyspnoea, congestion on chest radiograph, and increased brain natriuretic peptide (BNP) or N-terminal prohormone of BNP, mild-to-moderate renal insufficiency, and systolic blood pressure greater than 125 mm Hg were recruited from 54 sites in eight countries and enrolled within 16 h of presentation. Patients were randomly assigned, in a double-blind manner via a telephone-based interactive voice response system, to standard care plus 48-h intravenous infusion of placebo (n=62) or relaxin 10 microg/kg (n=40), 30 microg/kg (n=43), 100 microg/kg (n=39), or 250 microg/kg (n=50) per day. Several clinical endpoints were explored to assess whether intravenous relaxin should be pursued in larger studies of acute heart failure, to identify an optimum dose, and to help to assess endpoint selection and power calculations. Analysis was by modified intention to treat. This study is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT00520806. Findings: In the modified intention-to-treat population, 61 patients were assessed in the placebo group, 40 in the relaxin 10 microg/kg per day group, 42 in the relaxin 30 microg/kg per day group, 37 in the relaxin 100 microg/kg per day group, and 49 in the relaxin 250 microg/kg per day group. Dyspnoea improved with relaxin 30 microg/kg compared with placebo, as assessed by Likert scale (17 of 42 patients [40%] moderately or markedly improved at 6 h, 12 h, and 24 h vs 14 of 61 [23%]; p=0.044) and visual analogue scale through day 14 (8214 mm x h [SD 8712] vs 4622 mm x h [9003]; p=0.053). Length of stay was 10.2 days (SD 6.1) for relaxin-treated patients versus 12.0 days (7.3) for those given placebo, and days alive out of hospital were 47.9 (10.1) versus 44.2 (14.2). Cardiovascular death or readmission due to heart or renal failure at day 60 was reduced with relaxin (2.6% [95% CI 0.4-16.8] vs 17.2% [9.6-29.6]; p=0.053). The number of serious adverse events was similar between groups. Interpretation: When given to patients with acute heart failure and normal-to-increased blood pressure, relaxin was associated with favourable relief of dyspnoea and other clinical outcomes, with acceptable safety.

Lancet (London, England) · randomised controlled trial · 314 citationsread the source →

Resting-state fMRI changes in Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment.

Regional functional connectivity (FC) of 39 patients with Alzheimer's disease (AD), 23 patients with mild cognitive impairment (MCI), and 43 healthy elderly controls was studied using resting-state functional magnetic resonance imaging (rs-fMRI). After a mean follow-up of 2.8 ± 1.9 years, 7 MCI patients converted to AD, while 14 patients remained cognitively stable. Resting-state functional magnetic resonance imaging scans were analyzed using independent component analysis (ICA), followed by a "dual-regression" technique to create and compare subject-specific maps of each independent spatiotemporal component, correcting for age, sex, and gray matter atrophy. AD patients displayed lower FC within the default-mode network (DMN) in the precuneus and posterior cingulate cortex compared with controls, independent of cortical atrophy. Regional FC values of MCI patients were numerically in between AD patients and controls, but only the difference between AD and stable MCI patients was statistically significant. Correlation with cognitive dysfunction demonstrated the clinical relevance of FC changes within the DMN. In conclusion, clinically relevant decreased FC within the DMN was observed in AD.

Neurobiology of aging · 291 citationsread the source →

Association of perpetrator relationship to abusive head trauma clinical outcomes.

The diagnosis of abusive head trauma (AHT) remains a significant public health problem with limited prevention success. Providing protection from further harm is often challenged by the difficulty in identifying the alleged perpetrator (AP) responsible for this pediatric trauma. The objective of this study was to evaluate demographic and clinical characteristics of children with AHT and the relationship between APs and their victims in a large, multi-site sample. Understanding the AHT risks from various caregivers may help to inform current prevention strategies. A retrospective review of all cases of AHT diagnosed by child protection teams (CPT) from 1/1/04 to 6/30/09 at four children's hospitals was conducted. Clinical characteristics of children with AHT injured by non-parental perpetrators (NPP) were compared to parental perpetrators (PP). There were 459 children with AHT; 313 (68%) had an identified AP. The majority of the 313 children were <1 year of age (76%), Caucasian (63%), male (58%), receiving public assistance (80%), and presented without a history of trauma (62%); mortality was 19%. Overall, APs were: father (53%), parent partner (22%), mother (8%), babysitter (8%), other adult caregiver (5%); NPP accounted for 39% of APs. NPPs were more likely to cause AHT in children ≥ 1 year (77% vs. 23%, p<0.001) compared to PP. Independent associations to NPP included: older child, absence of a history of trauma, retinal hemorrhages, and male perpetrator gender. While fathers were the most common AP in AHT victims, there is a significant association for increased risk of AHT by NPPs in the older child, who presents with retinal hemorrhages, in the hands of a male AP. Further enhancement of current prevention strategies to address AHT risks of non-parental adults who provide care to children, especially in the post-infancy age seems warranted.

Child abuse & neglect · cohort or longitudinal · 34 citationsread the source →

Emerging Adulthood and College‐aged Youth: An Overlooked Age for Weight‐related Behavior Change

Obesity is a major public health concern, and effective population-wide intervention strategies aimed at reducing obesity are needed. Although a growing body of literature has explored modifiable determinants of excess weight gain in adults and, to a lesser extent, in children, other important ages have been understudied. Though once considered to be an age of optimal health and well-being, the transition from adolescence to young adulthood is gaining recognition as an important time for health promotion and disease prevention. Not only is the presence of obesity and unhealthy lifestyle characteristics at this life stage associated with increased chronic disease risk, but this also may be a critical time during which young people establish independence and adopt lasting health behavior patterns. The objectives of this article are to: (i) describe emerging adulthood as a developmentally unique life stage, (ii) highlight epidemiologic evidence documenting adverse changes in diet, physical activity, and weight during this stage, (iii) discuss the influence of food and beverage marketing targeting emerging adults, and (iv) illustrate the need for health promotion and intervention efforts that could target young adults through settings such as postsecondary institutions. Over the past 50 years, major population-level demographic shifts including increases in postsecondary education and delays in marriage and childbearing have occurred. These shifts have opened the door for a period of “emerging adulthood,” typically defined as 18–25 years of age (1). This period is marked by important transitions such as leaving home and increasing autonomy in decision-making; however at the same time, adult responsibilities such as financial independence and residential and employment stability are still in flux. This period of emerging adulthood may be an important, yet overlooked, age for establishing long-term health behavior patterns. Several factors differentiate emerging adulthood from other life stages and have specific relevance to the formation of health behavior patterns, including identity development and shifting interpersonal influences. One defining characteristic of this life stage is the development of a self identity. Emerging adulthood is a time for the exploration of new ideologies and behaviors which allow individuals to express their individuality. Given previous research showing that identity (e.g., incorporating healthy lifestyle characteristics in the concept of one's self) is an important indicator of lasting health behavior change, emerging adulthood may be a particularly important time for establishing and intervening on long-term health behavior patterns (2,3). In addition, other psychosocial attributes associated with beneficial health behaviors (e.g., self-efficacy) develop or become established during this period of emerging adulthood (4), providing support for the unique importance of this life stage in long-term behavioral patterning. Emerging adulthood may also be a time for changing support systems and shifting interpersonal influences. Although the influence of parents and family is well established in the literature on childhood and, to a lesser extent, adolescent diet and physical activity patterns, little research has examined these issues among young adults. Young adults spend more leisure time alone compared to other age group (except retirees ≥55 years) (5) and are often assumed to be more disconnected from their family. However, some research suggests that closer relationships with parents (6,7) and siblings (8) may evolve as youth transition into college and adulthood (9,10). As youth become more independent, family and social network influences begin to shift and may serve different roles, as compared to that which they served in childhood and adolescence. Much additional research is needed to understand the evolving social influences in the emerging adult years and the extent to which this may influence health behavior patterns. Given the overall paucity of research in this area, more work is needed to understand better how the unique characteristics of emerging adulthood may contribute to establishing long-term behavioral patterns and the possible vulnerability of this life stage to various influences. The transition from adolescence to adulthood and the determinants of eating and physical activity is understudied. However, national trend data suggest that this is a risky period for the development of obesity, as well as unhealthy diet and physical activity practices. Weight gain. Research from national surveys and longitudinal cohorts has identified the transition between adolescence and adulthood as a period of increased risk for excess weight gain. Nationally representative cross-sectional survey data from the Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System indicated that from 1991 to 1998, the greatest magnitude of increase in obesity prevalence was among 18–29-year olds (increasing from 7.1 to 12.1%) (11). The prevalence of obesity among young adults more than doubled in the past 30 years. The most recent National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) data indicate that the prevalence has continued to increase since 1999 (ref. 12). Currently, 28.5% of 20–39-year olds are obese and 57.1% are overweight or obese (12). Nationally representative longitudinal cohort data from the National Longitudinal Study of Adolescent Health (Add Health) (13), assessing 9,795 adolescents (baseline age: 13–20 years in 1996), found that the 5-year incidence of obesity was nearly 13% (follow-up age: 19–26 years in 2001), whereas only 1.6% shifted from being obese to nonobese. In comparison to NHANES (1971–1974), the Add Health cohort showed substantial secular changes in the BMI distribution over time, particularly among individuals aged 19–26 years (13). In addition, findings from the CARDIA (Coronary Artery Risk Development in Young Adults) (14,15) longitudinal cohort illustrate both 5- and 10-year increases in weight among individuals 18–30 years of age at baseline (1985). Five-year weight gain was greater for men aged 18–24 years compared to men aged 25–30 years (14). Furthermore, the largest 10-year weight gains were seen among those in their early- to mid-twenties, as compared to those in their thirties (15). Physical activity. Although longitudinal data are limited, there is evidence of dramatic changes in lifestyle characteristics during this period. Cohort data from Add Health indicate that although most adolescents fail to meet national guidelines for physical activity (33.6%), even fewer meet these guidelines as young adults (12.7%) (16). In addition, findings from Project EAT (Eating Among Teens), a 5-year longitudinal cohort study of Minnesota adolescents, confirm such adverse changes in activity patterns during the transition from high school to young adulthood (17). Findings showed longitudinal changes in moderate to vigorous physical activity, particularly among girls (decreasing from 5.1 to 3.5 h/week aged from 16 to 20 years), and leisure time computer use, particularly among boys (increasing from 10.4 to 14.2 h/week aged from 16 to 20 years). Overall, many changes in physical activity patterns began during the transition from junior to senior high school and continued during the transition from high school to post-high school. One notable exception is moderate to vigorous physical activity among boys, which only began to decline during the transition after high school. Furthermore, a recent analysis of the National Health Interview survey data (18) indicated that age-related declines in physical activity are particularly pronounced between 15 and 18 years of age and continue through age 21. Physical activity has been shown to decline even further with specific life events typically following emerging adulthood (such as moving into a live-in relationship, getting married, and becoming a parent), but generally do not appear to continue to decline with age after mid-adulthood (30–64 years) (18). Thus health-promotion efforts to increase activity during emerging adulthood may be particularly important. Dietary intake. Research also suggests that declines in overall-diet quality may accompany these unfavorable shifts in activity patterns during the transition to adulthood (19,20). For example, fast food consumption has been associated with weight gain over time, and findings from national survey data indicate that fast food restaurant use is highest in young adulthood: 52% of 20–39 years reported eating fast food on one or both days of the Continuing Survey of Food Intakes by Individuals (1994–1996, 1998) (21). These data also indicate that soft drink intake is highest among 19–39-year olds compared to other age groups (22). In addition, NHANES data illustrate that a majority of young adults (aged 20–29 years) consume <1 serving/day of fruit (males 63%, females 59%) and vegetables (including potatoes, males 19%, females 20%) (23). Unfortunately, however, the collapsing of ages 19–39 years does not allow for an examination of the emerging adult period. Longitudinal findings from Project EAT also indicate adverse changes in dietary intake. For example, total fruit and vegetable intake decreased significantly (by >½ serving/day) during the 5-year transition period after high school (24). Add Health data indicate that fast food consumption markedly increased and consumption of breakfast decreased across a 5-year transition between adolescence and adulthood (25). The Bogalusa Heart Study (19), a longitudinal study of a biracial cohort following children >15 years into young adulthood, also showed a substantial decline in diet quality as individuals progressed through this transition. Findings indicate that individuals consumed less fruits/fruit juice and milk (19) and more sweetened beverages, salty snacks, and beef as young adults (19–28 years) than as children. Several studies have reported that despite changes in diet quality, there is substantial tracking in dietary intake between adolescence and young adulthood, as well as into later adulthood (20,26,27). Weight status also shows a high degree of tracking over time (28). Thus setting a “trajectory” for beneficial health behavior patterns and dietary intake during this time may be an important step toward initiating lasting healthy behaviors. Furthermore, a growing number of individuals are now becoming obese during adolescence and are exposed to a wide array of precursors to poor-diet quality and inactivity before the emerging adult years. For example, secular trends suggest declining rates of family meals and home food preparation (29), potentially leaving young adults without the skills to prepare foods and plan healthful meals on their own. Thus, challenges lie in reversing the effects of adverse adolescent exposures during the emerging adult years and promoting healthful long-term behavior patterns in all segments of the population. Dietary intake is influenced by a variety of factors, including individual, interpersonal, institutional, and macro-system influences. Although many of these influences are thought to be shared by a wide range of age groups, food and beverage marketing may be a particularly potent macro-level influence for emerging adults. The food, beverage and restaurant industries are estimated to have spent >$11 billion on advertising in 2004 alone (30). Young adults aged 18–24 years are a highly desirable market, particularly among fast food and soft drink companies. Marketing campaigns geared toward young adults, particularly males, have brought increased sales to fast food restaurant chains in the past decade (31,32,33,34). These campaigns have been specifically designed to increase product recognition, sales and brand loyalty among this group and have been widely promoted in young adult media markets. A number of these successful campaigns have targeted issues such as fast food late night dining and value pricing (32,35). For example, in launching its late night “Fourthmeal” campaign (with “Fourthmeal” marketed as “the meal between dinner and breakfast”), Taco Bell cites industry research in its press release indicating that nearly 50% of males aged 18–29 years are eating out after 7 pm (32). Industry research also suggests that young males spend well above market averages in these visits, averaging over $7.00 (ref. 36). To our knowledge, similar peer-reviewed evidence in the scientific literature is not available to confirm these trends. A number of these successful industry-driven campaigns have received recognition from the marketing and advertising community, for example, receiving EFFIE Awards (prestigious annual advertising awards) for their work in effectively targeting young adults. Honored campaigns include: • Hardee's. In 2001, industry research found that among its target markets Hardee's was “the most avoided restaurant in the fast food category” (31). Launching a major initiative targeting frequent fast food consumers, the company conducted “a segmentation analysis … to create a landscape from which we selected a more meaningful target for Hardee's. We called this target ‘Young Hungry Guys.’ This group is defined as young burger eaters (men 16–34) who want a more adult-like place to eat the burgers they love. This group seeks out big burgers as their food of choice, has the most growth potential for Hardee's and represent the heaviest usage in the fast food category” (31). With this, the Thickburger was introduced (providing ∼850–1,400 calories/burger). As a result, the company grew from the lowest to the highest ranked leading quick-service restaurant among young male fast food consumers (31). • Burger King. In February 2004 after significantly declining sales, Burger King refocused its efforts on its heaviest users, identified as males aged 16–34 years (34). To do so, they introduced the large-sized Angus Steak Burger. Describing its creative strategy, the marketing team states that “since the beginning of time, men have been eating large amounts of meat cooked over fires. For thousands of years, society has been wired to associate this kind of indulgence with power, pleasure and status. The problem is our culture is on an anti-indulgence craze the likes of which we have never seen before. Our strategy was to give our target permission to indulge in a great tasting burger and not apologize for it. And nothing gives them permission better than the affordable, deeply satisfying fire-grilled Angus Steak Burger…” (34). After increasing its market share among young men, this single-menu item subsequently accounted for 10% of sales dollars for Burger King. • Jack in the Box. After from the of a Jack in the that its was to create with the of the fast food young men, ages These were the fast food most began a marketing campaign on to to this including the campaign a of a media targeting males 18–24 years, Jack in the sales more than doubled from over billion in drink have also emerging adults as an important market For example, has major marketing campaigns targeting men, with the and In to promoting and advertising their through soft drink have to the of beverage by new targeting this age such as and (e.g., Thus, in we have little in the of public health to health among young adults, food and beverage marketing particularly from the fast food and soft drink have been targeting this age group over the past decade to establish brand loyalty and a of aged years are postsecondary In the development of health-promotion such may be well for emerging adult behaviors. However, that this life stage has been an of particularly in of obesity evidence is available to specific behaviors of college we have the which is from is a of research behaviors among other of such as those or obesity and weight Obesity is a major health among from the Health National Health an of indicated that the prevalence of overweight was including of these individuals who are obese Among the there has been recognition of the weight gain associated with college however, little research has explored this and its Several studies have shown that college is by substantial weight gain. the of gain an of with the of overweight or obese as as by the of the In females who home to to college have been shown to be to as to gain or more above their weight compared to females who not home indicating an important influence of some in the college on Furthermore, previous research suggests that this weight gain is specifically to important changes in body increased decreased Although some weight college has been estimated that gain weight during their years research following across years of that this weight gain is over time, with females on gaining and males gaining from to senior Although some growth may be to continued gains in particularly among males, many college youth may be on a of weight gain. Dietary patterns. dietary that are to an important in unhealthy weight during this period. data indicate that only of consume of a which has been in studies A majority of have little variety in eating “the same foods after Although diet quality may begin their there to be little in dietary intake the college years found that of the in weight gain was to of eating in dining patterns, and eating Physical activity and The majority of college also fail to meet national for physical activity. data indicate that only of for or for on of the past 7 days research that during the transition to and appear to and are to as age increases In some that (e.g., spend less time and in vigorous compared to the potential continued decline in these behaviors over Although behaviors may also be important determinants of weight little is these behaviors among college In a study of in and activity reported in high of h/week the research is needed to understand these lifestyle patterns. risk behaviors. In to diet and activity, there are other risk factors that are in emerging adults which may be to data indicate that of college consumed at one during the past intake has been with decreased and increased dietary intake in Although research that is associated with a range of adverse dietary patterns, and unhealthy weight among college youth additional work is needed to understand better the by which these behaviors are little research is available to understand the of other use (e.g., which of college youth in the past on meal and weight gain. These are that further and potentially on weight status. weight are at high risk for body and unhealthy weight research has explored these issues among college evidence has that and unhealthy weight may be associated with weight gain and poor-diet quality is a need for a better of the between weight gain and and during this and college increased of from a variety of such as to to new the of independence and and a wide array of social and other Though has been associated with inactivity and a range of adverse health behaviors among college youth the through which these relationships are not In addition, college are also to risk factors, such as and which are with excess weight gain and obesity In of college reported a nearly increase from (ref. and more than the of adults in the college are at particularly high risk for adverse effects of including weight gain and declines in and well are in one of over postsecondary In addition, college and has increased over the past and other postsecondary now serve a wide range of individuals from a array of and effective in these settings to have an important on health behavior among a range of emerging adult For many emerging adults, the independence of life is by the of a variety of (e.g., dining high and is a period of weight gain. As adopt new health behavior patterns, often from home for the time, college life may the stage for establishing important behavioral patterns that chronic disease postsecondary are settings for diet and physical may share residential factors (e.g., have to (e.g., less than of college and are to a Although postsecondary an even of groups (e.g., groups of work to has the prevalence of behaviors on these and the of these Although some of the factors (e.g., may not be to both and settings shared eating on and and in the for the need in this area, have not to work with these to and and physical activity In obesity and healthy weight are to and To be such strategies be and to the of the target Although there is a paucity of epidemiologic research to understand the most potent modifiable determinants of excess weight gain during the emerging adult years, we are to use the little evidence that is available to important for research in this Given the of influence on health as by the widely important for epidemiologic and intervention research a range of from macro-level to In some from research in other settings (e.g., and may be highly in postsecondary institutions. For example, once research is available to postsecondary food strategies to healthy food pricing and be to intervention strategies in these However, although have scientific in recent years, important factors specific to this age group not be Emerging adults and college youth many new to healthy lifestyle characteristics (e.g., high challenges in time and targeting and strategies in these may be highly effective in obesity particularly in with research also to be and and by which we may be to target emerging adults who are not postsecondary institutions. Although research in other of health promotion suggests that emerging adults who are not postsecondary may represent particularly youth research to has examined health behaviors among this work in this is by the through we these Although and postsecondary may a to develop health-promotion strategies targeting large groups of there is a continued need to develop through which also be that we do not the research is also needed to the for health which may also for many individuals during the emerging adult years, particularly as begin to ideologies of autonomy are on with those of on responsibilities and to This growing of and may in that an important influence diet and physical behaviors. For example, such as may in to eat or to increasing for Emerging adults may begin to their as parents and be more to healthy and to a healthy lifestyle that they be the and ideologies of emerging adults, particularly in the specific of diet and physical activity, be in effective health-promotion and intervention may be successful in these to health In additional research is needed to understand how to health-promotion strategies to the of college and other emerging adults who are not in postsecondary institutions. Although substantial evidence that this is an important and period for adverse behavior change, little work to has to understand the modifiable determinants of factors among emerging adults, and intervention strategies have been and in this population. Given that a large of aged 18–24 years in postsecondary the setting a setting for health-promotion intervention efforts targeting this age The of

Obesity · 1316 citationsread the source →

Explaining adults' mental health help-seeking through the lens of the theory of planned behavior: a scoping review.

Background: Despite evidence-based efficacy, mental health services are underutilized due to low rates of help-seeking, leaving unmet mental health needs a global concern. The Theory of Planned Behavior (TPB) has been applied to understand the help-seeking process and in the development of behavior change interventions. The aim of this scoping review was to map the literature on the TPB as applied to mental health help-seeking in adults aged >18 years. Methods: This scoping review was conducted based on the methodology presented by Arksey and O'Malley (2005). Six databases (CINAHL, PsycINFO, MEDLINE, ProQuest Health and Medicine, ProQuest Dissertations and Theses, Web of Science) and two grey literature sources (OpenGrey, Google Scholar) were systematically searched in February 2018 and updated in March 2020. Studies that explicitly discussed the TPB in the context of mental health help-seeking were initially selected; only studies that explored formal help-seeking for mental health problems and were published in English were retained. Data were extracted using Microsoft Excel. Results: Initially, 8898 records were identified. Of these, 49 met the selection criteria and were included: 32 were journal articles and 17 were theses. Forty-three papers reported on non-intervention studies and seven articles reported on TPB-based interventions. Most studies (n = 39) identified predictors of help-seeking intentions. Attitudes and perceived behavioral control were significant predictors of intentions in 35 and 34 studies, respectively. Subjective norms were a significant predictor of intentions in 23 studies. Few studies aimed to predict help-seeking behavior (n = 8). Intentions and perceived behavioral control were significant predictors of behavior in seven and six studies, respectively. Only six TPB-based interventions were identified, all used digital technology to influence help-seeking, with mixed results. Conclusions: The present scoping review identified a considerable evidence base on the TPB for predicting mental health help-seeking intentions. Attitudes and perceived behavioral control were frequently found to be significant predictors of help-seeking intentions. Knowledge on the TPB for predicting mental health help-seeking behavior, and on TPB-based interventions, is limited. Thus, the role of the TPB in developing help-seeking interventions remains unclear. Recommendations are presented to address such research gaps and inform policy and practice.

Systematic reviews · review · 44 citationsread the source →

A scoping review of therapies used to treat psychological trauma post perinatal bereavement.

Background: Up to 39% of women who experience perinatal bereavement proceed to develop Post-Traumatic-Stress-Disorder (PTSD), with this large proportion meriting treatment. Before setting-up a treatment service for postnatal women who are experiencing psychological trauma, it is important to identify what therapies have been used in-the-past to address this problem. Aim: To scope for research that has implemented therapies to treat psychological trauma post perinatal bereavement, for potential inclusion in a flexible treatment package. Method: A scoping review mapped coverage, range, and type of research that has reported on prior therapies used to treat psychological trauma post perinatal bereavement. Findings: Due to the dearth of papers that directly addressed perinatal bereavement, we widened the scope of the review to view what treatments had been used to treat psychological trauma post-childbirth. Out of 23 studies that report on effectiveness of therapies used to treat psychological trauma post-childbirth, only 4-focused upon treating PTSD post perinatal bereavement (3 effective/1 ineffective). Successful treatments were reported by Kersting et al. (2013), who found CBT effective at reducing PTSD symptoms post-miscarriage, termination for medical reasons, and stillbirth (n = 33 & n = 115), and Navidian et al. (2s017)) found that 4-sessions of grief-counselling reduced trauma symptoms post-stillbirth in (n = 50) women. One study by Huberty et al. (2020found on-line yoga to be ineffective at reducing PTSD symptoms post-stillbirth. Conclusions: A dearth of research has explored effectiveness of therapies for treating psychological trauma post perinatal bereavement and post-childbirth, with need to develop and test a research informed flexible counselling package.

Journal of reproductive and infant psychology · review · 9 citationsread the source →

Heart rate variability

IN FOCUSHeart rate variabilityHarald M. StaussHarald M. StaussDepartment of Exercise Science, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa 52242Published Online:01 Nov 2003https://doi.org/10.1152/ajpregu.00452.2003MoreSectionsPDF (59 KB)Download PDF ToolsExport citationAdd to favoritesGet permissionsTrack citations the rhythm of the heart has not only fascinated cardiologists but also inspired poets and musicians. Indeed, the periodic beat of the heart was used to define the speed of music. In music notation, the traditional Italian term "moderato" originally referred to one beat of the measure per walking pace (76-80 paces/min) or heartbeat (∼72 beats/min). The use of the heartbeat to define the speed of music may imply that the periodicity of the beat of the heart is very constant. However, this is not necessarily the case. In fact, loss of heart rate variability can indicate severe cardiovascular diseases and reliably predict poor outcome of such conditions (18, 22, 27, 47a). This In Focus article reviews sources of heart rate variability, its role as a prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, and its application in estimation of cardiac autonomic nervous system activity. All of these topics have been addressed intensely in articles published in the American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology during the last two years. In healthy subjects, the sinoatrial node located at the posterior wall of the right atrium initiates each beat of the heart. Due to the unstable membrane potential of the myocytes located in this region, action potentials are generated periodically at a fairly constant frequency. This relatively constant frequency generated by the autorhythmicity of the sinoatrial node is modulated by many factors that add variability to the heart rate signal at different frequencies. According to the Task Force of The European Society of Cardiology and The North American Society of Pacing and Electrophysiology (47a) these frequencies are classified into 1) ultra-low frequencies (ULF; >5-h cycle length) that include the circadian rhythm (6, 9, 34, 54); 2) very low frequencies (VLF; >25-s cycle length) that are supposed to be affected by temperature regulation (1, 7, 34, 52, 54) and humoral systems (9, 36); 3) low frequencies (LF; >6-s cycle length in humans) that are sensitive to changes in cardiac sympathetic (and presumably parasympathetic) nerve activity (27, 30); and 4) high frequencies (HF; 2.5- to 6.0-s cycle length in humans) that are synchronized to the respiratory rhythm (5) and are primarily modulated by cardiac parasympathetic innervation (38).The most prominent oscillation in the ULF band of the heart rate spectrum is the circadian rhythm. The autonomic nervous system contributes significantly to circadian heart rate variability. Using long-term recordings in conscious rabbits, Barrett et al. (6) demonstrated a strong circadian rhythm in heart rate, mean arterial blood pressure, renal blood flow, and renal sympathetic nerve activity. The importance of this study is that it clearly demonstrates that sympathetic nerve discharges exhibit a strong circadian rhythmicity. The paraventricular nucleus of the hypothalamus (PVN) appears to play a central role in mediating the circadian rhythm of autonomic nervous system activity. First, GABAergic and glutamatergic neurons project from the suprachiasmatic nuclei of the hypothalamus (SCN) to spinal-projecting neurons of the PVN (12). The SCN is the major central oscillator that triggers the day/night cycle. It receives photic input from the retina (47) and drives many neuroendocrine, metabolic, autonomic, and behavioral circadian rhythms (14, 16, 21, 31, 35, 44, 46, 50). In addition, microinjections of the inhibitory neurotransmitter GABA into the PVN of anesthetized rats elicit dose-dependent decreases in renal sympathetic nerve activity, whereas bicuculline (a GABA antagonist) increases renal sympathetic nerve activity (56). Second, from the PVN, neurons project to the nucleus of the solitary tract (that integrates inputs from the baroreceptors), the nucleus ambiguus (origin of preganglionic parasympathetic neurons to the heart), the rostroventrolateral medulla (location of sympathetic premotor neurons), and the intermediolateral cell column of the thoracolumbar spinal cord (location of preganglionic sympathetic neurons). Thus PVN neurons can modulate autonomic nervous system activity by sending inputs to major sites of autonomic nervous system regulation. As an example, a pivotal role of the PVN for sympathoexcitation during parturition was recently demonstrated in sheep. The increase in sympathetic nerve activity that accompanies birth in maternal animals was prevented by stereotactic lesioning of the PVN (43). Taken together, a major component of the circadian heart rate variability is elicited by diurnal fluctuations in autonomic nervous system activity, generated by corresponding fluctuations of neuronal activity within the PVN, which depend on circadian inputs originating from the SCN.It has been suggested that thermoregulation affects VLF heart rate variability (10, 26). Cooling the heart causes bradycardia, a mechanism used in heart surgeries. Conversely, fever is known to increase heart rate. Raising body core temperature from 36.0 to 36.6°C caused an increase in heart rate by almost 40 beats/min in male subjects (1), whereas acutely reducing ambient temperature from thermoneutral conditions (35°C) to 29, 23, and 17°C, reduced heart rate from 400 to 250 beats/min in 8-day-old rats (7). In addition, lowering temperature in the isolated working rat heart from 37 to 31°C reduced heart rate from 332 to 215 beats/min and markedly increased heart rate variability (28), indicating that parts of the temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability are independent from the autonomic nervous system. In contrast to the tachycardia that accompanies acute elevations in temperature, chronically raising ambient temperature in adult rodents from a standard housing temperature of 21-23°C to thermoneutral conditions (29-30°C) reduced heart rate by roughly 50 beats/min in rats (34) and by 200-300 beats/min in mice (54). The authors of these articles (34, 54) suggested that standard housing temperatures are associated with cold stress that causes parallel activation of brown adipose tissue, cardiac, and vasomotor sympathetic drives that elicits nonshivering thermogenesis and tonically elevates heart rate and arterial blood pressure. These and other studies indicate that both direct effects of temperature on pacemaker activity of the sinus node (28) and indirect effects mediated via the autonomic nervous system (11, 25, 51, 55) mediate temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability. Thus fluctuation in temperature is an important source of heart rate variability that should not be underestimated. In a more recent study, this was taken into account by core body temperature correction of heart rate variability (3).Endocrine factors affecting heart rate variability include thyroxine, reproductive hormones, the renin-angiotensin system, steroids, and others. Chronic subcutaneous infusion of angiotensin II in rats markedly increased blood pressure and heart rate variability, expressed as standard deviation (9). In contrast, chronic corticosterone treatment is likely to reduce baroreflex-mediated heart rate variability, because baroreceptor-heart rate (39) and baroreceptor-renal sympathetic nerve activity reflex sensitivity (41) were blunted in chronically corticosterone-treated rats. Furthermore, an interaction between angiotensin II and glucocorticoids was recently described. Intracerebro-ventricular microinjections of angiotensin II AT1 receptor antagonists caused marked decreases in mean blood pressure and heart rate in rats chronically treated with corticosterone but not in control animals (40). This interaction is likely to take place in the central nervous system, because peripheral angiotensin II AT1 receptor blockade did not alter the effects of betamethasone treatment on blood pressure, heart rate, and baroreceptor-heart rate reflex sensitivity in newborn lambs (42).Adenosine is a substance less known to affect heart rate variability. It is produced locally in the heart (53) and binds to A1-adenosinergic receptors, which are among the earliest expressed G protein-coupled receptors in the heart (36). The A1-adenosinergic agonist N6-cyclopentyladenosine dose dependently reduced heart rate in murine embryos, whereas 1,3-dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine, an A1-adenosinergic antagonist, increased heart rate (36). Adenosine also exerts central nervous system effects in various brain areas (15, 20). Microinjections of adenosine into the nucleus of the solitary tract of awake rats caused dose-dependent changes in heart rate: low doses (0.01 nmol) produced a bradycardic response, whereas high doses (2.5-5.0 nmol) elicited a tachycardic response (15). Thus adenosine may indeed be involved in the regulation of heart rate and modulate heart rate variability via local cardiac and central nervous system effects. It has been proposed that the intrinsic cardiac nervous system plays an active role in regulating cardiac function (4, 37, 45, 57). This nervous system consists of sympathetic and parasympathetic neurons and interconnecting local circuits (37). Neurons in the canine right atrial ganglionated plexus (RAGP) spontaneously generate activity even after chronic cardiac autonomic denervation (45). Right atrial neurons in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery generated spontaneous activity that was unrelated to the cardiac cycle but sensitive to changes in systemic arterial pressure, indicating that these neurons receive pressure-sensitive sensory inputs (4). In addition, it has been suggested that substance P acts as a neuromodulator and neurotransmitter in intracardiac ganglia of the guinea pig, modulates the response to vagal inputs, and triggers action potentials at the site of parasympathetic ganglia independent of acetylcholine (57). Furthermore, the right atrial (RAGP) and the posterior atrial ganglionated plexus (PAGP) appear to have different functions. Ablation of the PAGP reduced vagally mediated bradycardia by 26%, whereas RAGP ablation completely abolished this response. Inhibition of sympathetically mediated tachycardia by vagal stimulation was attenuated by ablation of either plexus (37). Thus parasympathetic efferent neurons are primarily located in the RAGP, whereas prejunctional parasympathetic-sympathetic interactions also involve neurons within the PAGP (37). The spontaneous activity of neurons in the intrinsic cardiac nervous system, even after cardiac denervation (45), suggests an active role of this system in regulating heart rate. However, the impact of the intrinsic cardiac nervous system on heart rate variability remains to be elucidated. The importance of the autonomic nervous system for heart rate variability in humans becomes apparent in patients following cardiac transplantation, in whom heart rate variability is markedly reduced (49). Although reinnervation is possible after months and years, initially transplanted hearts can be considered to be denervated. Thus the reduced heart rate variability in cardiac transplanted patients (49) underlines the importance of an intact autonomic innervation for spontaneously occurring heart rate variability. A major component of the chronotropic effect of the autonomic nervous system is linked to cAMP. Intracellular cAMP increases the inward current of Na+ (funny current, If), which determines the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization that precedes each action potential. The activity of adenylate cyclase and thus intracellular cAMP levels are increased by stimulation of sympathetic β1-adrenergic receptors and decreased (via a Gi protein) by stimulation of parasympathetic muscarinic receptors. Thus cardiac sympathetic innervation increases the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization and accelerates heart rate, while cardiac parasympathetic innervation elicits opposite effects. Interestingly, parasympathetic-mediated changes in heart rate occur much faster than sympathetic-mediated effects on heart rate (27, 30, 47a). As a result, cardiac sympathetic nervous system activity can only affect LF components of heart rate variability, whereas the parasympathetic nervous system can also modulate HF components. A hitherto unsolved question in this context is if the rapid heart rate response to parasympathetic stimulation compared with the slow effect of sympathetic inputs is due to 1) different kinetics of β1-adrenergic vs. muscarinic receptors, 2) different kinetics of adenylate cyclase vs. phosphodiesterase, the enzyme that cleaves cAMP, or 3) fast parasympathetic-mediated opening of KACh channels (via muscarinic receptors and a GK protein). Support for the latter possibility comes from experiments in the rabbit sinoatrial node that demonstrated that activation of KACh channels contributes to the initial slowing of heart rate as a result of vagal stimulation (8).On the basis of the different frequency response characteristics of sympathetic and parasympathetic modulation of heart rate, frequency analysis of heart rate variability is often used as a tool to determine "autonomic balance" or sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system activity (27, 47a). As an example, the wavelet transform was recently used to determine cardiac autonomic responses to reperfusion in patients with thrombolysis after coronary thrombosis. Depending on the location of the infarct, marked alterations in LF or HF spectral power of heart rate or in the LF/HF ratio was observed in all successful reperfusions (48).The HF component corresponds to the frequency of respiration and is driven by the vagus as indicated by the strong respiratory pattern of cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus (38). The LF component has been ascribed to sympathetic modulation of cardiac pacemaker activity, because a variety of studies demonstrated that acute interventions that increase sympathetic nervous system activity, such as orthostatic perturbations (17, 19, 33), mental stress (32), or handgrip exercise (13, 24) increases LF spectral power of heart rate (27, 30). In addition to acute perturbations of cardiac sympathetic nerve activity, feedback oscillations generated by the baroreceptor reflex also appear to contribute to LF spectral power of heart rate as it was demonstrated that sinoaortic denervation markedly reduces the LF component (27, 30). Despite the strong modulation of heart rate by the autonomic nervous system, the LF and HF spectral components of heart rate variability may not always be very reliable markers for cardiac sympathetic and parasympathetic "tone" (30). In a recent study, muscle sympathetic nerve activity was recorded together with heart rate variability during application of lower body negative pressure that is known to increase muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17, 33). At higher levels of lower body negative pressure (-15 mmHg), both muscle sympathetic nerve activity and relative LF spectral power of heart rate increased significantly, whereas HF spectral power decreased (17). These findings suggest that LF spectral power reflects cardiac sympathetic "tone." However, no correlation within subjects was found between changes in LF/HF ratio and muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17). Thus heart rate variability does not reliably reflect the sympathetic response to orthostatic stress. Respiration-related fluctuation of heart rate (respiratory sinus arrhythmia) is probably the most often investigated component of heart rate variability, as it is believed that this component reflects respiration-driven vagal modulation of sinus arrhythmia (27). In a recent study, Rentero et al. (38) recorded the electrical activity from cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus. Firing of these neurons was modulated by the central respiratory cycle. This and other studies support the view that respiratory sinus arrhythmia is generated by central coupling of the respiratory oscillator with autonomic centers in the brain stem. However, a mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling as a source of respiration-related heart rate variability has also been suggested (5). The Bainbridge reflex causes a tachycardia in response to hypervolemia. This reflex is initiated by atrial mechanoreceptors and uses efferent sympathetic and parasympathetic pathways to modulate heart rate in response to changes in central venous pressure (23). Thus respiratory changes in central blood volume cause corresponding respiratory fluctuations in cardiac autonomic nervous system activity via the Bainbridge reflex. Only the parasympathetic component of the efferent pathway of the reflex can contribute to respiratory sinus arrhythmia, because sympathetic actions on heart rate are too damped to follow the respiratory frequency. The gain and phase of the transfer function between respiratory changes in lung volume and R-R intervals of the ECG were calculated in human subjects during graded changes in central blood volume (5). At the respiratory frequency, the phase was -180 degree, indicating that an inspiratory increase in central blood volume was associated with a decrease in R-R interval (increase in heart rate). Furthermore, the gain of the transfer function at the respiratory frequency steadily increased with increasing central volumes (except at the highest volume). Both of these findings confirm the presence of the Bainbridge reflex in humans (5). Thus, in addition to the central coupling of respiratory oscillators with cardiovascular centers, the Bainbridge reflex may contribute to respiration-related heart rate variability by mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling. There is general agreement that low heart rate variability is an unfavorable prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, such as diabetic autonomic neuropathy, hypertension, myocardial infarction, and heart failure (18, 22, 27, 29, 47a). Heart rate variability (variance of R-R intervals) was reduced in patients with mild hypertension (29) compared with normal values (1,134 ± 202 vs. 3,466 ± 1,018 ms2) provided by the Task Force (47a). In the rat model of myocardial infarction-induced congestive heart failure, Francis and colleagues (18) reported loss of spontaneous heart rate variability 6 wk after coronary artery ligation. Interestingly, reduced heart rate variability was also observed in a rat model of depression that is based on chronic (4 wk) mild stress application (22). Because depression is an independent risk factor for coronary artery disease, this finding may realistically model a human disease process. The reduction in heart rate variability was abolished by β-adrenergic receptor blockade, indicating that the reduced heart rate variability in this model of depression is related to elevated cardiac sympathetic tone (22).In summary, heart rate variability is generated by multiple factors not exclusively limited to the autonomic nervous system. Specific frequency components of heart rate variability mirror acute perturbations of the autonomic nervous system but do not always reflect autonomic nervous system activity. Simple statistics of heart rate variability, such as the standard deviation of R-R intervals in the ECG, can reliably predict the prognosis of cardiovascular diseases.I thank Dr. R. McAllen for critically reviewing the manuscript. References 1 Aoki K, Stephens DP, and Johnson JM. Diurnal variation in cutaneous vasodilator and vasoconstrictor systems during heat stress. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R591-R595, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar3 Aoyagi N, Ohashi K, and Yamamoto Y. Frequency characteristics of long-term heart rate variability during constant-routine protocol. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: R171-R176, 2003.Link | ISI | Google Scholar4 Arora RC, Hirsch GM, Johnson Hirsch K, Hancock Friesen C, and Armour JA. Function of human intrinsic cardiac neurons in situ. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1736-R1740, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar5 Barbieri R, Triedman JK, and Saul JP. Heart rate control and mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling to assess central volume: a systems analysis. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: R1210-R1220, 2002.Link | ISI | Google Scholar6 Barrett CJ, Navakatikyan MA, and Malpas SC. Long-term control of renal blood flow: what is the role of the renal nerves? Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1534-R1545, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar7 Blumberg MS, Knoot TG, and Kirby RF. Neural and hormonal control of arterial pressure during cold exposure in un-anesthetized week-old rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R1514-R1521, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar8 Boyett MR, Kodama I, Honjo H, Arai A, Suzuki R, and Toyama J. Ionic basis of the chronotropic effect of acetylcholine on the rabbit sinoatrial node. Cardiovasc Res 29: 867-878, 1995.Crossref | PubMed | ISI | Google Scholar9 Braga and of on fluctuations and changes in blood pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and elicited of heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and modulation of sympathetic nerve activity to muscle in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and GABA mediate suprachiasmatic nucleus inputs to spinal-projecting paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and is not associated with of the exercise reflex in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google C, and Y. The effect of on the circadian control of human core body temperature is Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of adenosine receptors in the does not affect the in awake rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google JK, A, and circadian and during two Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and sympathetic nerve and heart rate spectral effects of lower body negative pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Francis Johnson and of heart failure after myocardial in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google A, and of lower body pressure on muscle sympathetic nerve activity response to Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Adenosine initial depression of in the rat in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google R, and and circadian phase in a diurnal the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Johnson alterations and autonomic in an model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google MA, and The interaction of the Bainbridge and in the conscious Res | ISI | Google A, and handgrip exercise arterial control of sympathetic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve regulation to is in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and in heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and function and cardiovascular interactions and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and interval variability in isolated working rat hearts at various conditions and Res | PubMed | Google A, A, and and autonomic of in patients with mild Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Malpas SC. Neural on cardiovascular and Am J Physiol Heart Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and thermoregulation in and rats in a Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and effects on reflex responses to mental stress in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and reflex during orthostatic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and responses to and are in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and and in a by cycle. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of humoral heart rate regulation in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Armour and within the intrinsic cardiac nervous system contribute to chronotropic regulation. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: 2003.Link | ISI | Google Rentero N, A, and McAllen of cardiac vagal motoneurons in rat nucleus ambiguus. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of heart rate in conscious rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and central actions of angiotensin to increase arterial pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of renal sympathetic nerve activity. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulation of cardiovascular and autonomic function in role of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Inhibition of sympathetic responses at birth in by of the paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and JP. pattern of during acute and chronic in conscious adult rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Armour and of chronic cardiac on of canine intracardiac neurons in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and levels and circadian rhythm of activity in the a model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve response of suprachiasmatic nucleus and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google

American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology · review · 309 citationsread the source →

Metastasis Suppressor Proteins: Discovery, Molecular Mechanisms, and Clinical Application

Clinically and experimentally, primary tumor formation and metastasis are distinct processes — locally growing tumors can progress without the development of metastases. This observation prompted the hypothesis that the molecular processes regulating tumorigenicity and metastasis are distinguishable and could be targeted therapeutically. During the process of transformation and subsequent progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations alter a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals that regulate normal tissue homeostasis. A minority of tumorigenic cells accrue the full complement of alterations that enables them to disseminate from the primary tumor, survive insults from the immune system and biophysical forces, and respond to growth-promoting and/or inhibitory signals from the distant tissues and thrive there. Identification of genes and proteins that specifically inhibit the ability of cells to form metastases (e.g., metastasis suppressors) is providing new insights into the molecular mechanisms that regulate this complex process. This review will highlight: (a) the functional identification of metastasis suppressors, (b) the signaling cascades and cellular phenotypes which are controlled or modulated by metastasis suppressors, and (c) opportunities for translation and clinical trials that are based on mechanistic studies regarding metastasis suppressors. The identification of nm23, the first metastasis suppressor gene, provided functional evidence for the existence of genes that specifically regulate metastasis (1, 2). Subsequent to this initial discovery, researchers used in vivo studies to identify additional metastasis suppressors. These pioneering studies used an unbiased approach to identify such candidates by demonstrating that ectopic expression of the putative suppressor gene inhibited the development of spontaneous macroscopic metastases without significantly affecting primary tumor growth (3–5). Recently, this definition has been extended to include genes which specifically inhibit metastatic colonization (i.e., experimental metastasis formation using i.v. injection). The use of in vivo assays is required because in vitro assays are often of inadequate complexity to sufficiently model the entire process of metastasis. Furthermore, there are currently no in vitro models that allow the study of preferential growth within different target tissues. Table 1 lists the proteins which have bona fide metastasis suppressor activity in vivo (i.e., suppression of metastasis following ectopic expression into metastatic cell lines). It is interesting to note that metastasis suppressor activity for many of these genes would not have been predicted a priori based on their known cellular function(s). Furthermore, the unbiased, functional strategy identified novel genes for which no cellular function was known at the time of discovery. Metastasis suppressors can impart their suppressive activity at one or more of the steps in the metastatic cascade (6). For example, in vivo studies showed that metastatic cancer cells which express ectopic KISS1, JNKK1/MKK4, MKK6, MKK7, TXNIP, nm23-H1, or SSeCKS proteins could successfully disseminate and lodge at secondary sites, but are suppressed in their ability to colonize (i.e., form overt metastases) target tissues (7–12). After lodging at secondary sites, disseminated cells may die, persist as nondividing cells, or initiate growth (13). Such pivotal cellular decisions depend on both the expression of a specific gene profile as well as the activation status of key signaling pathways and the cumulative inputs of timing, amplitude, and duration of signaling responses. In short, cells expressing metastasis suppressors grow at primary sites, but fail to proliferate at secondary or metastatic sites, suggesting differential responses to site-specific external signals. Although the observation that a gene of interest functions as a metastasis suppressor is an excellent starting point, research is now focused on the biochemical and molecular mechanisms by which metastasis suppressor proteins execute their in vivo functions. Metastasis suppressors vary widely in their cellular locations and biochemical functions. Such proteins could display either extracellular (e.g., KISS1) or intracellular localization patterns. Within the cell, they are located in various cellular compartments, from the plasma membrane (e.g., cadherin, KAI1, CD44), cytoskeleton (e.g., RhoGDI2, gelsolin), cytosol (e.g., JNKK1/MKK4, nm23-H1, RKIP), mitochondria (e.g., caspase 8), and nucleus (e.g., BRMS1, CRSP3, TXNIP) (14–21).Cells respond to external stimuli by using a limited number of signaling pathways. Signaling specificity is achieved, at least in part, by combinatorial spatiotemporal activation of signaling proteins. The summation of these signaling events, enabled by a cell-specific gene expression profile, is a tailored, situation-appropriate response. During the process of transformation and progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations influence a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals which regulate normal tissue homeostasis. The accumulation of such alterations during progressive rounds of cell division could endow a minority of tumorigenic cells with the ability to disseminate from the primary tumor. It is likely that as a result of these changes, metastatic cells are no longer bound by tissue-of-origin–derived signaling specificity and acquire the ability to modulate their responses to the changing environments encountered throughout the metastatic cascade. Current data supports a model in which ectopic expression of metastasis suppressor proteins may restore, at least in part, the endogenous signaling repertoire of earlier, more benign cellular generations, thereby blocking metastasis formation. In this light, metastasis formation can be viewed as the result of a cell's ability to respond to multiple growth milieus as opposed to being restricted to growth in the microenvironment of the tissue of origin. Defining pathways regulating metastatic growth requires the integration and interpretation of data obtained over experimental settings ranging from the molecular interactions of specific proteins, to communication between signaling networks within single cells, and ultimately cellular interactions among populations of cells that yield a particular disease state. This line of inquiry is a particular challenge in studies of metastasis regulation because of the complexity and diversity of downstream events that take place in metastasis formation. The majority of metastasis suppressors identified participate in highly conserved eukaryotic signal transduction pathways. Based on their known biochemical functions, we have divided the metastasis suppressors into four general signaling categories: cytoskeletal signaling, mitogenic pathways, stress-activated pathways, and survival pathways (Fig. 1). Although it may seem straightforward to place a metastatic suppressor into a linear signaling pathway, it is important to be mindful that these pathways are, in fact, dynamic networks that exist in series and parallel leading to crosstalk and interplay; phenomena known as emergent properties. The cytoskeleton is a dynamic structure that enables motility, deformability, and flexibility, while maintaining cellular architecture. For most nonhematopoietic cells, motility is an ancillary function; however, as a nonhematopoietic cell transitions from the benign to the invasive to the metastatic state, motility becomes an increasingly paramount ability. Without a dynamic actin cytoskeleton, a tumor cell would be incapable of intravasation or extravasation, and the cellular deformability is necessary to complete the metastatic cascade. Not surprisingly, several proteins involved in cellular motility have been implicated as metastasis suppressors. The Rho family of GTP-binding proteins, which include Rho, Rac, and Cdc42, are central players in the regulation of actin dynamics. The Rho-GTPase family consists of small 20 to 30 kDa monomeric GTP-binding proteins that bind GDP/GTP and hydrolyze GTP, leading to the activation of downstream effector molecules (22). In this signaling scheme, metastasis suppressors have been identified as upstream inhibitors of the Rho family (23), or downstream effectors (24). RhoGDIs inhibit Rho family members by impeding the dissociation of GDP from Rho proteins, thereby locking the Rho protein in its inactive state, preventing Rho proteins from interacting with effector targets, and/or sequestering Rho-GTPases in the cytosol (25). RHOGDI2 was shown to suppress experimental lung metastasis but not affect in vitro growth or in vivo tumorigenicity. The Src-suppressed C kinase substrate is a protein kinase C substrate with protein scaffolding properties that have been shown to be a negative regulator of Rho family members (26). Reexpression of Src-suppressed C kinase substrate suppressed secondary lung metastases in nude mice and increased cell-cell adhesion, yet had little effect on primary tumor growth (10). Furthermore, Src-suppressed C kinase substrate reexpression at physiologic levels suppresses podosome formation and correlates with the induction of normal actin cytoskeletal structures and cell morphology, but not with the inhibition of Src kinase activity in cells (26).The finding that RhoGDI displayed the ability to suppress metastasis suggested that the downstream molecules it inhibits may have metastasis-promoting activities. This hypothesis seems to hold true in that mice deficient in RhoC, a target of RhoGDI, displayed a marked decrease in metastasis potential (27). Furthermore, specific inhibition of a downstream effector of Rho, ROCK, decreased tumor cell invasiveness in vitro and reduced the dissemination of tumor cells implanted in the peritoneal cavity in vivo (28). RhoGDI2 has also been shown to regulate secreted growth factors such as endothelin 1 (ET-1), which contribute to metastasis and will be discussed below (29). This prometastasic activation of effectors downstream of the Rho family is not universal. Gelsolin is a downstream effector of Rac that regulates the length of actin via its filament severing and capping activities. Overexpression of gelsolin has been shown to inhibit metastasis in vivo (24). Counterintuitively, gelsolin is an indispensable protein of podosomes, which are thought to play an active role in tissue invasion and matrix remodeling through their regulation of matrix metalloprotease (MMP) activity (30, 31).Cell interactions with the extracellular matrix and with neighboring cells trigger numerous responses that have essential roles in the regulation of behavior and fate. Integrin-mediated cell adhesions provide bidirectional links between the microenvironment and the cytoskeleton. This crosstalk between a cell and its local environment occurs whether the cell is benign, malignant, or metastatic. In this light, the cytoskeleton serves as a conduit for the integration and processing of intracellular and extracellular information; however, changes in the cytoskeletal program during pathologic progression may alter how this information is integrated and processed. Two metastasis suppressors have been shown to have interactions with integrins. Connective tissue growth factor is a 38-kDa cysteine-rich heparin-binding protein which is a secreted growth factor that can bind to integrins on the cell surface (32). Ectopic expression of connective tissue growth factor inhibited metastatic colonization by lung cancer cells (33). In contrast, the KAI1 metastasis suppressor protein is a member of the tetraspanin family of proteins and has been shown to interact with a myriad of cell surface proteins including other tetraspans (i.e., CD9, CD81), integrins β1 and β2, MHCII growth factor receptors, and intracellular signaling proteins such as protein kinase C (34). It has been hypothesized that KAI1 modulates integrin and growth receptor signaling by accelerating the rate of internalization via a protein kinase C–dependent pathway, thereby modulating cell adhesion and cell migration (34). Furthermore, KAI1 has been shown to decrease the integrin- and ligand-induced activation of the receptor tyrosine kinase c-Met, and independently decreases integrin-induced Src activation. Both c-Met and Src are thought to be required for invasion (35). A final observation with respect to the involvement of integrins in metastasis suppressor activity concerns caspase-8 function. Loss of caspase-8 in neuroblastoma cells leads to increased survival and an increased incidence of metastasis. The induction of caspase-8-mediated apoptosis seems to be due to unligated integrins because decreased expression of unligated integrins enhanced cell survival (36–38).Claudin-4 is a component of tight junctions which form the most apical component of intercellular junctional complexes where they establish cell polarity and cellular functions such as permeability (39, 40). These intercellular junctions not only carry out adhesive functions but also contain crucial components of signaling pathways that regulate epithelial proliferation and differentiation. Complementary in vitro and in vivo studies identified claudin-4 as an inhibitor of invasion and metastasis in pancreatic cancer cells and a target of transforming growth factor-β and extracellular signal-regulated kinase (ERK) signaling (40, 41).RECK, a membrane glycoprotein that encodes a GPI-anchored glycoprotein harboring three protease inhibitor–like domains, has been shown to negatively regulate MMP-2, MMP-9, and MT1-MMPs in vitro, suggesting that it is an important regulator of extracellular matrix remodeling. Furthermore, RECK-null mouse embryos displayed markedly elevated MMP activity. Interestingly, RECK is down-regulated by Ras signaling, a commonly altered pathway in many malignant cells (42).The role of some putative metastasis suppressors is more complex. There are several of a protein as a metastasis suppressor in one model and a potential tumor suppressor in For example, is a glycoprotein that responses of the cell to their cellular Although it has been in the that of has been shown to suppress metastasis in the cancer system other have that may metastatic activity a of the invasion and of and has been suggested to be a is not the only protein to have an role in metastasis. are a of that cell-cell adhesion in various tissues in a function is controlled by its Both and seem to inhibit cell migration and the in vivo metastatic potential of cells other studies have suggested that may invasion It is important to note that cancer cells of tissue used in several of the The tissue specificity of metastasis suppressor function is with the and integration information through signal transduction is a secreted protein and is hypothesized to processing by The are known as or not be secreted in to its metastatic suppressor activity has yet to be at the identification of upstream of identified a metastasis suppressor activity for CRSP3, a of the receptor of cells with suppressed metastasis and was with an of providing a potential between these and metastasis regulation stress-activated protein and pathways in parallel to the protein kinase In to the of with and have been with cell and apoptosis in to and changes, and growth factor specifically either or The protein is a kinase that has been shown to and the and in to a of extracellular can function as a metastasis suppressor in both and cancer Complementary in vitro and in vivo assays showed that the kinase activity of is required for the suppression of overt metastases and is to Subsequent studies identified metastasis suppressor for and in and interest is the finding that in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis In vivo studies that both and suppress the formation of overt metastases by the ability of disseminated cells to colonize the lung identification of a metastasis suppressor function for protein also or protein mechanistic between the to cellular and of metastatic ability. is an endogenous inhibitor of a component of a system that has been implicated in cancer progression The levels of in cells are by endogenous as the in to to and including The primary of cellular is the is through of membrane or in to to with molecular or thereby highly or a of events that result in cell and of metastasis. this and ectopic expression of modulates these events to suppress metastasis formation is currently pathway is by mitogenic such as growth growth or which receptor tyrosine and The of mitogenic factors to cell surface a series of that with the activation of various factors and proteins and regulation may at in this is through both the of a kinase for a as well as protein expression levels of regulation are by intracellular localization and with scaffolding or proteins. These events may be important for regulating metastatic In the of metastasis the protein with the by to and the kinase suppressor of Ras a protein that has a role in the regulation of Ras activity and activation of the pathway has been shown to regulate signaling, suggesting that metastasis suppression activity may be by the inhibition of signaling kinase inhibitor protein was identified as a metastasis suppressor gene in functions as a negative upstream regulator of signaling and kinase interact with at sites, and of either inhibits of the Both be in to inhibition may suppress metastasis by of metastasis suppressors, and are with the signaling The signaling pathway a key role in many of cell survival and 1 are of an inhibitory and a and signals from various cellular proteins such as and an integration for the activation of and downstream to a that a of downstream targets, the and also regulates a of target proteins that cell proliferation and survival The levels of are and several particular interest is the which to signaling metastasis suppressor protein has been with the of cells showed decreases in endogenous levels of (i.e., of This finding is with a model in which changes in signaling the ability of disseminated cells to survive in the and grow at secondary In contrast, expression of the metastasis suppressor is modulated by clinical is the finding that expression correlates significantly with in both and cancer and that the in as a significantly of and cancer survival either evidence from the cell molecular and genetic studies that the metastatic process requires many steps to The of only one in this of in vivo events the process and a This enabled the identification of metastasis suppressor proteins. the of the however, the is not as straightforward because which signaling in the metastatic process are is not have insights into this by metastatic colonization as the in the metastatic cascade that is from a of A clinical will this to of invasive are with metastatic and (i.e., These that many with invasive disease disseminated cancer cells at preventing the of disseminated cells into the metastatic (i.e., the process of would a for cancer This approach more at preventing cancer cells from the primary tumor for the that this process has place the is first with In where this process has not yet local such as and can the the for additional at the an for metastasis preventing the growth of disseminated tumor cells into an overt clinical metastasis or the metastases. the approach not the in hold disease in providing increased of the with both of these is the identification of at for disease that they may at metastatic that can be to this include both tumor as well as molecular of the primary tumor to the development of metastasis a it has been to of the disseminated tumor cells at a secondary as the and as being distinct from that at the primary with to the tumor tumor cells distinct in the primary and secondary sites, and these interactions can or include locally and as well as cell-cell interactions in environments such as the and these with the of metastasis suppressor protein one can to there are to metastasis suppressor proteins. The of these on of the leading to of metastasis suppressor protein For example, the gene is it that of a normal gene would be the In contrast, was secondary to suppressed for example, at the endogenous gene seem we will provide an of approach from that have the of the first identified metastasis a of metastasis suppressor protein function in disseminated tumor In many cancer is with metastasis that occurs A study used gene to and whether this would cancer metastasis in an model of this A cell line of metastatic potential to the by in vivo was used to the of reexpression on metastasis. of these cells, an expressing was This in expression of the gene in most of the tumor cells in in and was with a in the number of metastases and a of This of of the of induction as a approach The of this approach are also to the of which is a disease that the In with gene is and the with i.v. development from the also the of the metastasis gene but the approach reexpression of the endogenous gene as a the was to a that would expression and allow at to on at of the This of would a that is and with an and have been to For example, was to expression in a cell line elevated the expression of cells out an of the the that elevated the expression of metastatic cell is a used at in and as well as at in cancer Furthermore, elevated expression and inhibited colonization and this effect was through The effect of on the of expression was in an in vivo model system for the of metastases the cell line to lung mice to or in of mice to of The number of metastases mouse was reduced by to on the metastases in reduced by to in the inhibited the number and of metastases in this This in metastases was with reexpression in the lung a of in with metastases and and tumors is of gene expression alterations with of metastasis suppressor protein A would be that functional of metastasis suppressor proteins is with gene expression changes, and cellular Recently, this with the that of metastasis suppressor proteins is with the of was used to a novel These studies focused on RhoGDI2, a suppressor of metastasis in an model of cancer metastasis reduced expression was to be with decreased survival for with cancer that RhoGDI2 as a on the expression of genes and to identify such genes in a of the lung metastasis model and primary clinical of RhoGDI2 protein is currently they to proteins or pathways downstream of These genes required to be following the of RhoGDI2 protein from the cells, and be of being inhibited by or to the changes in gene expression following of RhoGDI2 expression in metastatic cells, several proteins including This finding was by the between RhoGDI2 expression levels and of in tumor (29). Furthermore, inhibition of the endothelin with of the endothelin receptor such as to metastatic suppression in cells deficient for RhoGDI2 (29). The endothelin has been shown to regulate tissue cell cell and remodeling also has on cells in the and lung important of cancer metastasis In to such may growth factor and factor and growth factor one in the proliferation of and cells tumor also a role for in metastases from and and supports a model in which cells, in providing a microenvironment for these that trials with endothelin may be for with cancer following of the primary The for its use in the from the effect these have had in preventing experimental metastasis. These however, not the of these in metastatic but this is yet to be The molecular shown between and RhoGDI2 is because of endothelin receptor A such as with clinical In fact, in with in a the most events and that is well In this there was no at to in other of was not by this the of this effector approach to other metastasis suppressor proteins could identify potential novel for in other for and during the of key of this

Clinical Cancer Research · review · 131 citationsread the source →

Illness perceptions matter: understanding quality of life and advanced illness behaviors in female patients with late-stage cancer.

Background: Patients with late-stage cancer are living longer, making it important to understand factors that contribute to maintaining quality of life (QOL) and completing advanced illness behaviors (eg, advance directives). Objective: To examine whether illness perceptions-the cognitive beliefs that patients form about their cancer-may be more important guides to adjustment than clinical characteristics of the cancer. Methods: In a cross-sectional study, 105 female patients diagnosed with stage III (n = 66) or IV (n = 39) breast (n = 44), gynecological (n = 38), or lung (n = 23) cancer completed self-report measures of illness perceptions, QOL, and advanced illness behaviors. Clinical data was obtained from medical records. Results: Despite modest associations, patients' beliefs about the cancer were clearly unique from the clinical characteristics of the cancer. Illness perception variables accounted for a large portion of the variance (PS < .01) for QOL and advanced illness behaviors, whereas clinical characteristics did not. QOL scores were predicted by patients' reports of experiencing more cancer related symptoms (ie, illness identity), believing that their cancer is central to their self-identity, and higher income. Higher completion of advanced illness behaviors was predicted by higher income, the cancer being recurrent, and participants perceiving their cancer as more severe but also more understandable. Limitations: This study was limited by a cross-sectional design, small sample size, and focus on female patients. Conclusion: Addressing patients' beliefs about their cancer diagnosis may provide important targets for intervention to improve QOL and illness behaviors in patients with late-stage cancer.

The journal of supportive oncology · 7 citationsread the source →

Measuring education in the context of health inequalities

Socio-economic inequalities in a wide range of health outcomes are pervasive and enduring.1 Most often, the association between socio-economic indicators and health is inversely graded (commonly known as social gradients in health) so that the higher the socio-economic position (SEP), the lower is the rate of morbidity and mortality. SEP is a broad concept capturing resource- and prestige-based measures.2 To date, educational level/attainment has been commonly used as an indicator of SEP in health inequalities research due to general acceptance that education is easy to measure and unlikely to be affected by diseases that begin in adult life.3 Of note, early-life health gradients in education (i.e. health selection hypothesis or reverse causality) might also exist and needs to be considered.4 Education is less prone to non-response error compared with income or wealth as SEP indicators.3 In most nations, education shapes the future occupational position and earning potential of individuals. However, it is important to keep in mind that in this context, education is only a ‘proxy’ or a probabilistic indicator of social class, status or income.3 Despite perceptions of education as a straightforward measure for social epidemiological purposes, the relationship between education and health is complex, as are the underlying mechanisms, including psychosocial, material and behavioural mechanisms and pathways (Figure 1).3 The psychosocial pathway emphasizes the way in which education provides a means to alleviate the direct and indirect effects of stress related to being lower on the socio-economic hierarchy through psychological and social buffering. The material pathway emphasizes that highly educated adults are more likely to be employed and earn more money, which improves access to tangible material conditions, services and amenities, and assets. The behavioural pathway emphasizes that education can increase health-related knowledge through health literacy, but also provides increased personal control, which in turn can lead to the adoption of healthy behaviours. These pathways are not mutually exclusive. The material resources of daily life across the life course have psychosocial meaning attached to them, one’s experience of psychosocial stress may be associated with health behaviours, etc. Whereas newer advanced epidemiological techniques and wider data availability increase the potential to improve understanding of the association between education and health and its underlying mechanisms, current practices regarding the measurement and operationalization of education as a core indicator of SEP lack the ability to consistently capture and compare the diversity of individual participants’ educational experiences over time. Pathways between education and health Evidence is emerging that traditional education measures (educational qualification or years of schooling) are insufficient to fully understand the relationship between education and health. These traditional measures only focus on quantity and/or credentials and do not capture other facets of education, including the type and quality of education, school environment and dissonant/consonant relationships between family, and school and educational expectations. Traditional measures, mainly assessing early-childhood/adulthood educational experiences, typically neglect the importance of educational experiences throughout the life course based on assuming that education is unlikely to alter after early adulthood. Moreover, the justification for a specific conceptualization of education is often not adequately described. Of note, the choice of education as an SEP indicator and its operationalization often reflect the availability of data rather than any explicit theorization of the possible effect of different measures or categorizations. To further discussion regarding some of the problems with the current approaches to educational measurement in social inequality studies,5–7 our paper takes a different approach by both highlighting the methodological issues and emphasizing the importance of commonly neglected aspects of education in these studies. A widely used measure of education is based on attainment of a qualification or completion of a phase of education, such as primary or high school. Statistically, attainment measures can be dichotomized as having achieved a particular level or not or compared across categories of educational attainment. Some studies convert attainment measures into duration measures by allocating a number of years to each attainment level (e.g. finishing high school is commonly considered to be the equivalent of 12 years of education). Another frequently used education measure is the duration, usually elicited as the number of years and sometimes as the age of leaving school. Years of education has the advantage of being easy to obtain and also offers flexibility for statistical manipulation. It is handled most elegantly and parsimoniously as a continuous variable but additionally lends itself to dichotomous and categorical operationalizations.8 Both attainment and duration measures can be relatively straightforward to acquire in narrow contexts with well-defined educational structures; however, they become more complex when there is ambiguity in educational pathways, especially when comparing across countries.9,10 Literacy measures, which reflect skills obtained through education, are also used depending on the context.11 Literacy can be self-reported or assessed directly.11 Other less commonly used educational measures include latent variable models—using multiple variables to evaluate a construct that cannot be measured directly (e.g. quality of education, academic achievement).12Table 1 summarizes different educational measures. Different educational measures Different educational measures With many continuous variables, we can expect each unit to be of relatively equal worth, even if there is a cumulative effect. This is not the case with education.13 A year of education at age 5 years cannot be expected to be comparable with a year of education at age 15 years. Similarly, a year of education in 1950 likely differs from a year of education in 2020,14 as does a year of education in Syria compared with a year in Sweden. A year of education in a classroom of 50 students is unlikely to be equivalent to a year of education in a classroom of 5. Moreover, using simple counts of years of education as a measure treats all types of education and educational institutions equally. Educational content varies across different subjects, thus a year in an art college is not equal to a year in an engineering school or a year in military academies.14–16 These are all relatively innocuous examples, but we must also consider that these inequalities in a year of education are likely to mirror existing inequalities in society in terms of gender, race/ethnicity, socio-economic and other (dis)advantages.17 A continuous measure of years of education assumes that every year of education contributes equally to a person’s acquired SEP and that time spent in education is more important than educational achievements.13 Due to differences in the structure and organization of courses across educational institutions and countries, it is possible that qualifications with very different levels of complexity require a similar amount of time in education.15 Consequently, measurement of the number of years of education of an individual is not necessarily a good proxy for educational attainment.15 In most cohort studies and surveys educational level is measured using a self-completed questionnaire.7,18 Although few studies have focused on the accuracy of reported education, there is some evidence of inconsistency in reporting educational attainment.14,18 Limited evidence also shows that respondents tend to exaggerate the amount of schooling they have obtained.14 Consistency in measuring and modelling education allows researchers to compare the results from different studies and pool different data sources for within-country or cross-national comparative analysis.19 However, systematic reviews in the field highlight substantial heterogeneity in measuring and operationalizing education.20,21 Educational level does not have universal definitions. One important example in this regard is the definition of low education where researchers use different cut-offs for years of education to define low education, ranging from zero to 12.20 Importantly, results from studies that use different definitions are not comparable. Comparability is particularly essential for cross-national studies.10 For cross-national comparison, educational data need to be harmonized using an internationally comparable education variable.19 Although attempts have been made to implement standardized comparative measures (e.g. harmonization using the International Standard Classification of Education), different studies have used either different standards or implemented them in different ways.8,10,19 Consistency is also important within the same context over time given the potential demographic changes and alterations in the educational system.10 Another important issue that makes comparability generally more difficult is the absence of explicit information about measurement of education and its operationalization. Information on how educational attainment was obtained (self-report, proxy, records), how the number of years were obtained (self-report, extrapolated), how categorization was determined (related to attainment, to years or to literacy) and what was the basis of cut-offs (educational system, population mean, literature, arbitrary) should all be reported but rarely are in practice.20 Measurement of education as an SEP indicator is believed to capture the knowledge-related assets of an individual.13 Educational attainment also captures aspects of social opportunities for education and individual life chances.19 Moreover, educational attainment is strongly associated with attitudes, beliefs, values and behaviours as well as parents’ choices and constraints over how they can influence their children’s SEP.19,22 These highlight that education is a proxy for cultural capital, also captured by other variables such as the number of books in a child’s home.22,23 Some researchers argue that educational level is a proxy for intelligence that further affects health and health inequality24 despite findings from several studies that differences in educational achievements reflect the level of cultural capital and not intelligence.25,26 When interpreting results, it is important to distinguish between these two underlying hypothesized constructs. Education systems change and evolve in most nations over time. Thus, the meaning of educational levels and implications of educational achievements vary among different birth cohorts.13 For instance, comparing educational levels of participants who attended school before or during the First World War with those who attended school after the Second World War is complicated as they have been educated under different circumstances with varying access to educational opportunities beyond compulsory education.15 Moreover, most of today’s older adults in Europe and the UK left school at the minimum age with no academic qualifications; thus, older cohorts will be over-represented among those classified as having low education.27 When using duration measures, researchers should consider changes to the length of compulsory education over time.27 Therefore, studies that include participants from several birth cohorts should consider specific birth cohort effects to avoid bias in their results. From 1970 onwards, gender/sex differences in educational attainment levels, favouring male over female, have declined sharply in nearly all high-income countries (HICs) and, in some, have been eliminated or even reversed.28 However, the socio-economic impact of education on health is still gender-related; the education–occupation–wage relationship continues to favour men, with the economic returns for a given level of education higher for men than for women.2 Nevertheless, based on the resource substitution theory, educational level may have a greater impact on the health of women than men.5,29 This theory highlights that the less there is of one resource (e.g. earnings, power), the more important another will be (e.g. education), or the presence of one resource makes the absence of another less harmful.29 This impact on health has been observed with differences in mortality by educational level across age groups that are more pronounced in men than in women.30 Of note, it is important to highlight that maternal and paternal education might have different impacts on their offspring health. For instance, a 2021 global systematic review and meta-analysis highlighted that maternal education is a stronger predictor of child mortality than paternal education.31 The interactions between race, ethnicity and SEP should always be considered in interpreting the underlying mechanisms involved in education inequalities in health for several reasons. First, it has been shown that educational attainment is generally lower among ethnic minority populations.32 Apart from a lack of English-language proficiency, another important reason why ethnic minorities may have lower attendance or completion rates could be a lack of cultural competence in dominant educational paradigms (e.g. imposing cultural values and ignoring ancestral knowledge). Moreover, ethnic minority populations tend to receive a different amount of education than privileged population groups in a society and the quality of education received may also differ. Additionally, racial segregation in schools along with residential racial segregation or disproportional allocation of ethnic minority students into low-ability or non-college preparatory classes are primary mechanisms underlying socio-economic differences for many ethnic minority groups.32 It has been shown that sometimes attainment or duration measures are less appropriate than other measures for specific ethnic groups, likely due to differences in the quality of educational offerings. For instance, studies suggest that the quality of education is a more important consideration among minoritized people rather than years spent in education.33,34 Moreover, in some lower- and middle-income countries (LMICs) where compulsory education is either non-existent or not binding, just the fact of an adolescent attending school (or not) might be more relevant. Third, ethnic minorities do not experience the same returns (e.g. economic returns) from education as dominant groups (the diminishing returns hypothesis).18 These differences are not only due to variations in educational quality, but also due to structural inequalities in society.35 Thus, weaker educational gradients among ethnic minorities, particularly women, could be due to smaller economic returns from education among these groups than privileged population groups.5 Finally, the extent to which education reflects socio-economic wellbeing may depend on the proportions of immigrants in different ethnic communities and whether they obtained their education outside or inside their host country, as the value attached to qualifications is often country-specific.13,36 Most SEP measures in common usage, including education, are developed by researchers from HICs.13,18 It is therefore important to question the appropriateness of imposing educational measures from HIC, with their accompanying cultural and values systems, on LMICs. Educational systems, with their idiosyncratic institutions and certificates and differential funding between public and private schools, differ substantially across countries, so common measures of education and their operationalization might not be appropriate in different contexts.19 This highlights the importance of using nation/country-specific educational measures in health inequality studies. Not paying attention to these important contextual details prevents us from capturing health inequalities by educational level. However, there is a conflict between the need for standardization for comparability and country-level appropriateness of educational measures. Researchers need to decide which is more appropriate for their research question and perhaps sacrifice one or the other, accepting and acknowledging the limitations in order to interpret their findings in this context. Researchers also need to account for characteristics specific to different populations. For example, reverse causality can be a factor, with the limiting effect of ill health in childhood on educational attainment a possible important consideration in LMIC.11 Of note, cohort effects and gender differences are likely to be of particular importance in LMIC compared with HICs. Currently, little is known about specific elements of education that might influence health. Measuring the number of years of education or levels of attainment captures no information about the quality of the education and/or school (e.g. pupil-to-teacher ratio, teacher salary, highly skilled teachers). For instance, school quality at critical time points in life (e.g. during adolescence) may influence long-term health trajectories.37 Dissonant/consonant relationships between family and school can be also an important factor in understanding the effects of education on health. In several studies, parental interest in their child’s education has been reported as an upstream determinant of education having lasting effects on health.38,39 Moreover, the socio-economic mix of schools and the educational expectations within schools may influence social class differences in educational achievement.40 Thus, apart from studies focusing on education at individual or interpersonal levels, further research focusing on education at system/organization or community levels is needed. Of note, due to the mandatory minimum age requirements for leaving school and greater availability of higher education, the range in the amount of education obtained within some populations is narrowing.18 In HICs at least, with the exception of older cohorts, it is rare to find adults with low or very low education, so shifting the focus towards looking at educational quality and type along with level is needed. As different education elements may be differentially associated with health outcomes, using conventional measures of education may violate the consistency assumption.6 The consistency assumption entails that the exposure (e.g. education) needs to be detailed with enough specificity that any variation within the exposure specification would not result in a different outcome. For instance, literacy may have a different impact on health than the number of years of education and may ultimately lead to different policy recommendations.6 Thus, considering several indicators of education allows a better understanding of the context. Formal education measures do not capture informal and non-accredited education, including on-the-job training and other career investments made by individuals with similar levels of formal schooling.41 This neglects the concept of life-long learning, which is a dynamic, ever-evolving accumulation of knowledge, skills and capacities. Measures of formal education neglect education at later adulthood and older ages, as formal education is normally completed in young adulthood. To date, the informal component of education is rarely considered.27 This may be due to the complexity of the task of eliciting, coding, classifying and interpreting a wide range of formal and informal educational experiences. Moreover, reverse causality is an issue to be considered when using educational measures that include post-school qualification and training at work rather than measures based on school qualifications.27 In Figure 2, we summarize recommendations regarding how to appropriately select the best available educational measure(s) with regard to a research question, considering birth cohorts, social groups and contexts that capture and compare the diversity of participants’ educational experiences over time in health inequality studies. We also recommend considering the quality of education as well as the quantity along with formal and informal education throughout the life course. To do this, cohort studies, public health research and surveillance need to collect data on quality and informal education routinely. Recommendations for appropriately selecting and operationalizing educational measures in health inequality studies We have presented conceptual arguments to illustrate major methodological issues and challenges associated with current approaches regarding educational measures in health inequality studies. Consequently, we suggested strategies and recommendations for improving approaches towards selection and operationalization of educational measure(s). We also highlighted the potential future direction of health inequality studies towards including other facets of education and considering the impact of informal education on health. Education plays a potentially important and multifaceted role in redressing health inequalities and by enhancing our research assumptions and methods about hypothesized mechanisms, we may come closer to understanding this in more depth. Not applicable. Not applicable. S.K.S. conceived of the idea for the manuscript. S.K.S. drafted the manuscript. to to and the and the before S.K.S. is by the of in number received funding from the the funding from the under the research and The no role in of the and to

International Journal of Epidemiology · editorial or comment · 58 citationsread the source →

Feasibility and pilot study of a brief self-compassion intervention addressing body image distress in breast cancer survivors.

Background: The majority of breast cancer survivors (BCSs) experience body image concerns following treatment. Body Image distress (BID) is associated with psychological distress and diminished quality of life. A web-based self-compassion focused writing activity (My Changed Body - MyCB) reduces BID in BCSs, yet limited research exists on participant characteristics associated with such intervention adherence. Self-compassion-based meditations are also efficacious in reducing BID in non-BCS populations. This parallel, double-blind pilot randomised controlled trial aimed to assess the feasibility and acceptability of MyCB, with and without an additional meditation component, on BID and related psychological outcomes in BCSs. The trial was registered with the Australian and New Zealand Clinical Trials Registry (#ACTRN12619001693112). Methods: BCSs were randomly allocated to MyCB (n = 39), MyCB + Meditation (MyCB + M) (n = 17) or an expressive writing (EW) active control arm (n = 23). The primary outcome was BID. Secondary outcomes were body appreciation, affect (positive and negative), psychological distress (depression, anxiety and stress) and self-compassion (state and trait). Assessments were completed online at baseline, post-intervention and 1-month. Results: Adherence to the MyCB writing (45%) and meditation (50%) was modest, and acceptability was high for both MyCB and MyCB + M. Intent to treat linear mixed model analyses indicated: Post-intervention - state self-compassion and positive affect increased for MyCB compared to EW; 1-month: BID scores decreased across all conditions; trait self-compassion increased and anxiety decreased for MyCB + M compared to MyCB and EW. Conclusion: These findings provide preliminary evidence for the efficacy and potential clinical use of the MyCB brief web-based self-compassion intervention alone and with the addition of meditation, to increase self-compassion and psychological wellbeing in BCSs.

Health psychology and behavioral medicine · 30 citationsread the source →

Prevalence and correlates of clinically significant body-focused repetitive behaviors in a non-clinical sample.

Background: Body-focused repetitive behaviors (BFRBs) are repetitive, ritualized behaviors focused on the body, involving compulsively damaging one's physical appearance or causing physical injury. They include skin picking, hair pulling, nail biting, and lip or cheek biting and chewing. This study sought to examine prevalence, clinical correlates and quality of life (QoL) impairment associated with these conditions in a non-clinical sample of adults. Method: An online survey was completed by N = 1378 participants. Comparisons were made between those self-reporting body-focused repetitive behavior to those without, on a range of clinical correlates (depression, anxiety, obsessive-compulsive symptoms, body dysmorphic symptoms, fear of negative evaluation) and QoL domains. Results: Three-hundred and eighteen participants (23%) reported the presence of a probable BFRB; n = 85 (6%) nail biting, n = 88 (6%) lip or cheek biting/chewing, n = 187 (14%) skin picking, and n = 39 (2%) hair pulling. There were significant differences between those with and without a probable BFRB (pBFRB) across all clinical variables investigated, with the pBFRB group reporting higher levels of symptoms. The BFRB group reported reduced QoL on some domains. Few differences emerged between the BFRB groups, although individuals with probable skin picking reported higher levels of body image concern, than those with other pBFRB conditions, and there was a trend toward probable skin picking to endorse higher levels of OCD symptoms and anxiety. There were no significant differences between the BFRB groups on QoL domains. Conclusion: Although differences were found between those with a pBFRB and those without, there were few differences between the different pBFRB groups, indicating that all BFRB conditions are concerning. Skin picking may be one of the more severe of the BFRB presentations, although the small number of differences between the groups may reflect a single pathological grooming factor underlying the BFRBs. These findings underscore the importance of recognizing that all body-focused behaviors can cause significant distress, impairment, and reduced QoL, and highlights the need for timely and accurate identification of these conditions by health professionals.

Comprehensive psychiatry · 35 citationsread the source →

The importance of mindfulness in psychosocial distress and quality of life in dermatology patients.

Background: Mindfulness, defined as purposively and nonjudgementally paying attention in the present moment, could be used within psychosocial interventions to reduce the distress associated with social anxiety and avoidance found in many skin conditions. However, little is known about the relationship between naturally occurring levels of mindfulness and distress in dermatology patients. Objectives: To examine the relationship between mindfulness and psychosocial distress in a dermatological population. It was hypothesized that higher levels of mindfulness would be associated with lower levels of social anxiety, anxiety, depression and skin shame, and with better quality of life. Methods: Adult dermatology outpatients (n = 120) from one hospital completed items assessing subjective severity, skin shame, fear of negative evaluation, anxiety and depression, quality of life, and levels of mindfulness. Results: Considering depression, 14% reported mild, 5% moderate and 2·5% severe symptoms. For anxiety, 22% reported mild, 23% moderate and 6% severe symptoms. In addition, 33·4% reported clinically significant social anxiety. After controlling for subjective severity, mindfulness explained an additional 19% of the variance in depression, 39% in anxiety, 41% in social anxiety, 13% in skin shame and 6% in dermatological quality of life. One specific facet of mindfulness (acting with awareness) was found to be the most consistent predictor of distress. Conclusions: The findings indicate that higher levels of mindfulness are associated with lower distress. This suggests that facilitating mindfulness may be helpful in reducing distress in dermatology patients, and the use of mindfulness techniques warrants further investigation.

The British journal of dermatology · 40 citationsread the source →

Potential impact of midwives in preventing and reducing maternal and neonatal mortality and stillbirths: a Lives Saved Tool modelling study.

Background: Strengthening the capacity of midwives to deliver high-quality maternal and newborn health services has been highlighted as a priority by global health organisations. To support low-income and middle-income countries (LMICs) in their decisions about investments in health, we aimed to estimate the potential impact of midwives on reducing maternal and neonatal deaths and stillbirths under several intervention coverage scenarios. Methods: For this modelling study, we used the Lives Saved Tool to estimate the number of deaths that would be averted by 2035, if coverage of health interventions that can be delivered by professional midwives were scaled up in 88 countries that account for the vast majority of the world's maternal and neonatal deaths and stillbirths. We used four scenarios to assess the effects of increasing the coverage of midwife-delivered interventions by a modest amount (10% every 5 years), a substantial amount (25% every 5 years), and the amount needed to reach universal coverage of these interventions (ie, to 95%); and the effects of coverage attrition (a 2% decrease every 5 years). We grouped countries in three equal-sized groups according to their Human Development Index. Group A included the 30 countries with the lowest HDI, group B included 29 low-to-medium HDI countries, and group C included 29 medium-to-high HDI countries. Findings: We estimated that, relative to current coverage, a substantial increase in coverage of midwife-delivered interventions could avert 41% of maternal deaths, 39% of neonatal deaths, and 26% of stillbirths, equating to 2·2 million deaths averted per year by 2035. Even a modest increase in coverage of midwife-delivered interventions could avert 22% of maternal deaths, 23% of neonatal deaths, and 14% of stillbirths, equating to 1·3 million deaths averted per year by 2035. Relative to current coverage, universal coverage of midwife-delivered interventions would avert 67% of maternal deaths, 64% of neonatal deaths, and 65% of stillbirths, allowing 4·3 million lives to be saved annually by 2035. These deaths averted would be particularly concentrated in the group B countries, which currently account for a large proportion of the world's population and have high mortality rates compared with group C. Interpretation: Midwives can help to substantially reduce maternal and neonatal mortality and stillbirths in LMICs. However, to realise this potential, midwives need to have skills and competencies in line with recommendations from the International Confederation of Midwives, to be part of a team of sufficient size and skill, and to work in an enabling environment. Our study highlights the potential of midwives but there are many challenges to the achievement of this potential. If increased coverage of midwife-delivered interventions can be achieved, health systems will be better able to provide effective coverage of essential sexual, reproductive, maternal, newborn, and adolescent health interventions. Funding: New Venture Fund.

The Lancet. Global health · 263 citationsread the source →

Combat sports and wellbeing: advancing health and inclusion in athletes and practitioners. An opinion paper

Historically, combat sports have been predominantly conceptualized within the framework of elite competition, emphasizing physical aptitude, technical proficiency, and strategic execution (1-3). Despite their traditional and peculiar constitutions and developments, disciplines such as judo, karate, taekwondo, wrestling, fencing, boxing, and mixed martial arts have commonly been associated with high-performance athletes striving for competitive excellence on national and international stages (1, 4-6). However, contemporary discourse increasingly recognizes their expansive role in contributing to physical and psychological well-being, and social inclusion of the practitioners (7, 8). This paradigmatic shift underscores the capacity of combat sports to function as inclusive and accessible modalities for fostering multidimensional health benefits across diverse populations, including individuals with disabilities and other marginalized groups (9-13).The interdisciplinary exploration of physical activity and health highlights the intricate interrelationship between structured sports engagement and holistic well-being (14). Whilst conventional team and individual sports have long been acknowledged for their physiological and psychosocial benefits, combat sports exhibit distinct characteristics that might amplify these advantages (15, 16). Within combat sports, the synergistic interplay of rigorous physical conditioning, the cognitive engagement, adherence to rules, competition dynamics, respect, externalizing emotions regulation, are intertwined with pedagogical and philosophical values, thus presenting a unique framework for enhancing psychological resilience, cognitive adaptability, and emotional control. Consequently, the systematic practice of combat sports has been increasingly examined as a way of promoting mental health, stress modulation, and social cohesion (17, 18).The inclusive nature of many combat sports programmes further accentuates their relevance in dismantling stereotypes, facilitating integration, and fostering equity and social integration (19-21). In fact, they demonstrated significant adaptability to accommodate individuals with disabilities (e.g., physical impairments, developmental, emotional, intellectual disorders), thereby ensuring equitable access and fostering empowerment (9, 22). Adapted judo, para-taekwondo, and other modified combat disciplines provide individuals with disabilities a structured platform to engage in physical activity, cultivate self-efficacy, and develop meaningful social connections within a supportive and adaptive environment (23). From a public health perspective, the integration of combat sports within community-based health initiatives offers a compelling opportunity to engage populations that may not traditionally participate in structured physical activity programmes (7, 8, 19). The distinctive accessibility of combat sports, which cater to practitioners of all skill levels (e.g., from novices to elite athletes) sets them apart from many other sports. While their structured progression, adaptability, and emphasis on holistic development make them a viable option for lifelong and intergenerational participation (19, 24, 25), the mentorship and pedagogical frameworks cultivate positive role modeling, discipline, and intrinsic motivation, which are integral for sustaining long-term adherence to health-promoting behaviors (8).Furthermore, the intersection between combat sports and mental health has increasingly emerged as a focal point within academic and clinical research (17) with empirical evidence suggesting an association between participation and enhanced self-regulation and self-efficacy, and reduction in anxiety and depressive symptomatology (8, 26, 27). In necessitating sustained focus, adaptability, and emotional equilibrium, combat sports inherently require cognitive and affective demands, which align closely with established psychological frameworks that underpin mental well-being (28, 29). Moreover, the integration of mindfulness techniques, stress management strategies, and resilience-building paradigms within combat sports training substantiates their potential as a non-pharmacological intervention for addressing various mental health challenges (e.g., autism spectrum and oppositional defiant disorders) (30, 31).Despite these advantages, the discourse surrounding combat sports and well-being necessitates a critical examination of inherent risks and potential challenges. Issues related to injury risk, hypercompetitive environments, eating disorders, sexual harassment, and the psychological stressors associated with high-intensity training warrant careful scrutiny (32-36). The implementation of evidence-based injury prevention protocols, the establishment of ethically responsible coaching methodologies, and the promotion of safe training environments are imperative to ensure that the benefits of combat sports are maximized while minimizing adverse outcomes. Against this backdrop, this opinion paper seeks to examine the role of combat sports in advancing health and social inclusion among athletes and practitioners. Through a synthesis of contemporary empirical findings, theoretical paradigms, and applied insights, this paper aims to contribute to the evolving discourse on the potential of combat sports as a catalyst for holistic well-being. By delineating the multidimensional impact of combat sports on physical, psychological, and social health, this paper endeavors to underscore their transformative potential as an instrument for fostering individual and community well-being within different populations. DiscussionWhilst an expanding body of research and an evolution in scholarly discourse is recognizing the combat sports’ broader implications for holistic well-being (30, 37), a rigorous evaluation of the investigation methodologies, the validity of hypotheses, and the translational potential of recent findings is necessary to contextualize their significance within the sports and public health sciences, considering their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (Figure 1).----------------------------------------ADD FIGURE 1 ABOUT HERE----------------------------------------Empirical evidence robustly shows the positive impact of combat sports on physical fitness, motor coordination, and cardiovascular health (3, 38). These benefits are attributed to the high-intensity, intermittent nature of combat sports training, which enhances aerobic and anaerobic endurance, muscular strength, and neuromuscular control (39). However, concerns regarding injury risk, particularly in striking and contact-intensive disciplines such as boxing, taekwondo, and mixed martial arts, necessitate continued research into injury mitigation strategies, particularly those targeting concussion and repetitive head trauma (6, 35, 40, 41). Moreover, many combat sports have developed styles with reduced or simulated contact to minimize injury risk. For example, the French "boxe éducative" emphasizing technique and control, penalizing any violent behaviors (42) and the value and application of kata (i.e., forms; prearranged, pattern practices) to learning and adopting judo technique in a safe way educating the athlete culturally, to enrich her/him as a person (43).Beyond physical health, recent studies highlight the psychological benefits of combat sports, including reductions in anxiety and depression and improvements in self-efficacy, emotional regulation, resilience, and stress management (27, 44-47). Therefore, combat sports-based interventions for individuals with mental health conditions have yielded promising outcomes (23). Despite these encouraging findings, variability in study designs, participant demographics, and intervention protocols limits their external validity, underscoring the need for further rigorously controlled investigations. Furthermore, some authors claimed that combat sport athletes might present symptoms of low energy availability and high anxiety levels associated with competition- and injury-related psychological stressors, deficits in executive functions and neuropsychological impairments associated with occurrence of concussions, disordered eating and eating disorders associated with weight-loss, and might suffer offensive, frightening, hostile, degrading, humiliating experiences, or sexual harassment, which urge safeguarding actions (32-36).The role of combat sports in fostering social inclusion has gained empirical support, particularly in programmes aimed at individuals with disabilities and marginalized communities (25, 48). For instance, a recent systematic review shows that judo interventions adapted for intellectual disabilities help improve social integration and self-perception and enhance participants' quality of life (49). The development of para-combat sports demonstrates enhanced physical and motor abilities while providing psychosocial benefits to various populations with different disabilities, promoting social integration, self-perception, and community belonging (50, 51). However, longitudinal research is needed to assess the long-term retention rates and sustainability of these benefits. Furthermore, there is a need of studies focused on the most appropriate adapted rules to achieve a fairer competition for ensuring a sense of success in individuals with physical, emotional, mental, hearing or visual impairments participating in adapted sports competitions at local, national, and international levels. Methodological approaches in combat sports research encompass experimental, longitudinal, qualitative, and systematic review designs. While randomized controlled trials remain the gold standard for establishing causality, their application in combat sports research is constrained by ethical concerns, logistical challenges, and the inherently dynamic nature of training environments (52, 53). Consequently, many studies rely on observational designs, which, despite their value in identifying associations, are susceptible to confounding variables and biases (24, 54).Qualitative methodologies have provided critical insights into the lived experiences of combat sports practitioners, offering perspectives on psychological and social dimensions that are often overlooked in quantitative studies (28). Ethnographic research has been particularly instrumental in elucidating the role of combat sports in shaping identity, discipline, and personal development (55). However, limitations in reproducibility and generalizability highlight the need for mixed-methods approaches to generate a more comprehensive understanding of combat sports' impact (25, 56).Additionally, the incorporation of biometric and neurocognitive assessments, such as heart rate variability analysis, functional MRI, and salivary cortisol measurements, has advanced our understanding of the physiological and psychological mechanisms underlying combat sports participation (47, 57, 58). Despite their objective precision, these techniques often face challenges related to cost, accessibility, and limited sample sizes, necessitating the development of scalable and cost-effective methodologies for broader research application. Finally, recent studies show that virtual reality (VR) technology and digital platforms are increasingly becoming part of combat sports training methods. Due to COVID-19 restrictions, martial arts schools and organizations implemented hybrid or online training models, which allowed athletes to stay engaged. VR boxing programmes provide users with virtual sparring simulations to enhance their motor skills without needing physical interaction. Initial results indicate that VR training enhances response behavior in karate athletes (59). Digital adaptations offer great potential, especially for people with limited mobility or remote locations. However, further studies are necessary to prove their enduring effects on physical health and psychological and social aspects (59-61).Strengths and Weaknesses of Scientific HypothesesThe hypothesis that combat sports confer multidimensional health benefits is strongly supported by empirical evidence spanning physiological, psychological, and social domains (8, 62-64). The integration of physical exertion, cognitive engagement, and structured discipline inherent in combat sports aligns with established theories of exercise psychology, neuroplasticity, and social identity formation (65, 66). This multidimensional perspective provides a robust theoretical foundation for advocating combat sports as a health-promoting activity. Nevertheless, several limitations warrant consideration. The heterogeneity of disciplines, which vary highly in intensity, contact level, and training methodologies, is often inadequately addressed in research, leading to overgeneralized conclusions (17, 39). Often underexamined, individual differences in personality, motivation, and previous trauma history may strongly moderate the psychological outcomes of combat sports participation (35, 67, 68).Additionally, a research focus is needed on concerns regarding the potential for adverse psychological effects (e.g., anxiety, depression, disordered eating behaviors, burnout, and decreased self-esteem), particularly in competitive environments where performance pressure, extreme weight-cutting practices, and aggressive coaching styles are prevalent (69, 70). Indeed, a balanced perspective that considers both benefits and risks is essential for the development of evidence-based recommendations (10, 71).Future DirectionsTo enhance the field, future research should prioritize well-structured longitudinal studies that assess the long-term impact of combat sports participation on physical, psychological, and social health. Standardization of outcome measures, intervention protocols, and participant demographics would facilitate cross-study comparisons and strengthen the reliability of findings (72, 73). Moreover, interdisciplinary collaborations incorporating sports science, psychology, and sociology could provide a more holistic perspective on combat sports' broader implications on practitioners (74).From a policy perspective, to yield valuable insights into combat sports’ practical applications research should investigate their efficacy within public health, educational, and rehabilitation initiatives, particularly for underserved and vulnerable populations (23, 75, 76).Furthermore, while safety remains a primary concern, advancements in protective equipment, training methodologies, education for athletes, coaches, referees and tournament directors, and regulatory frameworks should be continually evaluated to optimize benefits while mitigating risks (40, 41, 58, 77, 78). Ethical considerations, particularly concerning athlete well-being and inclusive participation, should remain a central focus in both research and practical implementation (17, 34, 36).Therefore, key research challenges to be addressed are: 1. Injury risk and safety: a need for injury prevention strategies, especially for concussions and head trauma in striking sports. 2. Psychological wellbeing: risks of stress, anxiety, burnout, and negative self-perception in competitive environments. 3. Inclusion and accessibility: a need for more research on long-term social and psychological benefits for marginalized groups and individuals with disabilities. 4. Methodological limitations: lack of standardized protocols, variability in study designs, and limited reproducibility of findings. 5. Ethical and regulatory issues: concerns over coaching practices, extreme weight-cutting, and athlete wellbeing in high-pressure environments. 6. Technological innovations: more research required on the effectiveness of VR and digital training tools in combat sports. 7. Public health and policy: exploration of combat sports' role in health initiatives, rehabilitation, and educational programs. ConclusionThe evolving discourse on combat sports highlights their potential as a multidimensional tool for well-being promotion. While a substantial body of evidence supports their benefits, a critical examination of methodological limitations, scientific hypotheses, and practical applications is essential for further refine our understanding and enhance their effectiveness. Finally, this article makes a significant contribution not only to the field of martial arts but also to public health and sports psychology. Its interdisciplinary approach calls for scientific collaboration and methodological rigor, reinforces the need for evidence-based policies and can serve as a valuable guide for researchers and policymakers looking to integrate combat sports into strategies for promoting health and social inclusion.

Frontiers in Psychology · 12 citationsread the source →

Charting the Future of Cancer Health Disparities Research: A Position Statement from the American Association for Cancer Research, the American Cancer Society, the American Society of Clinical Oncology, and the National Cancer Institute

The academic field of cancer health disparities was stimulated by the U.S. civil rights movement. Concerns about civil rights led to concerns about equality in health care. The first publications to make the observation that black Americans have higher rates of death as a result of certain cancers compared with white Americans were published by the early 1970s (1, 2). The discipline concerned with these differences was first called “minority health research” and later “special populations health” or “special populations research.” The National Cancer Institute (NCI) defines cancer health disparities as adverse differences in cancer incidence, cancer prevalence, cancer mortality, cancer survivorship, and burden of cancer or related health conditions that exist among specific population groups in the United States (3). However, with greater and renewed acknowledgment of health disparities as rooted within the context of historical and contextual inequities in the United States, many health disparities are considered health inequities (4).The National Cancer Act of 1971 created the Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) program within the NCI. This program began collecting incidence, mortality, and survival data by race in the early 1970s from a number of population-based registries around the United States. The SEER program improved documentation of differences in outcomes and analyzed them through its black–white studies (5). These studies especially demonstrated differences in treatment patterns, with a higher proportion of blacks receiving inappropriate cancer care compared with whites. The discipline grew from a focus on black–white differences to encompass differences in outcomes for a number of racial and ethnic groups, as well as for cohorts defined by age, sex, socioeconomic status (SES), and other social determinants of health. There is now even greater appreciation for disparities among communities, whether rural versus urban or even by state or region. The definition of health outcomes also broadened beyond death rates. The field of health disparities was once simply a description of population differences and a call for cultural competence among health care providers. Today, the field is transdisciplinary, integrating basic science, clinical science, policy, epidemiology, and the social sciences. It involves people trained in diverse nonmedical fields, such as education, economics, sociology, religion, geography, and anthropology. The field is also dynamic. It changes as better and more granular statistics, greater understanding of causes of health disparities, and new challenges to mitigate these underlying causes have emerged. As an example, in the 1970s, the breast cancer death rate for black and white American women was the same. Today, the death rate is substantially higher for blacks compared with whites (6). Policy changes have also created opportunities and challenges. The Affordable Care Act has allowed for Medicaid expansion in each state. Expansion has been adopted by 32 states and the District of Columbia. This will create a new challenge, because poor residents of some states have expanded access to care and residents of other states do not. It is essential that any future policy changes should be carefully designed to increase, rather than decrease, equitable access to care throughout the cancer continuum. Population categorizations also are being redefined. The Asian category includes Korean Americans and Pakistani Americans. The Pacific Islander category, often merged with the Asian category, includes native Hawaiians and Samoans. These populations are incredibly heterogeneous and have dramatically different cancer statistics. In 2015, representatives from four leading cancer organizations, the American Association for Cancer Research, the American Cancer Society, the American Society of Clinical Oncology (ASCO), and the NCI, began to meet to discuss the state of health disparities in the United States. These discussions involved the state of cancer health disparities research and what could be done to move it forward. The discussions were purposely not meant as a comprehensive review of cancer health disparities research. Rather, the meeting and the resulting document aimed to identify issues in health disparities research and make specific recommendations to improve the way disparities research is conducted and disseminated. This statement presents a unified strategy among four of the leading cancer organizations in the United States to promote cooperation among investigators in all areas of the cancer health disparities research community, to ensure that cancer research benefits all populations and patients regardless of race, ethnicity, age, gender identity, sexual orientation, SES, or the communities in which they live. Disparities in outcomes across the cancer continuum have been identified in numerous medically underserved populations, including racial and ethnic minorities and patients of lower SES. In addition to individual social status, social contextual and community factors, such as neighborhood safety, social cohesion, availability of healthy foods, and residential segregation, play an important role in health of both individuals and populations. All of these factors can intersect to generate larger disparities (7, 8).To understand and fully address cancer health disparities, complete, consistent, and accurate collection of patient, community, and structural factors that put people at risk for disparate outcomes is essential. Unfortunately, cancer health disparities research has often been fraught with missing, inaccurate, or overly simplified patient-level data, and most research has failed to consider the community-level factors described above (9–11).For the most part, the manner in which data are collected and integrated in disparities research is suboptimal. The literature is characterized by variable methodology for collection of the factors that put patients and communities at risk for disparate care and outcomes. For example, although race and ethnicity are distinct constructs, they are often conflated such that a person is identified as Hispanic without identification of his or her race. Many studies that investigate cancer care or outcomes according to socioeconomic position have only area-level data on socioeconomic position, whereas others use only composite measures. While valuable in many cases in identifying disparities, such measures fall short in providing the richness of data needed to understand an individual's socioeconomic position. Health literacy and numeracy are rarely assessed in practice and are not available in administrative and research databases. Finally, methods for uniform data collection of information on sexual orientation and gender identity are in their infancy, despite calls for such data collection from the Institute of Medicine, among others (12).Disparities in cancer incidence are pronounced and longstanding. Drivers of these disparities are multifactorial and multilevel, and they include sociodemographic factors, access to health care, risk factor profiles and lifestyle/health habits, cultural perceptions, biologic differences, and genetic predisposition. Disparities in cancers for which single etiologic factors account for a substantial proportion of disease (e.g., human papillomavirus and cervical cancer, or Helicobacter pylori and stomach cancer) can be reasonably understood and explained, but disparities for many of the common etiologically heterogeneous cancers, such as breast, prostate, and colorectal cancers, remain much less well understood. Multilevel approaches are needed to advance knowledge relevant to addressing disparities in cancer incidence rates. One approach is to design and implement observational studies focused on a population in which disparities exist to advance knowledge about etiology and to inform novel prevention strategies. A successful example of such an effort is the African American Breast Cancer Epidemiology and Risk (AMBER) Consortium, a multicenter consortium that has combined data and biospecimens from 7,500 African American patients with breast cancer and 17,000 healthy controls, representing the largest study of breast cancer in African American women in the United States (14). It has yielded a number of insights on multilevel risk factors specific to the major molecular subtypes of breast cancer among African American women (15–17).There is also a need for studies focused on identifying the genetic contributors to cancer health disparities. Recent work has focused on the prioritization of candidate variants relevant to prostate cancer risk within the context of genetic ancestry (based on ancestry informative markers) across those with European, African, Japanese, or Latino ancestry (18). Furthermore, the African Ancestry Prostate Cancer Genome-Wide Association Studies (GWAS) Consortium has reported on susceptibility loci for aggressive prostate cancer specific to men of African ancestry (19).Although some cancer risk factors are well established, the biologic mechanisms through which their impact on cancer risk varies across different populations remain incompletely understood. For example, variations in diet are hypothesized to be the primary driver of the dramatic variations in colorectal cancer incidence rates observed across populations. Recent research has evaluated the impact that different diets have on microbiota composition and function, which in turn affects the production of metabolites that either promote mucosal health or are proinflammatory/neoplastic in the gut. A study that compared Americans with African ancestry (who have a relatively high incidence of colorectal cancer) with rural South Africans (who have a comparatively very low colorectal cancer incidence rate) demonstrated that a typical U.S. diet with high meat and fat intake increases mucosal proliferation rates (a marker of cancer risk) when fed to both populations, whereas typical high-fiber South African diets were associated with low proliferation rates when fed to both groups. This demonstrates that diet can have a profound and fairly immediate impact on the gut microbiome that can either promote or suppress tumors (20).Cancer outcome disparities are well documented for racial and ethnic minorities, and presentation at more advanced stages of cancer explains much of this difference. However, even when controlling for the stage of cancer at diagnosis, the survival disparities persist. What is most concerning is that rather than improving over time, for cancers such as colon cancer, the stage-specific disparities are actually worsening (21). The reason for this growing disparity is not completely clear but involves socioeconomic issues such as education status and the level of insurance and access to medical care. Even in studies that normalize socioeconomic issues (with the limitations cited in the Defining Measures section), disparities that disproportionally affect U.S. minority populations can still be demonstrated for several cancers and may highlight the not-so-well-understood interplay between genetic predisposition and environmental exposure, such as lifestyle and diet, that modifies cancer risk (22, 23). Ultimately, growing postdiagnosis survival disparities are caused by the interplay of system, social, biologic, and environmental factors. Documenting and addressing each of these and their interactions are key to eliminating these disparities. The role of system-level and social determinants in explaining cancer health disparities is best demonstrated by recognizing that disparities vary widely across the United States; some states show almost no disparities, whereas others show striking ones (24). We also know that disparities in treatment of cancer differ and that when treatment differences are accounted for, either through the use of standardized therapies on a clinical trial or through multivariable modeling, cancer-specific survival disparities often disappear. We also have clear examples of successful system-level reform (21, 25, 26). We know, therefore, this is a solvable problem. The key step toward improving care and reducing cancer health disparities requires accurate measurement of meaningful variables, fed back in real time to key stakeholders in the system, followed by meaningful action and continued monitoring to ensure that the action was successful. Determining meaningful measurement across the cancer spectrum may vary by sociocultural factors and require patient and stakeholder input. These system-based practices formed the core of a recent Institute of Medicine report, “Systems Practices for the Care of Socially At-Risk Populations” (27). Systems can be thought of at a macro level, such as state, county, or city governments, all the way down to the individual practice or physician level. Implementation science can inform the best approaches to ensure delivery of high-quality cancer care. Cancers can start as a result of chronic inflammation, and inflammation can modify the behavior of cancer. Biomarkers, such as elevated microsatellite alterations at selected tetranucleotide repeats (EMAST) that can be detected from inflammation-laden cancers, are associated with worse patient outcome and increased metastasis and appear to be more common among African Americans. Microsatellite-unstable (MSI) cancers, which have an overall good prognosis, may be half as common among African Americans compared with whites (28). Both EMAST and MSI have implications for (1) chemotherapeutic response and (2) immunotherapeutic response. In terms of race, these aspects have not been studied. Furthermore, there is much evidence that the microbiome can influence (1) inflammation, (2) response to chemotherapy, and (3) cancer or precancerous lesion formation; also, the microbiome itself can be determined by diet and other factors. These aspects have not been examined with race in mind. Additionally, driver genes may be different within the same type of cancer from patients with different genetic backgrounds, which have implications for correct, definitive therapeutic approaches (29).Most studies that use human specimens to study aspects of cancer and race or ethnicity come from limited individual collections with sparse clinical–epidemiologic information, with rare exception. The exceptions tend to be NCI-funded projects, such as the North Carolina Colon Cancer Study, in which peer review and thoughtful input about how the collection was made with controls, surveys, and linked information to make the collection more meaningful, comprehensive in information, potentially useful for other future studies, and possessed of longevity. However, these types of collections or biorepositories, which include tumor and nontumor specimens, have not been created from diverse samples representative of the U.S. Census population. Current models of health care delivery are highly focused on the use of technology and innovation to improve patient outcomes across disease processes, as demonstrated by the focus on precision medicine in cancer treatment (32–36). Although oncology attempts to embrace this approach, the impact of innovative treatments has been hampered by poor translation of innovation into health care systems and patients from diverse community settings (37, 38). As precision medicine in cancer is accelerated as part of the Beau Biden Cancer Moonshot and other initiatives, the importance of community engagement to ensure that all patients benefit from these advances cannot be overlooked. Cancer health disparities must be taken into consideration in the design, execution, and evaluation of all such programs. Community-engaged research (CER) has been documented as an effective, beneficial method for engaging communities and formulating research that has relevance and impact for both researchers and affected communities (39–42). Involving relevant community stakeholders in research at the planning stages allows for a deeper understanding of community needs, allows researchers to have an iterative method for evaluating research questions in an active realistic milieu, and simultaneously creates a valuable vehicle for active dissemination of the research findings into the communities they are intended to serve. CER offers the potential to improve processes and outcomes in several areas, including care delivery, continuity of care, managing comorbidities, and supportive care (42).Unfortunately, there is a dearth of support for oncology health professionals who choose to work in CER, given its necessity for infrastructure and relationship building, the complex personal interactions with communities and community organizations, and the need to establish long-term benefits to the community after the research project is completed. Importantly, CER requires not only a broad range of expertise across multiple disciplines, but also investigators skilled in a team science approach (43). The benefit of this type of team science has been touted across disciplines; however, its implementation has been limited (44).A lack of workforce diversity has been identified as a barrier to improving access to care for underserved minority groups as well as to advancing research on health disparities (45, 46). Organizations, including ASCO and the American Society of Hematology, have sought to increase workforce diversity in oncology through awards and mentoring programs that expose minorities to in oncology at the medical and In the to Cancer Health Disparities and the American Association for Cancer several programs aimed at the of researchers in cancer and cancer health disparities research. of these types are needed to an oncology workforce that the diversity of the patients it CER not often with most and will require on of the research in both and such an it will remain to create a between CER and the that in cancer are the most important and available to evidence for care and of patients with cancer and individuals at risk for cancer that advanced new approaches from clinical care and diverse oncology the of clinical is to evidence that is both and future must include research questions that consider the multifactorial and multilevel that populations with the cancer This to advance disparities research within the cancer clinical within a new of for in cancer clinical and common for providing trial information have been to for rural patients and patients with lower SES, limited low health and The high and of chronic and of risk factors for chronic such as and must inform to these populations fully in cancer As an example, African Americans a burden of the that from studies, and it is to which could be reasonably as or could be or within the study In addition to those from cancer prevention and treatment also has that populations often are later in the and do not support and rates are key that influence the outcome of clinical cancer studies, those in which minorities have higher disease such as breast, prostate, and cancers In and treatment and rates lower rates exist for those patients who from to and Many such as and to the However, community engagement is to address the and challenges that the clinical CER has been demonstrated to promote building, and the and dissemination of information needed for and long-term As an example, the evaluated the of community health to promote and in and rural populations and that community health can be trained to as research and can be for of and cancer clinical trial and require an of often to be collected at multiple time thought should be given to how best to the of and the study (e.g., and needed to support collection and of specimens from and that to field of cancer health disparities has into a complex science and an field of cancer research. Unfortunately, the to this research has not been and the infrastructure needed to it to the level, can be is The of this which has been by from these four organizations, is to the of advances in this is that this statement will be by both and organizations to inform specific made to improve cancer health disparities eliminating identified disparities in cancer incidence, of care, and recommendations for action have a new in cancer health disparities that has the potential to benefit from across and the in cancer incidence and disparities that affects minorities and the medically it is that in this of cancer research when are being there will be opportunities to this new knowledge to all populations, and cancer health disparities for and future has in a or role for and and as a of the for has research from and has other from the has in a or role for and has research his from and and has and from and has from has in a or role for the and and has research from or other in and has from and has and from for both and an immediate or other in and and has research her from potential of were by the other and and of and of for all aspects of the the of and the for their of this to and

Cancer Research · 84 citationsread the source →

Pathophysiology of the risk factors associated with osteoporosis and their correlation to the T-score value in patients with osteopenia and osteoporosis in the United Arab Emirates

INTRODUCTION Osteoporosis is a bone disorder, characterized by loss of bone strength because of an imbalance between the bone resorption and the mechanisms of bone formation, leading to increased fragility and fractures. Pathophysiological mechanisms underlying this disorder include an inadequate formation response during the remodeling process of bone formation, which is an essential factor in osteoporosis pathogenesis. This inadequacy is due to the activation of large numbers of osteoclasts as a response to initiation of hematopoietic precursor cells with failure of normal interaction with the osteoblastic lineage. This will lead to excessive bone resorption that may result in complete loss of trabecular structure and loss of template for new bone formation. The time required for osteoblastic replacement is longer than the resorption phase of bone remodeling by osteoclasts. Therefore, any increase in bone remodeling will lead to damaged architecture and loss of bone mass.[1] Recently, it has been estimated that more than 200 million people worldwide have osteoporosis. On the basis of a statistics from the International Osteoporosis Foundation in 2017, one in five men and one in three women over the age of 50 years will experience fractures during their lifetime because of osteoporosis. Furthermore, it has been found that an osteoporotic fracture occurs every 3s, with the most common fractures occurring at the hip, spine, and wrist.[23] Osteoporotic fractures may be the first manifestation of the disease, which is why it is called a silent disease. Risk factors of osteoporosis, decreased bone mineral density (BMD), and increased fragility fractures may be modifiable or non-modifiable. Among the modifiable factors are low body mass index (BMI), vitamin D deficiency, low calcium intake, excessive caffeine and alcohol consumption, smoking, sedentary life and low physical activity, endocrine disorders (such as estrogen deficiency and insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus or hyperparathyroidism), some drugs (such as corticosteroids), and previous history of fragility fractures. The non-modifiable factors include female gender, family history, race, and early menopause.[45] According to the World Health Organization (WHO) diagnostic criteria, osteoporosis is diagnosed by BMD at the hip or spine, which is below the young normal mean reference population by 2.5 standard deviations (SDs) or more. This is called the T-score, and osteopenia is diagnosed by BMD less than or equal to 1 SD.[6] The guidelines for osteoporosis screening vary greatly in various publications. In general, most organizations recommend that all adults older than 50 years of age with a history of fracture must receive BMD screening.[7] Dual-energy X-ray absorptiometry (DXA) at the hip or spine is the best test for measuring central BMD. An association is present between the T-score values in DXA in patients with osteoporosis or osteopenia and the risk of fractures. A fracture risk assessment tool (FRAX) was designed. It is estimated that for every 1 SD decline in spine BMD, the risk of having a spine fracture increases 2.3 times and the risk of having a hip fracture increases 2.6 times.[89] As the most common bone disease in humans, the prevalence of osteoporosis is steadily increasing due to a growing elderly population, and thus represents a major public health concern with reduced bone strength and a higher risk of fractures.[68] The prevalence of osteoporosis is steadily escalating due to increased life expectancy as a result of developed health services. According to the 2016 WHO report, in the United Arab Emirates (UAE), life expectancy at birth for men was 76 years and for women it was 79 years.[10] The UAE population projection showed that in 2011, 7% of the population were 50 years of age or over and less than 1% were 70 years of age or over. By 2050, it is estimated that 12% of the population will be 50 years or over and 2% will be 70 years or over.[11] MATERIALS AND METHODS Study design The study was performed in accordance with the International Conference on Harmonisation Good Clinical Practice guidelines. Ethical approval number UG-H-18-11-7-10 was obtained from the Research Ethics Committee of the college. The study was conducted on a population sample of national and nonnational people in the UAE. Both men and women were recruited in the study. Data were collected from the patients in six governmental and private hospitals. Research tools A total of 200 male and female participants between the age of 25 and 80 years were recruited in the study. Eighty percent of the sample were women and 20% were men. After obtaining the required consent, each participant was asked to fill a structured questionnaire consisting of 25 questions, which was used as the primary tool for data collection. The questions were formulated both in Arabic and English, it required 3–4min to be completed. BMD of the participants was assessed in the International Radiology Centre and correlated with their data in the questionnaires. DXA scan was used for the measurement of BMD. Data collection and data analysis After ensuring strict confidentiality, data were collected between March 20, 2016 and May 20, 2016. The following information was obtained: Demographic data (gender, age, race, BMI, and occupation) Family history of osteoporosis or osteoporotic fractures Social history and lifestyle, physical activity, and exposure to the sun Dietary habits such as calcium, caffeine, and soft drinks intake Medical history of diseases and medicines. For female participants, number of pregnancies, lactation, and age at menopause were included The following criteria were used to evaluate osteoporosis: Normal BMD: if T-score between +2.5 and –1 Osteopenia: if T-score between –1 and –2.5 Osteoporosis: if T-score below –2.5 The filled questionnaires were coded and data were analyzed statistically using the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS) software (version 24; IBM Corporation, Newyork, USA). Spearman’s correlation test was carried out to assess the association between different variables in the study. A P value of less than 0.05 was considered significant. RESULTS Sociodemographic data The sociodemographic background of the study participants is listed in Table 1. A total of 200 participants were included in the study. The control group and the osteoporotic group consisted of 100 participants each, 20% of them were men, whereas 80% of the respondents were women. Table 1: Background demographic data of the respondentsBody mass index The patients with osteoporosis have significantly lower BMI than the control group (P < 0.05). Results showed that 72% of them have a BMI less than 25 kg/m2 (P < 0.05) [Table 2] [Figure 1].Table 2: Body mass index of the respondentsFigure 1: Body mass index (kg/m2) of the respondentsSmoking behavior Regarding smoking behavior, a significant value was evident between smoking and osteoporosis (P < 0.01) as 54% of the patients with osteoporosis were current smokers, whereas 72% of the controls had never smoked before [Table 3] [Figure 2].Table 3: Smoking behavior and intake of milk, coffee, and soft drinks by the respondentsFigure 2: Intake of milk and caffeine and smoking behavior by the respondentsDietary calcium intake The intake of milk and dairy products by the participants was used to assess the dietary calcium intake. The patients with osteoporosis have a significant low calcium intake (P < 0.01), whereas non-osteoporotic control significantly consume more milk and dairy products (P < 0.01). A positive correlation was found between the intake of milk and dairy products and the T-score value of the participants (P < 0.05) [Table 3] [Figures 2 and 3].Figure 3: Correlation between milk intake and T-score in patients with osteoporosisCaffeine consumption Caffeine intake was evaluated in this study by the amount of coffee, tea, or soft drinks consumed by the participants each day. The results showed that the patients with osteoporosis significantly consume more caffeine (P < 0.01). A negative correlation is present between the amount of caffeine intake and T-score value of the participants (P < 0.05) [Table 3] [Figures 2, 4, and 5].Figure 4: Correlation between tea/coffee intake and T-score in patients with osteoporosisFigure 5: Correlation between soft drinks intake and T-score in patients with osteoporosisExercise behavior and exposure to the sun Results showed a significant positive correlation between the duration of exercise and the T-score value of the participants (P < 0.05) [Table 4] [Figure 6].Table 4: Exercise behavior and exposure to sun of the respondentsFigure 6: Correlation between exercise duration and T-score in patients with osteoporosisRegarding the exposure to the sun, the results showed that 96% of the patients with osteoporosis were exposed to the sun for less than 15min, three to four times a week or not exposed at all, whereas most of the normal controls (72%) exposed their bodies to the sun for 16–30min/day, three to four times a week [Table 4] [Figure 7].Figure 7: Sun exposure behavior of the respondentsDiseases and medications Results of the study revealed that 46% of the patients with osteoporosis were diabetic, 42% of them were treated by antidiabetics, 18% had arthritis and 38% had been treated previously by corticosteroids [Table 5].Table 5: Distribution of patients with osteoporosis by their diseases and medicationsNumber of pregnancies and breastfeeding Female participants constituted 80% of the study sample, 75% of the females with osteoporosis were menopausal, 75% of them had three or more pregnancies, and 82.5% of them breastfed their children, whereas these values for the control group participants are 30%, 28%, and 33%, respectively. Results showed a significant positive correlation between the age at menopause and the T-score value of females with osteoporosis (P < 0.05) [Table 6] [Figure 8]. The distribution of patients according to the joint affected by Osteoporosis or Osteopenia is shown in [Figure 9] and [Table 7].Table 6: Distribution of female patients with osteoporosis by number of pregnancies and breastfeedingFigure 8: Correlation between age at menopause and T-score in female patients with osteoporosisFigure 9: Distribution of patients having osteopenia or osteoporosis in wrists, hips, or spineTable 7: Distribution of patients having osteoporosis and/or osteopenia in hips, wrists, and spineDISCUSSION To maintain normal bone structure, a remodeling process that consists of osteoclasts, removing old bone, and osteoblasts, synthesizing new bone, occurs. Hematopoietic progenitors produce osteoclasts, whereas mesenchymal stem cells called marrow stromal fibroblasts produce osteoblasts. This process is controlled by certain circulating hormones, growth factors, and locally produced cytokines through their effects on apoptosis of osteoblasts and osteoclasts. Estrogen deficiency or glucocorticoid excess leads to bone loss because of changes in the production of bone cells. This is caused by the prolongation of the life span of osteoclasts and the shortening of the life span of osteoblasts. On the contrary, drugs that aim to treat or prevent osteoporosis prevent apoptosis of osteoblasts and/or stimulate the apoptosis of osteoclasts.[12] The pathogenesis of osteoporosis is the consequence of various hormonal, genetic, dietary, lifestyle, and physical factors. Genetic factors mainly affect the BMD and bone formation, whereas low levels of estrogen increase parathyroid hormone, and local cytokines are mainly responsible for bone remodeling imbalance.[13] Age and gender In this study, 76% of the patients with osteoporosis were women at or above 50 years of age. Osteoporosis is usually considered a disease of the elderly with low BMD. In a recent study, most of the patients with osteoporosis were in the age groups of 45–49 and 50–54 years.[14] Previous studies showed that women were at an increased risk of developing osteoporosis because of their faulty behavior of physical inactivity, sun-avoidance behavior, low intake of dairy products, and poor diets.[151617] Body mass index The results of this study showed a significant number of patients of osteoporosis with BMI <25 kg/m2, where P < 0.05. Women that have low BMI are at a higher risk of developing osteoporosis. It is reported that one unit change in BMI has a larger effect on the risk of developing osteoporosis than most other modifiable risk factors. To help reduce the risk of osteoporosis, patients should be advised to maintain a weight within the normal range.[1516] The risk of osteoporotic fractures increases in adults who have low BMI of less than 20 kg/m2.[18] On the contrary, patients who are obese (BMI >30 kg/m2) are also at a high risk of developing osteoporosis and fractures because of the risk of repeated falls and the weakness of the skeletal muscles due to loss of its mass as a result of aging.[19] Exercise and physical activity The results of this study showed a significant correlation between the exercise time and the T-score value. Previous studies concluded that physical activity and exercises stimulate skeletal growth and bone strength.[45] Estrogen Estrogen deficiency has a critical effect on the pathogenesis of osteoporosis. The results of this study showed a significant positive correlation between the age at menopause and the T-score value of the female patients. Estrogen has a crucial role in bone formation and physiology. It stimulates the production of T cell cytokines, affects the osteoblastic cell by altering its production of receptor activator of nuclear factor-Kappa B ligand (RANKL) or Osteoprotegerin (OPG), inhibits the differentiation of osteoclasts by direct action, and stimulates the formation of bone performed by osteoblasts and osteocytes, which allows them to enhance their ability to respond to mechanical forces.[2021] Estrogen produces its effect through a specific cell surface receptor called the estrogen receptor alpha (ERα). This receptor binds and then transports estrogen into the nucleus of the cell where certain genes are then activated by the receptor–hormone complex. ERα receptors and estrogen receptor–related receptor alpha (ERRα) are found on the surface of osteoblasts. ERRα may play a supporting role in the regulation of bone cells.[22] Previous studies also suggest that sex hormone–binding globulin may play a significant role in regulating bone cells as well because it facilitates entry of estrogen into cells.[23] Because of the natural drop of estrogen level in postmenopausal women, they are at the highest risk of developing osteoporosis. A previous study showed that it is an increase in bone resorption that might be the driving force for bone loss during estrogen deficiency in postmenopausal women not impaired bone formation as was previously thought.[1] However, other studies indicated that both markers of bone resorption and formation also increased, leading to accelerated bone remodeling at menopause.[2425] Calcium intake and vitamin D Calcium and vitamin D are two pivotal contributors of bone formation and mineralization. The results of this study showed that the patients with osteoporosis have a significant low calcium intake, whereas controls significantly consume more milk and dairy products (P < 0.01). This significant result showed the importance of calcium intake. Results also established a positive correlation between calcium intake and the T-score value of the participants. Vitamin D plays an important role in maintaining calcium homeostasis and bone integrity as it is essential for intestinal calcium absorption.[26] It is estimated that over one billion people around the world have vitamin D deficiency.[2728] Sun exposure is considered as the source of vitamin D, the present results showed a significant value (P < 0.01) as 74% of the patients with osteoporosis exposed their bodies to the sun for 5min or less, three to four times per week, whereas 72% of controls exposed their bodies to the sun for 15–30min, 3 to 4 times a week. A previous study conducted in the UAE showed that 58.2% of the UAE nationals were vitamin D deficient compared to 45% of the patients from other nationalities.[29] In spite of living in sunny areas, such as UAE, Saudi Arabia, and India, young populations have a high prevalence of vitamin D deficiency because of insufficient knowledge and practice of vitamin D and its health implications.[3031] Decreased blood calcium level will lead to secondary hyperparathyroidism. This decrease may result from impaired intestinal calcium absorption due to vitamin D deficiency, aging, or other diseases. Calcitriol, the active form of vitamin D, stimulates the intestinal absorption of calcium and phosphorus. It has an inhibitory effect on the synthesis of parathyroid hormone as well. Therefore, calcitriol deficiency will lead to secondary hyperparathyroidism as well.[32] There is a clear evidence that the risk of having an osteoporotic fracture increases when vitamin D levels are below 50 nmol.[3334] However, a recent study showed that pathological macrophages produced by vitamin D receptor signaling play an important role in the development of myelofibrosis.[35] Smoking The results of this study showed that nicotine has a significant effect on the incidence of osteoporosis (P < 0.01). Smoking has been identified as a modifiable risk factor for low BMD and increased osteoporotic fracture risk.[3637] Smoking behavior should be evaluated when assessing the fracture risk and FRAX.[1638] The role of smoking in decreasing BMD is complicated; smoking is shown to be associated with other risk factors for osteoporosis such as decreased physical activity, low BMI, and poor diet.[38] Nicotine has both direct and indirect effects on BMD. The direct effect is on bone cell proliferation and is described to be biphasic, small doses have a stimulatory effect, whereas toxic large doses have an antiproliferative effect on the proliferation of osteoblasts.[39] This effect on osteoblasts is receptor mediated by the nicotinic acetylcholine receptors, where nicotine in low doses upregulates gene expression of alkaline phosphatase, type 1 collagen, and osteocalcin.[40] Nicotine produces an increased level of tumor necrosis factor α (TNFα) secretion that reduces bone formation by osteoblasts and increases bone resorption by osteoclasts. TNFα has a powerful osteoclastogenic effect through its stimulating effect on RANKL production and by intensifying osteoclasts production.[41] It is strongly supported that RANK/RANKL/OPG systems have a role in regulating bone resorption and the formation of osteoclasts.[42] The main predisposing factor for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) has been found to be smoking. The most important factor in managing COPD continues to be the termination of smoking.[43] It has been shown in numerous studies that smokers with COPD have elevated levels of pro-inflammatory cytokines in the form of interleukin-6. In addition, TNFα levels are much higher in COPD smokers than in asymptomatic smokers. This indicates that COPD affects local and systemic inflammatory responses, which in turn affects bone remodeling.[4445] Nicotine has an indirect effect on BMD, which is caused by releasing calcitropic hormones and glucocorticoids, which leads to an increase in bone resorption.[43] Furthermore, smoking has been linked to an increase in the level of cortisol[4446] as well as a decrease in the level of estradiol.[47] Nicotine also harms intestinal calcium absorption, which might lessen the effectiveness of dietary calcium supplements.[48] Also, toxic carcinogenic metabolites of nicotine have also been found to increase osteoclast formation in rats.[49] Moreover, one hip fracture in eight postmenopausal women with osteoporosis is attributable to smoking. This correlation could not be explained by early menopause, low BMI, lower levels of exercise, or by the actions of nicotine on estrogen. This indicates that there is an independent negative effect of nicotine on BMD, which means that smokers lose bone at a faster rate than nonsmokers.[50] CONCLUSION Prevalence of osteoporosis is high in the UAE and is expected to grow due to increased life expectancy and faulty lifestyle of inadequate dietary habits, sun exposure, exercise behavior, and smoking. More intervention should be directed toward changing the modifiable risk factors in the patients with osteoporosis, and more studies should be directed toward osteoporosis in the UAE. Limitations of the study To make the study a polycentric research, it would require greater number of participants from all the emirates of the UAE. Financial support and sponsorship This work is self-funded by the authors. Conflicts of interest There are no conflicts of interest.

Journal of Pharmacy And Bioallied Sciences · 11 citationsread the source →

Global, regional, and national burden of stroke and its risk factors, 1990-2019: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019.

Background: Regularly updated data on stroke and its pathological types, including data on their incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability, risk factors, and epidemiological trends, are important for evidence-based stroke care planning and resource allocation. The Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (GBD) aims to provide a standardised and comprehensive measurement of these metrics at global, regional, and national levels. Methods: We applied GBD 2019 analytical tools to calculate stroke incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability-adjusted life-years (DALYs), and the population attributable fraction (PAF) of DALYs (with corresponding 95% uncertainty intervals [UIs]) associated with 19 risk factors, for 204 countries and territories from 1990 to 2019. These estimates were provided for ischaemic stroke, intracerebral haemorrhage, subarachnoid haemorrhage, and all strokes combined, and stratified by sex, age group, and World Bank country income level. Findings: In 2019, there were 12·2 million (95% UI 11·0-13·6) incident cases of stroke, 101 million (93·2-111) prevalent cases of stroke, 143 million (133-153) DALYs due to stroke, and 6·55 million (6·00-7·02) deaths from stroke. Globally, stroke remained the second-leading cause of death (11·6% [10·8-12·2] of total deaths) and the third-leading cause of death and disability combined (5·7% [5·1-6·2] of total DALYs) in 2019. From 1990 to 2019, the absolute number of incident strokes increased by 70·0% (67·0-73·0), prevalent strokes increased by 85·0% (83·0-88·0), deaths from stroke increased by 43·0% (31·0-55·0), and DALYs due to stroke increased by 32·0% (22·0-42·0). During the same period, age-standardised rates of stroke incidence decreased by 17·0% (15·0-18·0), mortality decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0), prevalence decreased by 6·0% (5·0-7·0), and DALYs decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0). However, among people younger than 70 years, prevalence rates increased by 22·0% (21·0-24·0) and incidence rates increased by 15·0% (12·0-18·0). In 2019, the age-standardised stroke-related mortality rate was 3·6 (3·5-3·8) times higher in the World Bank low-income group than in the World Bank high-income group, and the age-standardised stroke-related DALY rate was 3·7 (3·5-3·9) times higher in the low-income group than the high-income group. Ischaemic stroke constituted 62·4% of all incident strokes in 2019 (7·63 million [6·57-8·96]), while intracerebral haemorrhage constituted 27·9% (3·41 million [2·97-3·91]) and subarachnoid haemorrhage constituted 9·7% (1·18 million [1·01-1·39]). In 2019, the five leading risk factors for stroke were high systolic blood pressure (contributing to 79·6 million [67·7-90·8] DALYs or 55·5% [48·2-62·0] of total stroke DALYs), high body-mass index (34·9 million [22·3-48·6] DALYs or 24·3% [15·7-33·2]), high fasting plasma glucose (28·9 million [19·8-41·5] DALYs or 20·2% [13·8-29·1]), ambient particulate matter pollution (28·7 million [23·4-33·4] DALYs or 20·1% [16·6-23·0]), and smoking (25·3 million [22·6-28·2] DALYs or 17·6% [16·4-19·0]). Interpretation: The annual number of strokes and deaths due to stroke increased substantially from 1990 to 2019, despite substantial reductions in age-standardised rates, particularly among people older than 70 years. The highest age-standardised stroke-related mortality and DALY rates were in the World Bank low-income group. The fastest-growing risk factor for stroke between 1990 and 2019 was high body-mass index. Without urgent implementation of effective primary prevention strategies, the stroke burden will probably continue to grow across the world, particularly in low-income countries. Funding: Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation.

The Lancet. Neurology · 5441 citationsread the source →

Predictors of treatment resistance in patients with schizophrenia: a population-based cohort study.

Background: Identification of patients at high risk of treatment-resistant schizophrenia at the time of schizophrenia diagnosis would be of great clinical benefit in minimising the delay to clozapine treatment in patients unlikely to respond to non-clozapine antipsychotics. However, little is known about predictors of treatment resistance in this patient population. We used a treatment-based proxy for treatment-resistant schizophrenia to identify candidate predictors of treatment resistance at first hospital contact with a schizophrenia diagnosis. Methods: In this population-based cohort study, we obtained Danish national registry data for all adult patients (≥18 years) with incident schizophrenia diagnosed between Jan 1, 1996, and Dec 31, 2006, and followed up until Dec 31, 2010. Our main proxy definition of treatment-resistant schizophrenia was the earliest instance of either clozapine initiation or hospital admission for schizophrenia after having had two periods of different antipsychotic monotherapy. We did multivariable Cox proportional hazards regression analysis to estimate the association between baseline candidate predictors and treatment resistance. Findings: 8624 patients fulfilled the criteria for inclusion. In multivariable complete-case analyses, 1703 (21%) of 8044 patients fulfilled the main proxy definition of treatment-resistant schizophrenia during a median follow-up of 9·1 years (IQR 6·3-11·9). Younger age (hazard ratio 0·96 [95% CI 0·95-0·97]), living in a less urban area (provincial 1·38 [1·23-1·56], rural 1·44 [1·25-1·65]), primary education level (0·88 [0·79-0·98]), more than 30 bed-days in psychiatric hospital in the year before first schizophrenia diagnosis (1·54 [1·35-1·75]), inpatient at first schizophrenia diagnosis (2·07 [1·87-2·29]), paranoid subtype (1·24 [1·13-1·37]), comorbid personality disorder (1·24 [1·11-1·39]), psychotropic drug use (antipsychotics 1·51 [1·35-1·69], antidepressants 1·15 [1·03-1·29], and benzodiazepines 1·22 [1·10-1·37]), and previous suicide attempt (1·21 [1·07-1·39]) were all significantly associated with treatment-resistant schizophrenia. Interpretation: Our study identifies several candidate predictors that could potentially be included in future prediction models for treatment-resistant schizophrenia. Notably, established risk factors for schizophrenia did not predict treatment resistance, suggesting that treatment-resistant disease might be a distinct subtype of schizophrenia and not merely a more severe form. Funding: European Community's Seventh Framework Programme.

The lancet. Psychiatry · 127 citationsread the source →

Psychosexual health in gynecological cancer

The literature surrounding psychosexual health and cancer patients has primarily considered the functional aspects of the disease and its treatment at the major expense of the emotional sequelae. Sexual health is defined by WHO as: "a state of physical, emotional, mental, and social well-being in relation to sexuality; it is not merely the absence of disease, dysfunction or infirmity. Sexual health requires a positive and respectful approach to sexuality and sexual relationships, as well as the possibility of having pleasurable and safe sexual experiences, free of coercion, discrimination and violence" [1]. A principle goal of WHO is to assist its member states in achieving the highest attainable standard of health care for all, including sexual and reproductive health [2]. Global statistics show that the world's female population is carrying an overwhelming burden of need in this area. Over 200 million women cannot access modern contraception, and millions of women suffer rape, domestic violence, and sexual abuse, not only in the context of wars and criminal activities, but also in their own homes [2]. Although the physical sequelae of these disasters can be treated, such as treatment for sexually transmitted infections, the emotional impact can frequently be hidden, ignored, or may not reveal its impact until many years after the event. Any illness or traumatic life event, past or present, can lead to sexual problems in the lifetime of a woman, and gynecological cancer is no exception. It is the root cause or trigger for sexual difficulties in at least 50% of women affected [3]. In 2012, the estimated number of women living with gynecological cancers was over three million, which means that potentially 1.5 million gynecological cancer survivors could be affected by an associated sexual difficulty [4]. Within the context of gynecological cancer, many of these problems can be alleviated if recognized and acknowledged early in the cancer journey, therefore contributing dramatic improvements to a woman's overall well-being. It is now estimated that half of the population of either sex will develop cancer at some time in their life. Globally, 40% − 45% of women will have a sexual problem at some stage, with the prevalence increasing with age [5]. Between 10% and 90% of women with any cancer will have sexual problems [6] and over 50% of women with gynecological cancer will have either temporary or persistent sexual difficulties [3]. As diagnosis and treatments improve, the number of women surviving cancer will increase, and survivorship issues including quality of life have become increasingly important. Sexuality is a key component of most subjective measurable quality of life indicators [7]. Sexual function and enjoyment are important components of survivorship and should not be ignored. The most common sexual problems can be divided into two groups: problems of function and/or problems of desire. There is, however, a complex interplay of organic disorders with emotional and psychosocial issues, and these divisions are merely artificial. Formal definitions of female sexual dysfunction have been adopted, including the US classifications in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders [8], although having a sexual difficulty does not constitute having a mental health disorder. Basson et al. [9] published a useful classification of the problems. Such classifications are useful for research purposes, but may often be less helpful when treating women. The predominant functional female sexual problem is pain on sexual intercourse, or dyspareunia. Deep dyspareunia describes intracoital pelvic pain, and superficial dyspareunia is pain on vaginal entry. Either could signify organic disease, and should be appropriately investigated. If no pathology is demonstrated, and the pain persists, then an emotional cause must be considered and pursued. Vaginismus, or involuntary spasm of the pubococcygeal and related musculature, can prevent sexual intercourse taking place. Good history taking can clarify whether there has been any penetration of the vagina, not only penile, but by fingers, sex toys, or tampons. If not, this is diagnostic of primary vaginismus, and apart from close inspection of the vulva and offer of gentle digital vaginal examination to determine the extent of the vaginismus, no further clinical investigation is warranted. Women with gynecological cancer are more likely to have secondary vaginismus caused by pain experienced from the disease or its treatment, and fear of the pain occurring during sex [10]. Loss of libido or loss of sexual interest on the other hand is a problem of desire. There are no physiological markers for loss of desire when its origins are psychogenic, with psychosocial contributions, past and present relationships, traumas, and emotional factors all inhibiting the woman's wish to be sexual. One of the key ways to determine the origins of the sexual difficulty is to ask about the sexual and emotional relationship between the woman and her partner before the cancer diagnosis. It should not be assumed that problems are all due to the cancer, as long-standing relationship problems may be disclosed, and need to be incorporated into any counselling. The exception to this is the woman who suddenly becomes menopausal following cancer treatment, who had no problems with sex or desire prior to her cancer therapy. Appropriate standard therapy for her menopausal symptoms should be considered; however, the impact of a cancer diagnosis will be life changing, and drug treatment of hormonal deprivation symptoms may not be sufficient without some psychological or counselling support, or may be contraindicated as in the case of breast and endometrial cancer [11]. A diagnosis of gynecological cancer is overwhelming. While the instinctive professional response from clinicians is to ensure long-term survival, sexual issues are important for quality of life and should be considered in the decision-making process [12]. Sexual dysfunction is one of the most common and distressing consequences of cancer treatment [13]. Many treatments are shown to have sexual impacts, both positive and negative, and should be discussed fully with the woman pre-treatment so that she can make an autonomous decision about her care. Early offer of discussion of sexual issues in the cancer journey can lead to better sexual outcomes. Cervical cancer is the most common gynecological cancer worldwide. Cervical cancer survivors are at risk of sexual pain disorders, no matter which modality of treatment is used. A small study of patients who underwent radical vaginal trachelectomy for early stage cervical cancer showed sexual dysfunction, including loss of libido, for up to one year following treatment; however, by 12 months, sexual activity had reached that of healthy women [14]. Following radical hysterectomy for locally advanced cervical cancer, there was no significant difference in sexual activity and enjoyment between women with benign or malignant disease; however, the cancer group had worse problems than healthy controls with body image and vaginal functioning [15]. In women with advanced cervical cancer given chemoradiotherapy, pain during intercourse was in fact reduced after treatment [16]. This may have been a result of the resolution of bleeding, discharge, and pelvic pain. However, the anxiety surrounding cancer remains for many women. Women surviving up to 15 years following cervical cancer treatment showed poorer quality of life than healthy controls, and those who had received radiotherapy were significantly more affected by sexual dysfunction than those who had surgery alone [17]. Despite this however, orgasm may be unimpaired following radiation [18]. Many additional needs were expressed by women with cervical cancer; however, sexuality and intimacy came to the fore as a predominant issue for survivorship [19]. It has been known for some time that the physical and emotional impact of ovarian cancer can be devastating, leading to sexual as well as global quality of life issues [20]. One study has shown a prevalence of 63% for sexual difficulties among women with a diagnosis of ovarian cancer [3]. The effects of chemotherapy and surgery, combined with the anxiety about survival can have a dramatic negative effect on the woman's libido, and even women who undertake risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy can suffer sexual dysfunction [21]. Many of these women are totally unprepared for the devastating effects of sudden menopause, with hot flushes, vaginal dryness, and loss of libido replacing a previously healthy sex life. This could be helped by more realistic counselling before the procedure, and increased postoperative emotional support. One study has shown that women who had surgery for endometrial cancer had no differences in their own sexual experience postoperatively, but compared with healthy controls, they had more sexual difficulties overall [22]. Women with Lynch syndrome who opt for preventive surgery tend to be happy overall with the surgery, but are often unprepared for the physical adverse effects of menopause [23]. In contrast, Moldovan et al. [24] has reported that, despite sometimes debilitating menopausal symptoms, there were no significant sexual difficulties associated with the procedure. Vulvectomy is a common treatment for vulvar malignancy. This is increasingly affecting younger women, who are HIV positive. Women with vulvar cancer can have many years of difficulties with sex due to often distressing vulvar symptoms and bleeding. Following treatment they still suffer severe dyspareunia and body image distortion due to the effects of treatment. Although a recent study showed no differences in psychosocial and sexual functioning before and after vulvectomy, it was acknowledged that women with vulvar malignancy have a high risk for sexual problems compared with healthy controls [25]. Factors associated with postoperative sexual difficulties are increased age, poor overall physical and mental health well-being, and extent of the surgical excision [25]. This often elderly group of patients is usually neglected from the psychosexual point of view. The majority of the literature related to sexuality and cancer stems from high-resource countries. Although most of these studies encompass all women, there is a lack of good published evidence on the treatment of the sexual sequelae of cancer in relation to ethnic minority groups, within a majority culture [26]. Furthermore, data from low- and middle-income countries are scant. Much of the literature focuses on sexual distress and activity in relation to HIV and AIDS which, of course, is a global priority; however, this focus on infection transmission should not take away from the emotional needs of the woman who suffers from gynecological cancer. Sexuality research around the globe must be perceived and researched in terms of cultural, spiritual, ethnic, and religious contexts. Sexual problems in women with gynecological cancer may be associated with adverse effects of surgical, hormonal, and chemical treatments, as well as by the cancer itself. Fortunately, emotional, sexual, and quality of life outcomes improve as less morbid, more minimally invasive surgical treatments for gynecological cancers develop [12]. Chemotherapy-induced ovarian failure in cancer patients is associated with all the possible symptoms of a sudden menopause, combined with the emotional impact not only of the cancer, but loss of physical well-being and fertility all at the same time. Vaginal dryness can be a major problem to those women who wish to have sex [27], and appropriate vaginal moisturizers and lubricants can help. The issue of vaginal estrogen is still debated, but should be discussed with the patient, weighing up the risk − benefit ratio for each individual. Vaginal estrogen will, in most cases, alleviate the dryness, but there may be concerns about using hormones, especially in relation to breast cancer where the evidence is unclear. The scientific data, however, support the safety of low dose vaginal estrogen therapy [28]. It is not well understood that following a few weeks of vaginal estrogen, the vagina thickens and cornifies and estrogen is not absorbed as a result. Newer treatments such as selective estrogen receptor modulators have been used in place of vaginal estrogen in women without cancer [29], and may prove good alternatives in the future [30]. There are non-hormonal vaginal moisturizers and lubricants to make sexual intercourse more comfortable. Unfortunately, some commercial sexual lubricants can be hyperosmolar and could cause epithelial disruption, facilitating HIV transmission [31]. Simple lubricants such as olive oil or liquid glycerin have been used successfully in interventions to alleviate pain on intercourse due to vaginal dryness, combining their use with physiotherapy and psychosexual counselling. Treatments with pelvic external beam radiotherapy and/or with brachytherapy may cause vaginal shortening, tightening, and lack of pliability. The use of vaginal dilators to overcome these complications is widespread, despite lack of conclusive evidence, either for or against, either with or without a coating of estrogen cream [32]. Unsurprisingly, the intrusion of inserting a plastic (or sometimes glass) tube into a tender vagina after treatment is a task that may carry a deep psychological and emotional impact [33], and will have resultant poor compliance. Radiation oncologists agree that information about dilator use should be given before treatment [34], and that sufficient patient information and support are essential to improve compliance. Sensitivity to emotions and women's views and personal values in relation to sexuality are essential supports to encouraging dilator use [35]. Any of the above problems cannot fail to have an emotional impact on the woman and on her partner. Many sexual difficulties are automatically blamed on the organic disruption caused by cancer and its treatments; however, once any clearly indicated treatments have been given, in a sizable proportion of cases, the sexual difficulty will remain unresolved. Many sexual difficulties are psychogenic, and no amount of skilled clinical treatments will help if not linked closely to appropriate counselling, psychological, or psychosexual therapy. This form of intervention will enable the woman to expose and reflect on her sexual difficulties, in the context of her life and relationship not only since the cancer, but beforehand. This is often a time when past problems, such as childhood abuse, or problems with her current partner will surface. Some partners are disgusted by the physical impacts of cancer, and the relationship will suffer. On the other hand, some partners become more supportive and the cancer leads to stronger relationships [36]. Classic psychosexual therapy, using brief, focused psychotherapeutic techniques is the mainstay of treatment. It can be used with an individual or a couple, of any sexual orientation or cultural or religious background. This is a way of listening reflectively to the patient, so that they can gain their own insights into their sexual problem. The issue of genital examination is considered if relevant, as it enables the woman to connect with her genital area, and may trigger deep-seated thoughts or anxieties that the woman had blocked emotionally. This, of course, is a technique used only by clinicians who are qualified to examine the patient [37]. Clinical psychologists and counsellors trained in psychosexual work also treat women with sexual problems. Globally, because the availability of trained personnel differs, many simple innovative treatment interventions have been tried. A brief intervention using a well-accepted treatment, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), combined with sexual health education had positive results on patients who had risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy [21]. Psychosexual interventions work [38], and like all psychodynamic interventions only require a trained counsellor and a means of allowing access to the patient. The internet has enabled access to health care for many people around the world who are not able to travel long and difficult land journeys to direct provision of health care. An online intervention with a professional moderator has proven acceptable to gynecological cancer patients with a sexual difficulty [39], and another internet-based sexual difficulties intervention with counselling sessions proved more successful in improving sexuality issues than without a counsellor; however, there was no difference between the two groups in relation to emotional distress and quality of life [40]. Elsewhere, telephone interventions are being used, also with some success; however, it is clear that the knowledge, skills, and training of the health professional providing the intervention are relevant to the patient outcome. Multidisciplinary care should form the backbone of treatment of sexual difficulties in women with gynecological cancer, incorporating physical, psychoeducational, and psychosexual input. Team discussions, including clinicians, psychosexual therapists, and physiotherapists are well within the capabilities of many cancer centers, remembering that the patient and her partner are the focal point and should always be consulted. It is impossible to diagnose and treat a sexual problem if one does not acknowledge that it exists. Many studies in the past have identified lack of willingness of doctors and nurses to discuss sex, but sadly recent research has shown that not much has changed. For instance, in a cohort sample of 1154 US obstetrician − gynecologists, 60% did not ask patients about sexual problems [41]. Too often clinicians make value judgements about their patients including whether sexuality is an important part of their lives. Such assumptions may include biases about age, appearance, sexual preferences, and marital status of people who have sex. People with cancer and their partners have unmet sexual information and support needs [42], often due to the unwillingness of healthcare professionals to discuss sexual issues, even though they recognize it may be important to the patient. There are many barriers to talking about sex, affecting both the patient and the clinician, such as cultural background, and age and gender discrepancies between doctor and patient. There may be simple barriers, such as lack of privacy in a consultation, as often cancer patients are accompanied by family or close friends. Patients often state that they feel it is trivial to take up the doctor's time with non-life-threatening issues such as sex. Clinicians often cite lack of training as a reason that they are uncomfortable talking about sex and poor provision of this training has been noted [13]. Different models of communication skills training have been used and those undertaking the training have shown greater empathy and were more inclined to use open questions [43]. This technique of speaking to the patient in an open rather than interrogative manner can easily facilitate discussion of intimate issues. An even greater challenge in communication is the recognition that individuals are sexual beings up to the end of life. To some women in the palliative phase, sexual touch and closeness to their partner is of vital importance. Sadly this is rarely recognized and addressed by palliative care physicians [44]. It is important to remember that a minority of the female population identifies as lesbian, and that about 8% of the population is bisexual. While this should make no difference to the quality of sexual health care they receive, lesbians and bisexuals find it difficult to disclose their sexuality to clinicians, often inhibited by their cultural or religious background, and fears of facing discrimination [45]. If the clinician asks the patient at the outset if they have a sexual partner, and whether the partner is male or female, it will greatly enhance the quality of the doctor − patient interaction. Lesbian partners in particular can be very supportive during the cancer journey, and should be given the opportunity to be present if the patient wishes. Despite the recognized need for treatment of sexual problems in menopause and gynecological cancer, there is poor provision of specialist training to ensure that this important area of service provision is met [46]. Undergraduate teaching is important, but it is only by recognizing psychosexual medicine in formal gynecology or oncology training, as a compulsory requirement of the course, that this situation will begin to be addressed. Innovative online programs [47] can make a major impact on global training opportunities and give trainees around the world an opportunity to gain some skills and insight into treating sexual difficulties in a nonjudgmental way. Owing to the global prevalence of sexual problems associated with gynecological cancer, it should be within every gynecologist's or oncologist's duty of care to the patient to be aware of and have some understanding of how to diagnose and facilitate treatment for sexual problems in a nonjudgmental manner. This is true holistic medicine, recognizing not only the cancer, but the woman behind the symptoms, and requires awareness of the emotional, social, and relationship aspects of the patient's life. The ability of any person to enjoy a sexual life free of coercion, shame, disease, or pain in a consensual manner is a fundamental element of the human rights of women, and should be an unequivocally accepted as part of her gynecological cancer care. To make a difference, even in the absence of expensive and sophisticated cancer treatments, just acknowledging, listening, and offering support to the woman with sexual difficulties related to cancer will ultimately have a major benefit to her quality of life. The author has no conflict of interest. Please note: The publisher is not responsible for the content or functionality of any supporting information supplied by the authors. Any queries (other than missing content) should be directed to the corresponding author for the article.

International Journal of Gynecology & Obstetrics · 17 citationsread the source →

Health outcomes in people 2 years after surviving hospitalisation with COVID-19: a longitudinal cohort study.

Background: With the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, growing evidence shows that a considerable proportion of people who have recovered from COVID-19 have long-term effects on multiple organs and systems. A few longitudinal studies have reported on the persistent health effects of COVID-19, but the follow-up was limited to 1 year after acute infection. The aim of our study was to characterise the longitudinal evolution of health outcomes in hospital survivors with different initial disease severity throughout 2 years after acute COVID-19 infection and to determine their recovery status. Methods: We did an ambidirectional, longitudinal cohort study of individuals who had survived hospitalisation with COVID-19 and who had been discharged from Jin Yin-tan Hospital (Wuhan, China) between Jan 7 and May 29, 2020. We measured health outcomes 6 months (June 16-Sept 3, 2020), 12 months (Dec 16, 2020-Feb 7, 2021), and 2 years (Nov 16, 2021-Jan 10, 2022) after symptom onset with a 6-min walking distance (6MWD) test, laboratory tests, and a series of questionnaires on symptoms, mental health, health-related quality of life (HRQoL), return to work, and health-care use after discharge. A subset of COVID-19 survivors received pulmonary function tests and chest imaging at each visit. Age-matched, sex-matched, and comorbidities-matched participants without COVID-19 infection (controls) were introduced to determine the recovery status of COVID-19 survivors at 2 years. The primary outcomes included symptoms, modified British Medical Research Council (mMRC) dyspnoea scale, HRQoL, 6MWD, and return to work, and were assessed in all COVID-19 survivors who attended all three follow-up visits. Symptoms, mMRC dyspnoea scale, and HRQoL were also assessed in controls. Findings: 2469 patients with COVID-19 were discharged from Jin Yin-tan Hospital between Jan 7 and May 29, 2020. 1192 COVID-19 survivors completed assessments at the three follow-up visits and were included in the final analysis, 1119 (94%) of whom attended the face-to-face interview 2 years after infection. The median age at discharge was 57·0 years (48·0-65·0) and 551 (46%) were women. The median follow-up time after symptom onset was 185·0 days (IQR 175·0-197·0) for the visit at 6 months, 349·0 days (337·0-360·0) for the visit at 12 months, and 685·0 days (675·0-698·0) for the visit at 2 years. The proportion of COVID-19 survivors with at least one sequelae symptom decreased significantly from 777 (68%) of 1149 at 6 months to 650 (55%) of 1190 at 2 years (p<0·0001), with fatigue or muscle weakness always being the most frequent. The proportion of COVID-19 survivors with an mMRC score of at least 1 was 168 (14%) of 1191 at 2 years, significantly lower than the 288 (26%) of 1104 at 6 months (p<0·0001). HRQoL continued to improve in almost all domains, especially in terms of anxiety or depression: the proportion of individuals with symptoms of anxiety or depression decreased from 256 (23%) of 1105 at 6 months to 143 (12%) 1191 at 2 years (p<0·0001). The proportion of individuals with a 6MWD less than the lower limit of the normal range declined continuously in COVID-19 survivors overall and in the three subgroups of varying initial disease severity. 438 (89%) of 494 COVID-19 survivors had returned to their original work at 2 years. Survivors with long COVID symptoms at 2 years had lower HRQoL, worse exercise capacity, more mental health abnormality, and increased health-care use after discharge than survivors without long COVID symptoms. COVID-19 survivors still had more prevalent symptoms and more problems in pain or discomfort, as well as anxiety or depression, at 2 years than did controls. Additionally, a significantly higher proportion of survivors who had received higher-level respiratory support during hospitalisation had lung diffusion impairment (43 [65%] of 66 vs 24 [36%] of 66, p=0·0009), reduced residual volume (41 [62%] vs 13 [20%], p<0·0001), and total lung capacity (26 [39%] vs four [6%], p<0·0001) than did controls. Interpretation: Regardless of initial disease severity, COVID-19 survivors had longitudinal improvements in physical and mental health, with most returning to their original work within 2 years; however, the burden of symptomatic sequelae remained fairly high. COVID-19 survivors had a remarkably lower health status than the general population at 2 years. The study findings indicate that there is an urgent need to explore the pathogenesis of long COVID and develop effective interventions to reduce the risk of long COVID.

The Lancet. Respiratory medicine · 462 citationsread the source →

The impact of end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) on close persons: a literature review

Kidney disease is defined as end-stage when a patient's glomerular filtration rate has fallen to <15 ml/min/ 1.73 m2 [1]. Mortality associated with end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) is high [2]. The incidence of treated ESKD is rising in the western world, with a corresponding increase in the incidence of diabetes and cardiovascular disease, especially in ethnic minority groups. Survival on dialysis has been shown to be poorer in the older age group, especially in patients with increased comorbidity and in those whose functional status at the start of dialysis is poor [3]. Whilst renal transplant rates vary between different countries [4], the liberalization in the acceptance of older people into renal replacement therapy (RRT) programmes, together with changes in population demographics and the fact that kidney transplantation is less suitable for this group of older patients, means that dialysis may be the only treatment option available for an increasing number of patients aged 65 years and over [5]. Recent health policy changes in the OECD countries [6,7] acknowledge that end of life care may be more appropriate for some of these people, and maximum conservative management programmes (where residual renal function is supported, haemoglobin levels maintained and symptoms relieved) have been introduced into many renal units, particularly in the United Kingdom [6]. The onset of ESKD and subsequent recommendation of dialysis as a treatment option involves a change in lifestyle for both patients and close persons [8]. Even before end-stage disease is reached, as renal function deteriorates, patients frequently require additional support, and it is often family members who provide this [9]. In the UK it is estimated that 9 out of 10 carers of patients with either physical or neurological disabilities will be close relatives. In particular when home haemodialysis is undertaken, family members have been involved in supporting patients [10,11]. Studies have shown that good family support is associated with successful adaptation to dialysis and compliance with dietary restrictions [12,13]. Conversely, one of the main factors associated with patients discontinuing dialysis is patients’ perception that they have become a ‘burden’ to close family members [14]. There is therefore a need for health professionals to be aware of the important contribution that close persons make to the care of renal patients, to communicate effectively with them and to provide bereavement support for this group when appropriate [15]. The literature on close persons of patients with renal disease has identified two main areas of impact. Firstly, both haemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis may have a disruptive influence on family members’ social lives [16] and the structure of the week may be geared towards dialysis sessions. Secondly, some patients become frail and lose functional independence, leaving family members to provide greater physical support. Family members may have health and social care needs of their own that need to be addressed [16,17]. Qyinan [18] reported that close persons commonly felt overwhelmed and stressed, although this review was limited to an evidence base of four articles and considered home dialysis only. Campbell [19] used findings from the general carer literature to illustrate demands of ageing partners with ESKD. In other chronic illnesses such as stroke [20] or in palliative care for cancer and mental health [21], interventions aimed at providing family members with training to support patients with their rehabilitation, or to address unmet needs as a result of the patient's illness, have been developed and evaluated. Results have been mixed. In the case of stroke, carers in the intervention group experienced less depression and anxiety and better quality of life [20], whilst in the palliative care study, no statistically significant differences were found between the intervention and control group on carers’ psychological outcomes [21]. However, before such interventions can be developed in ESKD, it is important to understand better the emotional and physical needs of close persons. This review aims to identify all studies involving close persons caring for ESKD patients, to describe the main findings and critique the methodology. Specific attention has been paid to (a) studies exploring the impact of ESKD on close persons, in particular for those close persons where the patients are either withdrawing from dialysis or being provided with end of life care and (b) studies looking at the provision of health care for close persons. A literature search for relevant articles was conducted in five databases: Medline (1950–2006), Embase (1991–2006), CINAHL (1982–2006), PsycINFO (1970–2006) and AMED (1985–2006), employing the following key words: carers, caregivers, end-stage kidney disease, end-stage renal disease, haemodialysis, peritoneal dialysis and renal replacement therapy. These keywords were used both in word search options and exploded as thesaurus terms to obtain the maximum number of articles. The abstracts for each article were read to check for inclusion into the main review, using the following criteria: Published in peer-reviewed journals. Research studies with an introduction, a methodology and results section and a conclusion. Involve close persons, defined as either a family member or the person identified by the patient as an informal carer. By an informal carer, we mean a person who provides the majority of a patient's physical and emotional care needs and who is neither a volunteer nor in the employment of statutory services. Use a sample of close persons caring for adult ESKD patients (over 18 years). Non-English language articles were considered if the English translation of the abstract met the above criteria. Using these criteria, 334 articles were identified from the five databases (139 in Medline, 121 in Embase, 80 in CINAHL, 8 in AMED and 34 in PsycINFO). J.L. went through the abstracts of each of the 382 articles, of which 37 initially met the inclusion criteria. One was later excluded on closer inspection, as it was specifically a validation study of a fatigue severity scale. Of the remaining 36 studies, 16 exclusively looked at family members, 12 specifically at the patient-family dyad and 3 at the family-health professional dyad. Whilst the latter two types of studies did not concentrate solely on family concerns, we decided to include them in the analysis, because these findings further contribute to the limited number of studies in this field. Thirty-six studies were included in the review. Both J.L. and G.S. first went through the remaining 36 studies independently and extracted the following information for each study: the number of carers in the study sample, the RRT population they were caring for, authors’ definition of a carer, demographic details of the sample, patients’ dialysis history, caring history, study design, outcome measures used and main findings. J.L. and G.S. then met together to discuss these findings and obtain an initial consensus before meeting with A.B. and L.J. to obtain a final consensus. We undertook an exploration of the aims of these studies, their study design, the sample of participants and the outcome measures highlighted in the quantitative studies. The three main themes explored were (a) the impact of caring for a patient with ESKD on dialysis on close persons, in particular quality of life, psychological morbidity, close person responsibilities—which authors often referred to as ‘burden’ or ‘carer burden’—and their life situation; (b) the coping strategies employed by these close persons and (c) factors that influence psychological morbidity. No studies of health provision for close persons of patients with ESKD were identified. Four studies looking at end of life issues explored the following themes for close persons: (a) their perceptions of patients’ terminal symptoms; (b) their reasons for why patients decided to stop dialysis; (c) the long-term impact of patient death following dialysis cessation and (d) their perceptions of advance directives. End of life care may be provided by the renal multi-disciplinary team alone, or it may involve referral for specialist palliative care advice. Such advice is likely to include symptom control, attention to spiritual and psychological issues for patients and, where possible, involvement of their families in decision-making. Whilst most studies were interested in the direct impact on close persons only, one triangulated close person data with patient data. The majority of studies reviewed used a cross-sectional design; there was only one longitudinal study. Whilst most were quantitative (24/36), there were some qualitative studies (11/36) and one used a mixed methods approach. The total sample was predominantly female, with mean ages ranging from 41 to 68 years (analysis possible in only 18 studies). Sample sizes also tended to be small, with a median sample of 55 participants for the quantitative and 15 participants for the qualitative studies. Most of the sample was recruited in studies where associated patients were undergoing haemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis. Three studies also involved kidney transplant patients. Only five studies looked at close persons dealing with end of life issues or with patients withdrawing from dialysis. Many studies did not focus on close persons in their potential role as ‘informal carers’. Thirteen studies actively sought close persons who also considered themselves to be informal carers, of which eight provided full definitions of what they meant by this term. All studies included spouses as part of their sample, of which eight specifically concentrated on this group alone. Adult children were included in seven of these studies and parents in five. A wide variety of outcome measures were used to rate health-related quality of life, anxiety, depression, coping strategies and patient disease severity. Some studies used standardized outcome measures; others used simple self-rated tools. The most commonly used standardized measures were the Zarit Burden Interview [22] to evaluate the sense of carer responsibility (3/8), the Beck Depression Scale [23] to evaluate depression (2/5), SF-36 [24] to evaluate health-related quality of life (3/8), Jalowiec Coping Scale [25] to evaluate close persons’ use of coping strategies (3/3) and End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index [26] to evaluate patients’ disease severity (2/4). A breakdown of the country of origin for each study showed that over half originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada (7/36), with five originating from Australia and only seven from the European Union, of which only one was conducted in the UK. The remaining six studies came from the following countries: Japan (2/36), Brazil (2/36), China (1/36) and Turkey (1/36). The 36 studies have shown mixed results. They have mainly explored the following areas associated with caring for an ESKD patient: the impact on close persons and their social life and the factors affecting close persons’ psychological health. There have been very few studies looking at palliative care issues and these have primarily concentrated on dealing with end of life issues rather than the provision of supportive care in the pre-terminal phase. In only one study, close persons rated their quality of life as excellent and reported few pressures resulting from their carer responsibilities [27], whilst in all others, ESKD and dialysis were shown to increase the close person's sense of responsibility and lead to a poorer quality of life when compared with age-matched controls [28]. Close persons found living with an ESKD patient on dialysis stressful [29] and experienced increased fatigue [30]. The dominating effect of caring for an ESKD patient often led close persons to neglect their own health. For those who took time to have a break from their carer responsibilities, there were health benefits [31]. Other issues that close persons reported included isolation through the loss of social activity [30–36], life restrictions [36–38], increased workload, negative economic consequences [39,40], changed relationship with the patient [30,34] and sexual problems for spouses [41]. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. The treatment modality may also have an impact on family members. Studies have highlighted that spouses of transplant patients were more assertive, self-sufficient and able to handle the physical, social and existential aspects of the illness better than dialysis spouses [33,42]. Despite these pressures, close persons recognized that they play a positive role in promoting patients’ well-being [11,43]. They recognized that health care professionals were important in providing support to discuss their problems [39] and would like to have more information about the care being provided to patients [44]. However, they also reported poor communication with professionals, felt that their needs were not always addressed [30,39,45] and felt themselves uneducated and poorly equipped to deal with the regimented lifestyle associated with the dialysis regimen [14]. Whilst some studies have shown that close persons display few signs of psychological distress [40,46–49], others have identified the following: Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. A negative between close persons’ psychological health and their sense of carer responsibility their use of coping strategies strategies that the symptoms of the of the the close person's age and the social and changes as a result of ESKD A positive between good mental health and the following a of of dialysis the of dialysis patients are on of social support and sense of carer responsibility The sense of carer responsibilities are if patients are in of living have less or comorbidity This was further in studies in patients home haemodialysis or transplant where close persons not anxiety or depression felt less by their carer responsibility and a quality of life to the age-matched population were found between levels of responsibility and other outcomes such as quality of life and The use of coping was found to have a negative with a positive with the number of years on dialysis Close persons were more likely to have negative towards patients if they no of the dialysis and a high of involvement with the caring whilst living in a We identified five studies that explored end of life only one specifically on close persons. This study the long-term impact of death on families when dialysis was found that most families felt that patients a good death as at and with close people and most family members showed only levels of However, carers and those with levels of caring responsibility for the did End of life care HD = End of life care HD = The remaining four studies on patient outcomes such as reasons for withdrawing from dialysis the quality of death the of close persons in ESKD patients’ to and care and use of advance as a in advance by patients, which the of treatment to be by health care a patient is to provide to that person's of These studies found that close persons that whilst most patients a many patients were to be in and from fatigue care family members in that patients’ were and most recognized the of living which they felt were health care professional Close persons were poorly for caring for a dialysis and patients did not to be a on their families [14]. They were also poor at both patients’ and for or dialysis No studies were identified for carers of patients with supportive care those on maximum conservative management The main of most studies included in this review is the of and of the demographic over half of the studies demographic details of close persons’ ages and or details of their relationship to patients of other relevant demographic such as employment status or social is and only seven studies the time that close persons as Whilst all studies the of dialysis half reported the of time a patient has been on with very few patients’ functional although carer studies in other that this has an impact on carers’ quality of life In only 18 9 qualitative and mixed methods study details of their sample of the quantitative studies included in the used cross-sectional and were predominantly Such studies are in exploring between are limited as they not to be only five studies provide the full details of sample it is therefore not possible to rates or the sample The sample sizes were with a median of 55 and details of were reported in only one study. the of the used to the different outcomes it to between the different studies. We identified that most studies poor of their methods and a of of their data Most used of family members with five studies using only one details of their studies with their studies with their one a of their their approach. One study no details of their the studies were poorly that the was and authors were as to to use qualitative data with the and of the qualitative data demographic of data and poor use of supporting This study reviewed the literature exploring the of close persons of patients with ESKD, from which can be the quality of and for the of in this Firstly, studies exploring end of life issues are with only four identified. these four studies are they that health are the time for informal carers to discuss patients’ about end of life care and, long-term distress of close persons resulting from the patients’ However, about such end of life issues close persons, and we studies in this Secondly, definitions of close persons were there were some differences identified between the different groups. the literature the that most close persons are to patients, the in to patients who were and those with family and relationship were not not all close persons to on the role of the informal carer, and the of this role can be a as illness review did not identify differences between informal carers and family carers in the outcome measures used included both the of differences may in their with ‘informal carers’ a more members’ may be as being more this needs further issues that need to be addressed the use of methodology were identified in the Most quantitative studies were and with no intervention studies being identified. Studies of demographic details and rates and all were cross-sectional with sample sizes that used standardized Whilst the use of standardized measures the of the the findings from cross-sectional studies are limited in that they can only between We the use of longitudinal methods in that would that between key be explored in more This would also into the long-term of close persons. In those studies using qualitative most used with poor and of demographic and social and Many authors used the ‘burden’ or ‘carer such terms may influence of the relationship between close person and was not they were by close persons to use the ‘burden’ or it was a by the authors to describe the responsibilities of Such and the of study findings the half of the studies originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada This it to the results of these studies their to in the of health care provision in other there is evidence that the psychological health of close persons them to to care which in can the mental health of patients, we to identify studies in review that looked specifically at health close persons of patients with ESKD. review has identified in the literature that need to be is therefore to the relationship between health and close persons in to We would like to acknowledge for this review and for support in this of

Clinical Kidney Journal · editorial or comment · 83 citationsread the source →

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF DEPRESSION: DO WE HAVE ANY SOLID EVIDENCE OF INTEREST TO CLINICIANS?

Major depressive disorder (MDD) is a common and costly disorder which is usually associated with severe and persistent symptoms leading to important social role impairment and increased mortality 1,2. It is one of the most important causes of disability worldwide 3. The high rate of inadequate treatment of the disorder remains a serious concern 1. This review is aimed at summarizing the solid evidence on the etiology and pathophysiology of MDD that is likely relevant for clinical psychiatry. Neurobiological findings are regarded as solid when they are consistent and convergent, i.e., they have been confirmed by several studies using the same method and fit into results from studies using different methodological approaches. Family, twin, and adoption studies provide very solid and consistent evidence that MDD is a familial disorder and that this familiality is mostly or entirely due to genetic factors 4. This important finding suggests that parental social behavior and other familial environmental risk factors are not as important in the pathogenesis of MDD as previously assumed and should not be the major focus of the treatment of the disorder. The above-mentioned studies consistently show that the influence of genetic factors is around 30–40% 4. Non-genetic factors, explaining the remaining 60–70% of the variance in susceptibility to MDD, are individual-specific environmental effects (including measurement error effects and gene-environment interactions). These effects are mostly adverse events in childhood and ongoing or recent stress due to interpersonal adversities, including childhood sexual abuse, other lifetime trauma, low social support, marital problems, and divorce 5,6. These results suggest that there is a huge potential in the prevention of MDD by means of psychosocial interventions (e.g., in schools, at workplace). In addition, these results mirror the clinical practice of empirically validated psychotherapies to treat depression 7,8,9, including interpersonal, psychodynamic and cognitive behavioral psychotherapies and cognitive behavioural analysis system of psychotherapy, which all focus directly or indirectly on interpersonal difficulties and skills. This does not exclude the fact that unidentified non-genetic, non-psychosocial risk factors may also play important roles in some patients (e.g., climatic change, medical conditions). Stress sensitivity in depression is partly gender-specific. While men and women are, in general, equally sensitive to the depressogenic effects of stressful life events, their responses vary depending upon the type of stressor. Specifically, men are more likely to have depressive episodes following divorce, separation, and work difficulties, whereas women are more sensitive to events in their proximal social network, such as difficulty getting along with an individual, serious illness, or death 10. These findings point to the importance of gender-sensitive psychosocial approaches in the prevention and treatment of MDD. In contrast to the very solid evidence from epidemiological studies on broad risk factor domains, there is no solid evidence for specific genes and specific gene-by-environment interactions in the pathogenesis of MDD. Genome-wide association studies have indicated that many genes with small effects are involved in complex diseases, increasing the difficulty in identifying such genes 11. While there has been progress in the search for risk genes for several complex diseases despite this methodological problem 12, psychiatric conditions have turned out to be very resistant to robust gene identification. For example, based on a community-based prospective study, it has been proposed that a specific genetic variation in the promoter region of the serotonin transporter (a target of antidepressant drugs) interacts with stressful life events in the pathogenesis of depression 13. Although there is high clinical and neurobiological plausibility of this interaction, a recent meta-analysis yielded no evidence that the serotonin transporter gene alone or in interaction with psychological stress was associated with the risk of depression 14. The limited success of genetic studies of depression has been related to use of current classification schemas including ICD-10 and DSM-IV. These diagnostic manuals are based on clusters of symptoms and characteristics of clinical course that do not necessarily describe homogenous disorders but instead reflect common final pathways of different pathophysiolgical processes 15,16. The clinician should be aware that family history will continue to be the most solid source of information to estimate the genetic risk of MDD. Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) is released from the hypothalamus in response to the perception of psychological stress by cortical brain regions. This hormone induces the secretion of pituitary corticotropin, which stimulates the adrenal gland to release cortisol into the plasma. The physiologic response to stress is partly gender-specific: women show generally greater stress responsiveness than men, which is consistent with the greater incidence of major depression in women 17. Moreover, men show greater cortisol responses to achievement challenges, whereas women show greater cortisol responses to social rejection challenges 18. Although MDD is considered as a stress disorder, most subjects treated for MDD have no evidence of dysfunctions of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis (HPA) 19. However, some subjects with MDD do show abnormalities of that axis and of the extrahypothalamic CRH system 20. Altered stress hormone secretion appeared to be most prominent in depressed subjects with a history of childhood trauma 21. Elevated cortisol may act as a mediator between major depression and its physical long-term consequences such as coronary heart disease, type II diabetes, and osteoporosis 22. The importance of HPA axis dysfunction for the efficacy of antidepressants is a matter of debate 23. This axis is regulated through a dual system of mineralocorticoid (MR) and glucocorticoid (GR) receptors. Decreased limbic GR receptor function 24,25 and increased functional activity of the MR system 26 suggest an imbalance in the MR/GR ratio in stress-related conditions such as MDD. Epigenetic regulation of the glucocorticoid receptors has been associated with childhood abuse 27. Such environmental programming of gene expression may represent one possible mechanism that links early life stress to abnormal HPA axis function and increased risk of MDD in adults. While the CRH stimulation test (dex/CRH test) 28 is a sensitive measure of the HPA axis dysfunction in depression, the specificity of this test for MDD is low. However, non-suppression in the dex/CRH test has consistently predicted increased risk for depressive relapse during clinical remission 23. Additionally, the measurement of waking salivary cortisol concentration has been shown to be a simple and sensitive test for HPA axis hyperactivity in depression 29. Hypercortisolemia is almost exclusively found in subjects with severe and psychotic depression, in whom glucocorticoid antagonists may have some therapeutic effect 30. There is convergent evidence for CRH to play a major role in the pathogenesis of certain types of depression. Levels of CRH in the cerebrospinal fluid are elevated in some depressed subjects 31. Post-mortem studies reported an increased number of CRH secreting neurons in limbic brain regions in depression 32, likely reflecting a compensatory response to increased CRH concentrations 33. In addition, CRH produces a number of physiological and behavioral alterations that resemble the symptoms of major depression, including decreased appetite, disrupted sleep, decreased libido, and psychomotor alterations 34. There is also preliminary evidence that CRH1 receptor antagonists reduce symptoms of depression and anxiety 35. “Sickness behavior” as a result of an activation of the inflammatory response system shares many symptoms with depression, including fatigue, anhedonia, psychomotor retardation, and cognitive impairment. Sickness is mediated by pro-inflammatory cytokines such as interleukin-1α, tumor necrosis factor-α, and interleukin-6, which activate the HPA axis and impair the central serotonin system 36. The prevalence of depression as an unwanted effect of recombinant interferons is around 30% 37. In animals, blocking pro-inflammatory cytokine-mediated signaling produces antidepressant-like effects 38. Clinical data suggest that cytokines may play a role in the pathophysiology of a subgroup of depressed subjects, particularly those with comorbid physical conditions 36. The antidepressant enhancing effect of acetylsalicylic acid 39 points to the possible clinical relevance of psychoneuroimmunology in clinical depression research. Taken together, the laboratory tests with the highest potential to be clinically useful in the care of depressed individuals are based on abnormalities of the neuroendocrine and neuroimmune systems. Despite the large amount of basic science data suggesting that the HPA axis is importantly involved in the pathophysiology of depression, the effect of pharmacological modulation of this neuroendocrine system as antidepressant therapy has been disappointing. The link between childhood trauma and a permanently altered physiologic stress system points to the use of specific psychotherapies in the treatment of depressed patients with a history of early life trauma 40. Most of the serotonergic, noradrenergic and dopaminergic neurons are located in midbrain and brainstem nuclei and project to large areas of the entire brain. This anatomy suggests that monoaminergic systems are involved in the regulation of a broad range of brain functions, including mood, attention, reward processing, sleep, appetite, and cognition. Almost every compound that inhibits monoamine reuptake, leading to an increased concentration of monoamines in the synaptic cleft, has been proven to be a clinically effective antidepressant 19. Inhibiting the enzyme monoamine oxidase, which induces an increased availability of monoamines in presynaptic neurons, also has antidepressant effects. These observations led to the pharmacologically most relevant theory of depression, referred to as the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis. The monoamine-deficiency theory posits that the underlying pathophysiological basis of depression is a depletion of the neurotransmitters serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine in the central nervous system. Serotonin is the most extensively studied neurotransmitter in depression. The most direct evidence for an abnormally reduced function of central serotonergic system comes from studies using tryptophan depletion, which reduces central serotonin synthesis. Such a reduction leads to the development of depressive symptoms in subjects at increased risk of depression (subjects with MDD in full remission, healthy subjects with a family history of depression) 41,42, possibly mediated by increased brain metabolism in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex and subcortical brain regions 42. Experimentally reduced central serotonin has been associated with mood congruent memory bias, altered reward-related behaviors, and disruption of inhibitory affective processing 16, all of which add to the clinical plausibility of the serotonin deficiency hypothesis. There is also evidence for abnormalities of serotonin receptors in depression, with the most solid evidence pointing to the serotonin-1A receptor, which regulates serotonin function. Decreased availability of this receptor has been found in multiple brain areas of patients with MDD 43, although this abnormality is not highly specific for MDD and has been found in patients with panic disorder 44 and temporal lobe epilepsy 45, possibly contributing to the considerable comorbidity among these conditions. However, there is no explanation for the mechanism of serotonin loss in depressed patients, and studies of serotonin metabolites in plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid, as well as post-mortem research on the serotonergic system in depression, have yielded inconsistent results. There is preliminary evidence that an increased availability of the brain monoamine oxidase, which metabolizes serotonin, may cause serotonin deficiency 46. In addition, loss-of-function mutations in the gene coding for the brain-specific enzyme tryptophan hydroxylase-2 may explain the loss of serotonin production as a rare risk factor for depression 47. Dysfunction of the central noradrenergic system has been hypothesized to play a role in the pathophysiology of MDD, based upon evidence of decreased norepinephrine metabolism, increased activity of tyrosine hydroxylase, and decreased density of norepinephrine transporter in the locus coeruleus in depressed patients 48. In addition, decreased neuronal counts in the locus coeruleus, increased alpha-2 adrenergic receptor density, and decreased alpha-1 adrenergic receptor density have been found in the brains of depressed suicide victims post-mortem 49. Since there is no method to selectively deplete central norepinephrine and no imaging tool to study the central norepinephrine system, solid evidence for abnormalities of this system in depression is lacking. While the classical theories of the neurobiology of depression mainly focused on serotonin and norepinephrine, there is increasing interest in the role of dopamine 50. Dopamine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., nomifensine) and dopamine receptor agonists (e.g., pramipexole) had antidepressant effects in placebo-controlled studies of MDD 51. In the cerebrospinal fluid and jugular vein plasma, levels of dopamine metabolites were consistently reduced in depression, suggesting decreased dopamine turnover 52. Striatal dopamine transporter binding and dopamine uptake were reduced in MDD, consistent with a reduction in dopamine neurotransmission 53. Degeneration of dopamine projections to the striatum in Parkinson's disease was associated with a major depressive syndrome in about one half of cases, which usually preceded the appearance of motor signs 54. Experimentally reduced dopaminergic transmission into the accumbens has been associated with anhedonic symptoms and performance deficits on a reward processing task in subjects at increased risk of depression 55,56. These findings are consistent with the clinical observation that depressed patients have a blunted reaction to positive reinforcers and an abnormal response to negative feedback 57. Almost all established antidepressants target the monoamine systems 58. However, full and partial resistance to these drugs and their delayed onset of action suggest that dysfunctions of monoaminergic neurotransmitter systems found in MDD represent the downstream effects of other, more primary abnormalities. Despite this limitation, the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis has proved to be the most clinically relevant neurobiological theory of depression. New findings on the role of dopamine in depression emphasize the scientific potential of this theory, and promising reports of antidepressant effects of drugs that modulate the dopaminergic system (e.g., pramipexole, modafinil) in difficult-to-treat depression underline its clinical relevance 51,59. Although many historical attempts to localize mental functions have failed, they have considerably contributed to a modern neuroscientific understanding of mental disorders 60. The development of neuroimaging techniques has opened up the potential to investigate structural and functional abnormalities in living depressed patients. Unfortunately, the diversity of imaging techniques used, the relatively small and heterogeneous study samples studied, and the limited overlap of results across imaging paradigms 61 make it difficult to reliably identify neuronal regions or networks with consistently abnormal structure or function in MDD. Functional imaging studies have provided the most limited overlap of findings. This may be due to methodological limitations and/or the complexity of neurocircuitry involved in MDD. A recent meta-analytic study found the best evidence for abnormal brain activity in MDD in lateral frontal and temporal cortices, insula, and cerebellum. In these brain regions activity was decreased at rest, they showed a relative lack of activation during induction of negative emotions, and an increase in activity following treatment with serotonin reuptake inhibitors. Opposite changes may exist in ventromedial frontal areas, striatum and possibly other subcortical brain regions 61. More solid evidence has been provided by structural imaging and post-mortem studies. A recent meta-analytic study on brain volume abnormalities in MDD revealed relatively large volume reductions in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex, particularly in the left anterior cingulate and in the orbitofrontal cortex. Moderate volume reductions were found in the lateral prefrontal cortex, hippocampus and striatum 62. Post-mortem studies consistently identified a reduction in glia cell density in dorsal, orbital and subgenual prefrontal cortices, as well as in the amygdala 63,64. Overall, functional, structural and post-mortem studies suggest that structural and functional abnormalities in the left subgenual cingulate cortex are the most solid neuroanatomical finding in MDD. Volume reduction in this region was found early in illness and in young adults at high familial risk for MDD 65, suggesting a primary neurobiological abnormality associated with the etiology of the illness. Humans with lesions that include the subgenual prefrontal cortex showed abnormal autonomic responses to social stimuli 66, and rats with left-sided lesions in this region had increased sympathetic arousal and corticosterone responses to restraint stress 67. Most importantly, chronic deep brain stimulation to reduce the potentially elevated activity in the subgenual cingulated cortex produced clinical benefits in patients with treatment-resistant depression 68. In summary, despite the considerable heterogeneity of findings from neuroimaging studies, there is convergent evidence for the presence of abnormalities in the subgenual prefrontal cortex in some patients with MDD. Neuroanatomical research in depression is of great clinical interest, since novel antidepressant treatments such as deep brain stimulation can target specific brain regions. In addition, there are promising leads for neuroimaging findings to predict the likelihood of responses to specific treatments 69. Risk factors for depressive episodes change during the course of the illness. The first depressive episode is usually “reactive”, i.e., triggered by important psychosocial stressors, while subsequent episodes become increasingly “endogenous”, i.e., triggered by minor stressors or occurring spontaneously 70. There is consistent evidence that the volume loss of the hippocampus and other brain regions is related to the duration of depression 71, suggesting that untreated depression leads to hippocampal volume loss, possibly resulting in increased stress sensitivity 72 and increased risk of recurrence 73. Glucocorticoid neurotoxicity, glutamatergic toxicity, decreased neurotrophic factors, and decreased neurogenesis have been proposed as possible mechanisms explaining brain volume loss in depression. There is no solid evidence on of these since there are no imaging to directly and neurotrophic processes in neurotrophic factor has considerable Specifically, studies have shown between and in hippocampal as well as expression of following antidepressant treatment The clinician should be aware of the potentially effect of depression and treat depressed patients as early and as A of studies consistently showed reductions in acid concentrations in the prefrontal and cortex in depression This may reflect stress since psychological stress to presynaptic of prefrontal neurotransmission low concentration may reflect reduction in the density and of In addition, chronic stress may reduce receptor possibly through changes in evidence of the hypothesis of depression the lack of effects of drugs on depressive symptoms and prefrontal concentration in subjects with MDD of evidence suggest a dysfunction of the neurotransmitter system in a of the receptor produced and large antidepressant effects in patients with treatment-resistant MDD inhibitors of release (e.g., antidepressant abnormal levels were found in depressed subjects as by and there is evidence for abnormal signaling in post-mortem Since is the major neurotransmitter involved in almost every brain the of the specific role of in depression (e.g., there are promising leads that the receptor is involved in MDD and are diagnostic for MDD, suggesting regulation in depressed patients. In addition, some depressive symptoms may show psychomotor of of positive and negative and a subgroup of patients with MDD may have a disorder In healthy young subjects, changes in the of the had specific effects on subsequent mood In depressed patients, of can have antidepressant on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of The and of the neurobiological of depression are in 1. The many theories of depression and the relatively low response rate of all antidepressant treatments a hypothesis of and suggest that depression is a clinically and heterogeneous disorder. This research on of the response to therapeutic interventions using such as neuroimaging and neuroendocrine tests in with for with to stress sensitivity and antidepressant The of of therapeutic will for the development of that has the potential to interventions and to up pathways in the of novel therapeutic approaches.

World Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 607 citationsread the source →

Atypical Antipsychotics: CATIE Study, Drug-Induced Movement Disorder and Resulting Iatrogenic Psychiatric-Like Symptoms, Supersensitivity Rebound Psychosis and Withdrawal Discontinuation Syndromes

Chronic illness can result in chronicity of clinical practice. As we have moved away from prescribing classical antipsychotics and tricyclic antidepressants, issues remain with the use of atypical antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants that need to be addressed, namely, iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and supersensitivity psychiatric symptoms. An optimal maintenance drug treatment consists of regular attempts to reduce the dose by finding a minimal therapeutic dose, regularly asking the question of when to reduce or withdraw treatment and for which patients, and moreover, why it is difficult to decrease a given drug treatment. Recently, Falloon [1] proposed that maintenance pharmacotherapy in schizophrenia will depend on finally finding minimally effective doses through ‘extensive training in stress management’. In the long-term treatment of major depression, Fava [2] has hypothesized that antidepressants can aggravate the course of depressive illness. Lambert [3] recently suggested that ‘antipsychotic-switching syndromes’, which include discontinuation syndromes, are a ‘major barrier’ to adjusting antipsychotic treatment. In this paper, we propose that to achieve optimal maintenance treatment with antipsychotics, and to reduce or withdraw antipsychotics effectively, we must distinguish syndromes associated with discontinuing antipsychotics, such as supersensitivity psychosis, from true relapse. While the prevalence and incidence of drug-induced movement disorder(s) (DIMD) has continuously decreased with atypical antipsychotics, DIMD persist as do psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD, and these must also be identified and evaluated. Persistent DIMD have been found to be a predictor of the later emergence of tardive dyskinesia (TD) and supersensitivity psychosis [4]. At present, we need to determine the relative risk of iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes, DIMD and DIMD psychiatric symptoms resulting from atypical antipsychotics. Although atypical antipsychotics are now most commonly prescribed, a debate has emerged on the differences between classical and atypical antipsychotics following the results of the Clinical Antipsychotic Trials of Intervention Effectiveness (CATIE) study [5]. The question that comes to the forefront is why recent studies are no longer finding well-established differences between these two generations in terms of efficacy and DIMD. Reasons to explain why recent schizophrenia studies have found reduced drug and placebo differences were examined at the International Society for CNS Clinical Trials and Methodology Annual Mid-Year Conference [6]. While the fact must be considered that patients included in recent studies have less severe illness with symptoms that are better controlled than in past studies (likely due to earlier treatment), the issue that psychiatric symptoms specific to schizophrenia are not being adequately measured nor differentiated from psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD is crucial to answering this question. For example, it is hard to believe that in a recent review of psychomotor slowing in schizophrenia, the authors, when evaluating its effect on measurement and treatment research to improve cognition in schizophrenia (MATRICS), nearly completely ignored the influence of akinesia and DIMD on neuropsychological tests in schizophrenia and the importance of accurate DIMD measurements [7]. As we pursue this ongoing discussion, we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic association with a high prevalence of DIMD and increases in basal ganglia volumes [8], and now address how to prescribe atypical antipsychotics most effectively, by taking into account DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes. The first widely prescribed atypical antipsychotic, risperidone, was first approved in Canada in 1993 following the publication of the Canadian Multicenter Risperidone Study, which reported clear advantages of risperidone over haloperidol and the placebo, and significantly less appearance of DIMD with risperidone than haloperidol [9]. DIMD includes the 4 types of movement disorders induced by antipsychotics: parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia [10]. These findings were confirmed by the American Risperidone Study [11] and several other studies reporting greater efficacy of risperidone over classical antipsychotics in terms of cost-efficiency [12] and the clinical management of patients with schizophrenia [13,14,15,16,17]. However, the CATIE study [5] challenged these results. The CATIE study found that of the 4 atypical antipsychotics studied, olanzapine was the only atypical to be more efficacious than the classical antipsychotic perphenazine, and to be highly superior to risperidone for discontinuation of treatment, due to lack of efficacy [5]. Olanzapine is known to produce less DIMD compared to risperidone, therefore one would expect psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD to be less frequent with olanzapine than risperidone. The expected higher rate of DIMD-induced emergent psychiatric symptoms associated with risperidone would explain the CATIE results, showing risperidone to be significantly less efficacious than olanzapine [5], despite risperidone being known to be at least as efficacious as olanzapine for true schizophrenic symptoms. Furthermore, the rating scales used to measure DIMD did not find the well-established differences between the 5 antipsychotics for DIMD rates [5]. Thus, we propose that DIMD and DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms were confounded with true schizophrenic symptoms in the CATIE study. DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms could be classified into 3 types: (1) emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as akinesia inducing depression, akathisia inducing anxiety; (2) iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as akinesia confounded with psychomotor retardation, akathisia with agitation; (3) supersensitivity psychosis symptoms associated with DIMD. In the CATIE study, quetiapine (mean dose = 543.4 mg/day), which shares a low rate of DIMD with olanzapine, was also found to be significantly less efficacious compared to olanzapine, but in contrast to risperidone, this lack of efficacy could be due to psychiatric symptoms related to supersensitivity psychosis explained by quetiapine’s loose binding properties at the D2 receptor [18]. Patients taking quetiapine had a completion rate of 18% out of 329 patients, whereas in our 3-year prospective study of quetiapine monotherapy with a lower mean dose of 487 mg/day (thus less likely to develop therapeutic tolerance), the completion rate was 21.7% out of 23 patients; 6 of 7 patients who relapsed, after a minimum 3 months of stabilized quetiapine treatment, met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. Without distinguishing these DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms from symptoms due to the original illness, the major impact of atypical antipsychotics is on the reduction of DIMD and TD [10, 20,] and their beneficial effects on psychosis are masked by DIMD emergent psychiatric symptoms, including supersensitivity psychosis. We will review 4 multicenter trials, which include a total of 14,497 patients, to illustrate how psychiatric and schizophrenic symptoms are confounded with DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms.TD epidemiology has changed significantly since the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, with a constant decline in its prevalence [10]. TD, classified as a DIMD, is a hyperkinetic, involuntary and purposeless movement disorder [10, 20]. Considered as the most significant side effect of classical antipsychotics, TD has been associated with antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics, and usually occurs after several years of treatment. Persistent TD can also occur after short-term exposure to classical antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics even at low doses and for as few as 2 months [8,21,22,23], while reversible and withdrawal dyskinesias share properties with levodopa-induced dyskinesia [24]. We conducted several epidemiological studies of TD [4,25,26,27] and in 1975, using the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) psychopharmacology criteria, we found a 31% prevalence of TD in 261 outpatients with schizophrenia [25]. We also evaluated these patients according to the Schooler and Kane research diagnostic criteria and found a 22% prevalence of TD. This variability of findings related to defining criteria complicates comparisons across studies [10]. In a 5-year follow-up study of 169 of the same patients [4, 25], 45% met the research diagnostic criteria for TD. In 1975, 131 of the 261 patients did not meet the research diagnostic for TD, and in 1980 treatment-emergent TD was found in 46 of the patients who did not have it in 1975, for a 5-year cumulative incidence rate of 35% and a mean annual incidence rate of 8.4%. When corrected for remissions, the mean annual incidence rate decreased to 2.9%. This incidence rate, which includes both patients who developed and remitted from TD over time, is similar to results found by other studies during the same time period [28, 29]. The cumulative incidence of treatment-emergent TD in the study by Kane et al. [29] was 12% after 4 years and 40% after 8 years of neuroleptic exposure, which is similar to our finding of an annual incidence rate (corrected for remissions) of 3% for classical antipsychotics. In a study carried out in 130 lithium-treated affective disorder patients previously, but less, exposed to antipsychotics, we found a TD prevalence of 9.2% [26], which was a quarter of the incidence reported in our previous studies on patients with schizophrenia who had greater exposure to antipsychotics. In this time period of classical antipsychotics, 2 meta-analyses (including mostly patients with schizophrenia) reported mean TD prevalences of 23% [30] and 20% [31]. In view of the fact that 58% of patients treated with classical antipsychotics will develop treatment-emergent TD after 10–15 years of treatment [4], and the known beneficial neuroprotective effects of atypical antipsychotics on TD [32] and on increased basal ganglia volumes induced by classical antipsychotics [8], we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic effects. In the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the following multicenter studies (n = 3,753) evaluated the incidence and prevalence of TD, using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale [20] and training videotapes as in the previous time period. In the first study, an annual TD incidence of 0.68% was reported prospectively in 725 patients with schizophrenia, treated with the long-acting injectable atypical antipsychotic risperidone [27, 33]. Treatment-emergent TD was found in 12 of 587 patients without dyskinesia at the baseline [33]; however, expert case assessment determined 7 cases (1.19%) of withdrawal dyskinesia (3 cases resolved, 4 cases unchanged), 1 case (0.17%) of reversible dyskinesia and 4 cases (0.68%) of persistent treatment-emergent TD. Of the patients with baseline dyskinesia, 28.4% improved, no longer met TD criteria and maintained this response [33]. This annual treatment-emergent TD incidence of 0.68% with atypical antipsychotics is only 22% of the annual incidence of 3% reported with classical antipsychotics [4]. In the second study, the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (67 centers in 11 countries) [34], 980 patients with schizophrenia, or schizoaffective disorders, taking an atypical alone (25.6%), a classical alone (31.5%) or both a classical and an atypical antipsychotic (42.9%) were included from March 19, 1998, to February 14, 1999, and TD was found at the baseline in 115 (12%) patients [27, 35]. Thus, after 10 years in the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the overall prevalence of TD decreased by at least twofold compared to our previous 1979–1988 studies with classical antipsychotics [4, 25], using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale and training videotapes. In the third study (baseline data from three Ris-Consta multicenter studies) [27, 36] carried out 1 year later, 2,048 patients were included from March 21, 1999, to December 15, 2000, and TD was found at the baseline in 209 patients (10.2%), using the same methodology. This study showed a further decrease in the prevalence of TD after an additional year of atypical use. This changing epidemiology of TD with atypical antipsychotics is confirmed by Correll et al. [37] in a systematic review of 1-year prospective studies with atypical antipsychotics, and by Jeste et al. [38] in a 1-year study of elderly patients treated with risperidone. In conclusion, following the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, the prevalence and incidence of TD have significantly decreased. However, the risk for TD still exists with both atypical and classical antipsychotics, and there is a need for continued surveillance of emerging cases of TD in patients taking antipsychotics [39], especially as the current debate continues on the differences in efficacy between these two generations of antipsychotics following results from studies such as the CATIE [5, 39]. Furthermore, Kane [39] has pointed out that newly trained clinicians using mostly atypical antipsychotics may not have had the same exposure to TD as previously trained clinicians.A high prevalence of all 4 types of DIMD (parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia) remains. In the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (n = 980), a prevalence of 57.5% of DIMD (n = 551 patients) was found [27, 35]. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048) [27, 36], 970 patients (47.4%) had DIMD at the baseline, which consisted of 778 patients with parkinsonism (38.0%), 285 patients with akathisia (14%) and 209 patients with TD (10.2%). Thus, nearly 1 patient out of 2 had a definite DIMD in this time period of classical and atypical antipsychotics. In addition, DIMD have been consistently associated with significant psychiatric symptoms as measured by the positive and negative syndrome scale (PANSS) [40, 41]. In the InterSept study (n = 980), which included patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who were at risk of suicide, suicidality was associated at baseline with DIMD, parkinsonism, TD and akathisia, and depression was associated with TD and akathisia [27, 35]. Based on these results, we recommend routinely assessing DIMD in patients with schizophrenia with suicidal and depressive symptoms. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048), baseline DIMD were also significantly associated with the PANSS total score, positive, negative and anxiety/depression symptoms [27, 36]. Greater anxiety and depression were seen in patients with severer DIMD, akathisia and parkinsonism. Higher PANSS negative symptom rating was associated with parkinsonism and higher PANSS total scores were associated with akathisia. In this time period, these last two studies (n = 3,028) show that DIMD persists with atypical antipsychotics, and that patients with DIMD have significantly higher PANSS scores compared to patients without DIMD.These results are in agreement with findings from 2 other multicenter studies: the American CATIE study [5] and the European Schizophrenia Outpatient Health Outcomes (SOHO) study [42]. In the CATIE baseline data, patients with TD (n = 212) were found to have significantly more psychopathology than patients without TD (n = 1,098) as measured by the PANSS total score and PANSS general psychopathology subscale [43]. In the 3-year prospective SOHO study, emergent cases of TD were associated with greater overall psychopathology. An increase in clinical global impression overall symptom severity was longitudinally associated with cases of TD in patients without TD at the baseline (n = The SOHO and the CATIE studies have also examined other for TD. the CATIE and SOHO studies found that other DIMD were associated with TD the CATIE study showed that patients with TD had more parkinsonism akathisia while the SOHO study found that baseline symptoms TD our findings in a prospective study of TD [4]. In to reporting that the incidence of TD was lower in patients taking atypical compared to classical antipsychotics after 6 months the SOHO study showed that the incidence of TD was associated with the incidence of of drug-induced in is crucial to that there is a of DIMD with atypical antipsychotics, which are not and confounded with psychiatric symptoms rating scales used routinely in clinical to DIMD do not DIMD from psychiatric symptoms from the 4 multicenter (n = 14,497 patients) into this the CATIE the [27, the Ris-Consta [27, 36] and the SOHO studies have all confirmed the association of DIMD with psychiatric symptoms. most of the studies included in this measure psychiatric symptoms according to the we propose the following of PANSS psychiatric symptoms associated with emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as depression and suicidality example, akinesia is known to produce depression, psychomotor and suicidal while akathisia psychomotor and suicidal and TD is also associated with suicidal iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding and DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as confounding and with and retardation, akathisia with anxiety and and and dyskinesias with and schizophrenic psychiatric schizophrenic symptoms associated with DIMD caused by supersensitivity psychosis, which we are now to first reported drug-induced associated with TD a in and increased receptor after long-term treatment with classical antipsychotics, and we this supersensitivity psychosis. We that TD and supersensitivity psychosis with the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic, given risk not and at the same The debate continues on how to most withdraw antipsychotic [1] and and psychiatric syndromes associated with types of syndromes have been with the discontinuation of (1) withdrawal syndromes and major (2) syndromes anxiety and which have been reported with and (3) supersensitivity syndromes such as TD and supersensitivity psychosis These discontinuation syndromes all produce psychiatric symptoms that can be confounded with true of the original illness. In a recent review of the on psychosis the importance of between antipsychotic withdrawal effects related to the course of the original illness and drug-induced effects such as supersensitivity psychosis. due to the discontinuation of a drug can be differentiated from the course of original illness and more long-term maintenance treatment could be reduced and in patients The long-term maintenance with second-generation antidepressants and of a major depressive disorder is of the in and during long-term maintenance treatment. The has also recently been to produce a persistent disorder following withdrawal to be related to supersensitivity When discontinuing antipsychotics and antidepressants, the of supersensitivity syndromes and other iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes must be to high doses or of outpatients and with schizophrenia treated with a classical antipsychotic treatment also included 1 but no antidepressants, no and no showed a prevalence of 22% for supersensitivity psychosis The prevalence of TD using Schooler and Kane criteria, was that found for supersensitivity psychosis. cases of supersensitivity psychosis increased the prevalence of supersensitivity psychosis to psychosis was associated with a higher maintenance dose of classical antipsychotics, high and schizophrenia with a The higher antipsychotic dose and higher associated with supersensitivity psychosis to the of supersensitivity and these results that lower doses of antipsychotics could the appearance of supersensitivity psychosis. In this study, there was no found between TD and supersensitivity psychosis, due to TD being associated with schizophrenia and supersensitivity psychosis with higher antipsychotic dose was not to be a risk for TD, whereas increased was associated with TD but not associated with supersensitivity psychosis. is that most patients in this study were treated with which has a high for the D2 which could to both a high incidence of supersensitivity psychosis and DIMD as the drug is known to produce a high incidence of symptoms psychosis, in its masked and withdrawal is known to occur 6 following the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic or 3 months for a long-acting injectable We have proposed that TD and supersensitivity psychosis can result from the of in the caused by following in D2 with high for The of supersensitivity psychosis and TD share can both occur after long-term use of antipsychotics and can and difficult to with of the antipsychotic stress both TD and supersensitivity psychosis and both can be by and by and TD was to be the predictor of supersensitivity psychosis in our and follow-up study of supersensitivity psychosis [4, TD and supersensitivity psychosis may or may not occur in the same time but TD is associated with supersensitivity psychosis when it occurs during withdrawal of antipsychotics These two supersensitivity syndromes have been difficult to study due to the fact that antipsychotics can their appearance further with supersensitivity psychosis is that symptoms the original illness and true however, supersensitivity psychosis can be as it more after of the antipsychotic than true occurs with high doses of antipsychotics and not with antipsychotic treatment and therapeutic to antipsychotic treatment after drug response time, as therapeutic there is further of supersensitivity and further syndromes, TD, can (1) or (2) persistent or (3) reversible or symptoms can persist for several months or years and can still be reversible or When persistent and supersensitivity symptoms symptoms, being severer than the original symptoms, but these supersensitivity symptoms persist in contrast to symptoms and may include symptoms atypical antipsychotics, it has been proposed that supersensitivity psychosis occurs more with antipsychotics with from the D2 receptor The 2 atypical antipsychotics most associated with supersensitivity psychosis are quetiapine and which both have loose binding properties at the D2 receptor An additional which and severe in the withdrawal of is its effect as an receptor Thus, for the withdrawal would be by the receptor following of at this drug in the of the a and psychosis results cases of supersensitivity psychosis have also been reported with olanzapine psychosis was found to be associated with quetiapine in our 3-year study of quetiapine in 23 outpatients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who had previously been treated with classical antipsychotics risperidone, and had symptoms and of side effects [19]. As in our of the CATIE study, 7 patients after a minimum of 3 months of stabilized treatment and 6 of these patients met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. the 11 of patients with baseline TD relapsed, the that TD to supersensitivity psychosis and have been to be efficacious in of patients with supersensitivity psychosis We also recommend the use of in supersensitivity and anxiety disorder induced by the discontinuation of the An can be used in with an antipsychotic or an in to more decrease or withdraw these and find the minimal therapeutic dose for patients who still need long-term treatment. a minimal therapeutic dose with an has an additional for a drug olanzapine, as the dose will significant side In in the of Mental Health psychiatric 35% of patients with a of schizophrenia and For severe cases of schizophrenia, the use of or is in to drug to antipsychotic While is less than or it is superior to for anxiety and the of optimal minimal maintenance drug treatment. proposed the beneficial results of treatment in schizophrenia is their effect We have also related their beneficial effects to an of a We recommend treatment as a first for from treatment, can also be prescribed as with as it has a In a and that and had than other in addition, emerging that may improve DIMD has also been to be effective as an to antipsychotic monotherapy in patients with schizophrenia who treatment We that of cases of schizophrenia can be related to supersensitivity psychosis. In patients for maintenance treatment is a minimal therapeutic dose can be with the use of an that will patients from antipsychotic or conclusion, DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms and supersensitivity syndromes will to to results such as found in the CATIE study which show that olanzapine is the only atypical antipsychotic more efficacious than a classical The proposed for psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD may to the of all classical antipsychotics and the use of higher doses and longer than of atypical antipsychotics. research is in to develop to distinguish between true and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and to to more withdraw antipsychotics and antidepressants by and supersensitivity syndromes, for the antipsychotics and quetiapine and for the may to further of DIMD, TD and supersensitivity psychosis as we to more differences in the of As most of antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants are not routinely or for more differences in drug will also to prescribe minimal therapeutic doses of antipsychotics and antidepressants for greater efficacy and better in the maintenance has and the last 3 years from and

Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics · editorial or comment · 168 citationsread the source →

Understanding nutrition, depression and mental illnesses

INTRODUCTION Few people are aware of the connection between nutrition and depression while they easily understand the connection between nutritional deficiencies and physical illness. Depression is more typically thought of as strictly biochemical-based or emotionally-rooted. On the contrary, nutrition can play a key role in the onset as well as severity and duration of depression. Many of the easily noticeable food patterns that precede depression are the same as those that occur during depression. These may include poor appetite, skipping meals, and a dominant desire for sweet foods.[1] Nutritional neuroscience is an emerging discipline shedding light on the fact that nutritional factors are intertwined with human cognition, behavior, and emotions. The most common mental disorders that are currently prevalent in numerous countries are depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).[2] The dietary intake pattern of the general population in many Asian and American countries reflects that they are often deficient in many nutrients, especially essential vitamins, minerals, and omega-3 fatty acids.[3] A notable feature of the diets of patients suffering from mental disorders is the severity of deficiency in these nutrients.[3] Studies have indicated that daily supplements of vital nutrients are often effective in reducing patients' symptoms.[4] Supplements containing amino acids have also been found to reduce symptoms, as they are converted to neurotransmitters which in turn alleviate depression and other mental health problems.[4] On the basis of accumulating scientific evidence, an effective therapeutic intervention is emerging, namely nutritional supplement/treatment. These may be appropriate for controlling and to some extent, preventing depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders and anxiety disorders, attention deficit disorder/attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADD/ADHD), autism, and addiction.[4] Most prescription drugs, including the common antidepressants lead to side effects.[4] This usually causes the patients to skip taking their medications. Such noncompliance is a common occurrence encountered by psychiatrists. An important point to remember here is that, such noncompliant patients who have mental disorders are at a higher risk for committing suicide or being institutionalized. In some cases, chronic use or higher doses may lead to drug toxicity, which may become life threatening to the patient.[4] An alternate and effective way for psychiatrists to overcome this noncompliance is to familiarize themselves about alternative or complementary nutritional therapies. Although further research needs to be carried out to determine the best recommended doses of most nutritional supplements in the cases of certain nutrients, psychiatrists can recommend doses of dietary supplements based on previous and current efficacious studies and then adjust the doses based on the results obtained by closely observing the changes in the patient.[4] When we take a close look at the diet of depressed people, an interesting observation is that their nutrition is far from adequate. They make poor food choices and selecting foods that might actually contribute to depression. Recent evidence suggests a link between low levels of serotonin and suicide.[5] It is implicated that lower levels of this neurotransmitter can, in part, lead to an overall insensitivity to future consequences, triggering risky, impulsive and aggressive behaviors which may culminate in suicide, the ultimate act of inwardly directed impulsive aggression. Depression is a disorder associated with major symptoms such as increased sadness and anxiety, loss of appetite, depressed mood, and a loss of interest in pleasurable activities. If there is no timely therapeutic intervention, this disorder can lead to varied consequences. Patients who are suffering from depression exhibit suicidal tendency to a larger degree and hence are usually treated with antidepressants and/or psychotherapy.[6] Deficiencies in neurotransmitters such as serotonin, dopamine, noradrenaline, and γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA) are often associated with depression.[6–11] As reported in several studies, the amino acids tryptophan, tyrosine, phenylalanine, and methionine are often helpful in treating many mood disorders including depression.[12–17] When consumed alone on an empty stomach, tryptophan, a precursor of serotonin, is usually converted to serotonin. Hence, tryptophan can induce sleep and tranquility. This implies restoring serotonin levels lead to diminished depression precipitated by serotonin deficiencies.[8] Tyrosine and sometimes its precursor phenylalanine are converted into dopamine and norepinephrine.[18] Dietary supplements containing phenyl alanine and/or tyrosine cause alertness and arousal. Methionine combines with adenosine triphosphate (ATP) to produce S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), which facilitates the production of neurotransmitters in the brain.[19–22] The need of the present paradigm is, more studies shedding light on the daily supplemental doses of these neurochemicals that should be consumed to achieve antidepressant effects. Researchers attribute the decline in the consumption of omega-3 fatty acids from fish and other sources in most populations to an increasing trend in the incidence of major depression.[23] The two omega-3 fatty acids, eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) which the body converts into docosahexanoic acid (DHA), found in fish oil, have been found to elicit antidepressant effects in human. Many of the proposed mechanisms of this conversion involve neurotransmitters. For instance, antidepressant effects may be due to bioconversion of EPA to leukotrienes, prostaglandins, and other chemicals required by the brain. Others hypothesize that both EPA and DHA influence neuronal signal transduction by activating peroxisomal proliferator-activated receptors (PPARs), inhibiting G-proteins and protein kinase C, in addition to calcium, sodium, and potassium ion channels. Whichever may be the case, epidemiological data and clinical studies have clearly shown that omega-3 fatty acids can effectively treat depression.[24] In depressed patients, daily consumption of dietary supplements of omega-3 fatty acid that contain 1.5-2 g of EPA has been shown to stimulate mood elevation. Nevertheless, doses of omega-3 higher than 3 g do not show better effects than placebos and may be contraindicative in cases, such as those taking anticlotting drugs.[25] In addition to omega–3 fatty acids, vitamin B (e.g., folate) and magnesium deficiencies have been linked to depression.[26–28] Randomized, controlled trials that involve folate and vitamin B12 suggest that patients treated with 0.8 mg of folic acid/day or 0.4 mg of vitamin B12/day will exhibit decreased depression symptoms.[27] In addition, the results of several case studies where patients were treated with 125-300 mg of magnesium (as glycinate or taurinate) with each meal and at bedtime led to rapid recovery from major depression in < 7 days for most of the patients. Previous research has revealed the link between nutritional deficiencies and some mental disorders.[232529–32] The most common nutritional deficiencies seen in patients with mental disorders are of omega–3 fatty acids, B vitamins, minerals, and amino acids that are precursors to neurotransmitters.[20232427283033] Accumulating evidence from demographic studies indicates a link between high fish consumption and low incidence of mental disorders; this lower incidence rate being the direct result of omega–3 fatty acid intake.[233132] One to two grams of omega-3 fatty acids taken daily is the generally accepted dose for healthy individuals, but for patients with mental disorders, up to 9.6 g has been shown to be safe and effective.[34–36] Majority of Asian diets are usually also lacking in fruits and vegetables, which further lead to mineral and vitamin deficiencies. The significance of various nutrients in mental health, with special relevance to depression has been discussed below. CARBOHYDRATES Carbohydrates are naturally occurring polysaccharides and play an important role in structure and function of an organism. In higher organisms (human), they have been found to affect mood and behavior. Eating a meal which is rich in carbohydrates triggers the release of insulin in the body. Insulin helps let blood sugar into cells where it can be used for energy and simultaneously it triggers the entry of tryptophan to brain. Tryptophan in the brain affects the neurotransmitters levels. Consumption of diets low in carbohydrate tends to precipitate depression, since the production of brain chemicals serotonin and tryptophan that promote the feeling of well being, is triggered by carbohydrate rich foods. It is suggested that low glycemic index (GI) foods such as some fruits and vegetables, whole grains, pasta, etc. are more likely to provide a moderate but lasting effect on brain chemistry, mood, and energy level than the high GI foods - primarily sweets - that tend to provide immediate but temporary relief. PROTEINS Proteins are made up of amino acids and are important building blocks of life. As many as 12 amino acids are manufactured in the body itself and remaining 8 (essential amino acids) have to be supplied through diet. A high quality protein diet contains all essential amino acids. Foods rich in high quality protein include meats, milk and other dairy products, and eggs. Plant proteins such as beans, peas, and grains may be low in one or two essential amino acids. Protein intake and in turn the individual amino acids can affect the brain functioning and mental health. Many of the neurotransmitters in the brain are made from amino acids. The neurotransmitter dopamine is made from the amino acid tyrosine and the neurotransmitter serotonin is made from the tryptophan.[5] If there is a lack of any of these two amino acids, there will not be enough synthesis of the respective neurotransmitters, which is associated with low mood and aggression in the patients. The excessive buildup of amino acids may also lead to brain damage and mental retardation. For example, excessive buildup of phenylalanine in the individuals with disease called phenylketonuria can cause brain damage and mental retardation. ESSENTIAL FATTY ACIDS Omega-3 fatty acids The brain is one of the organs with the highest level of lipids (fats). Brain lipids, composed of fatty acids, are structural constituents of membranes. It has been estimated that gray matter contains 50% fatty acids that are polyunsaturated in nature (about 33% belong to the omega-3 family), and hence are supplied through diet. In one of the first experimental demonstrations of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain, the omega-3 fatty acids (specially alpha-linolenic acid, ALA) were the member to take part. An important trend has been observed from the findings of some recent studies that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications increases depression. Among the significant factors involved are the quantity and ratio of omega-6 and omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) that affect serum lipids and alter the biochemical and biophysical properties of cell membranes. It has been hypothesized that sufficient long chain PUFAs, especially DHA, may decrease the development of depression.[37] The structural and functional components of membrane in cells of brain which is a lipid-rich organ, include polar phospholipids, spingolipids, and cholesterol. The glycerophospholipids in brain consist of high proportion of PUFA derived from the essential fatty acids (EFAs), linoleic acid and α-linolenic acid. The main PUFA in the brain are DHA, derived from the omega-3 fatty acid α-linolenic acid, arachidonic acid (AA) and docosa tetraenoic acid, both derived from omega-6 fatty acid linoleic acid. Experimental studies have revealed that diets lacking omega-3 PUFA lead to considerable disturbance in neural function.[38] Studies by Marszalek and Lodish indicate that despite their abundance in the nervous system, DHA and AA cannot be synthesized by mammals de novo and hence they or their precursors have to be supplied through the diet and transported to the brain. During late gestation and the early postnatal period, neurodevelopment occurs at significantly rapid rates which make the supply of adequate quantity of PUFAs, particularly DHA, imperative to ensure neurite outgrowth in addition to appropriate development of brain and retina.[39] Bruinsma and Taren of University of Arizona College of Public Health, Tucson, USA explored the involvement of dieting-related psychological factors as potential confounders.[40] They discussed studies that have both supported and contested the proposition that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications contributes to depression. Research findings point out that an imbalance in the ratio of the EFAs, namely the omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, and/or a deficiency in omega-3 fatty acids, may be responsible for the heightened depressive symptoms associated with low plasma cholesterol. These relationships may explain the inconsistency in the results of trials on cholesterol-lowering interventions and depression. On similar lines, dieting behaviors have been associated with alterations in moods.[41] Dietary omega-3 fatty acids play a role in the prevention of some disorders including depression. Their deficiency can accelerate cerebral aging by preventing the renewal of membranes. However, the respective roles of the vascular component on one hand (where the omega-3s are active) and the cerebral parenchyma itself on the other, have not yet been clearly resolved. The role of omega–3 in certain diseases such as dyslexia and autism is suggested. It was omega–3 fatty acids that participated in the first coherent experimental demonstration of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain. Experiments were first of all carried out on x-vivo cultured brain cells (1), then on in vivo brain cells (2), finally on physicochemical, biochemical, physiological, neurosensory, and behavioral parameters (3). These findings indicated that the nature of polyunsaturated fatty acids (in particular omega–3) present in formula milks for infants (both premature and term) determines the visual, cerebral, and intellectual abilities.[16] VITAMINS B-complex vitamins Nutrition and depression are intricately and undeniably linked, as suggested by the mounting evidence by researchers in neuropsychiatry. According to a study reported in Neuropsychobiology,[42] supplementation of nine vitamins, 10 times in excess of normal recommended dietary allowance (RDA) for 1 year improved mood in both men and women. The interesting part was that these changes in mood after a year occurred even though the blood status of nine vitamins reached a plateau after 3 months. This mood improvement was particularly associated with improved vitamin B2 and B6 status. In women, baseline vitamin B1 status was linked with poor mood and an improvement in the same after 3 months was associated with improved mood. Thiamine is known to modulate cognitive performance particularly in the geriatric population.[43] Vitamin B12 (Cynocobalamin) Clinical trials have indicated that Vitamin B12 delays the onset of signs of dementia (and blood abnormalities), if it is administered in a precise clinical timing window, before the onset of the first symptoms. Supplementation with cobalamin enhances cerebral and cognitive functions in the elderly; it frequently promotes the functioning of factors related to the frontal lobe, in addition to the language function of people with cognitive disorders. Adolescents who have a borderline level of vitamin B12 deficiency develop signs of cognitive changes.[43] Folate It has been observed that patients with depression have blood folate levels, which are, on an average, 25% lower than healthy controls.[44] Low levels of folate have also been identified as a strong predisposing factor of poor outcome with antidepressant therapy. A controlled study has been reported to have shown that 500 mcg of folic acid enhanced the effectiveness of antidepressant medication.[45] Folate's critical role in brain metabolic pathways has been well recognized by various researchers who have noted that depressive symptoms are the most common neuropsychiatric manifestation of folate deficiency.[46] It is not clear yet whether poor nutrition, as a symptom of depression, causes folate deficiency or primary folate deficiency produces depression and its symptoms. MINERALS Calcium A recent study showed that selective serotonin uptake inhibitors (SSRIs) inhibit absorption of calcium into bones. In addition to this, the SSRIs can also lower blood pressure in people, resulting in falls which may lead to broken bones. Indiscriminate prescription of SSRIs by doctors and ingestion by patients at risk of depression or other mental health problems may put them at increased risk of fractures. Compounded by the fact that they may be aging and already taking other medications, may also predispose them to osteoporosis.[47] Chromium Many studies on the association of chromium in humans depression have been recorded[4849] which indicate the significance of this micronutrient in mental health. Iodine Iodine plays an important role in mental health. The iodine provided by the thyroid hormone ensures the energy metabolism of the cerebral cells. During pregnancy, the dietary reduction of iodine induces severe cerebral dysfunction, eventually leading to cretinism. Iron Iron is necessary for oxygenation and to produce energy in the cerebral parenchyma (through cytochrome oxidase), and for the synthesis of neurotransmitters and myelin. Iron deficiency is found in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity Iron in the are critical during the development of the and in with the in the with its associated deficiency is associated with disturbance in the development of cognitive Research findings out that as many as men are This in and more with of more depression than during other times in their These indicate the of in the of depression since its deficiency is known to cause and depression. Iron deficiency is for instance, with depression, and rapid a was first and by in while an of the mineral The role of has been well known in a into its its for bipolar disorder with and The therapeutic use of also its as an in depression, disorder, disorder, eating disorders, and in certain of adequate has to be taken while the mood in the can be used in patients with and The use of during and in and geriatric population needs observation about its In a of the of identified at studies, which indicate that low intake is associated with mood studies with with other populations that mood and in the of studies have shown that levels are lower in those with clinical intervention research that can influence the effectiveness of antidepressant also the brain cells the potential damage by studies have revealed the potential of the for physical development and mental development may be due to deficiency of When children and with poor nutritional status are to alterations of mental and behavioral they can be by dietary but to certain It has been observed that, of diet and meal pattern can have or immediate or effects. Dietary deficiencies of and nutrients vitamins, and such as during aging may precipitate brain which may be due to for of diet and depression which is a of to a factor that is often linked to increased and premature of aging may play an important role in this, by reducing food intake or reducing food intake in to such factors as in and poor use of prescription drugs, and and occurring in the in both and due to to They suggest changes associated with mental disorders such as dementia and depression, and and as to the of depression, people are the alternative and complementary are by the for and as a of and health and that are not currently to be a part of health need to be aware that it is likely that a of their patients with bipolar disorder might use these interventions to be and safe or to research in and brain indicates the of pathways that can provide a of the association between nutritional nervous system, and function an psychological health status. These findings may lead to of the therapeutic of dietary intervention health and health depression and other psychological disorders.

Indian Journal of Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 409 citationsread the source →

What is the contribution of smoking and socioeconomic position to ethnic inequalities in mortality in New Zealand?

Background: Mortality rates for Māori are twice those for non-Māori in New Zealand. We have assessed the contribution of tobacco smoking and socioeconomic position to these inequalities in 45-74-year-old census respondents during 1981-84 and 1996-99 (2.3 and 2.7 million person-years, respectively). Methods: We used linked census and mortality cohort datasets with measures of socioeconomic position (household income, highest educational qualification, car access, labour-force status, and neighbourhood deprivation) and smoking (never, ex, current). We used direct standardisation to adjust for smoking and Poisson regression to adjust for socioeconomic position. Findings: The apparent contribution of smoking to mortality differences between Māori and non-Māori non-Pacific people was greatest for women in 1996-99 (8% reduction in standardised rate difference); it had increased from 3% in 1981-84. The corresponding reductions in men were 5% in 1996-99 and -1% in 1981-84. The apparent contribution of socioeconomic factors to mortality differences between Māori and non-Māori non-Pacific was greatest for men (39% in 1981-84 and 37% in 1996-99) and increased over time for women (from 23% in 1981-84 to 32% in 1996-99). Interpretation: Although small, the contribution of smoking to ethnic inequalities in mortality increased over time and might grow more during the next two decades if differences in smoking between ethnic groups continue to increase. Better measurement of socioeconomic position (eg, lifecourse measures, asset wealth) might increase the proportion of ethnic inequalities attributable to socioeconomic position, perhaps to about half. Action to redress socioeconomic gaps and control of tobacco use will both be important in reducing ethnic inequalities in health.

Lancet (London, England) · 76 citationsread the source →

Increased extracellular concentrations of norepinephrine in cortex and hippocampus following vagus nerve stimulation in the rat.

The vagus nerve is an important source of afferent information about visceral states and it provides input to the locus coeruleus (LC), the major source of norepinephrine (NE) in the brain. It has been suggested that the effects of electrical stimulation of the vagus nerve on learning and memory, mood, seizure suppression, and recovery of function following brain damage are mediated, in part, by the release of brain NE. The hypothesis that left vagus nerve stimulation (VNS) at the cervical level results in increased extracellular NE concentrations in the cortex and hippocampus was tested at four stimulus intensities: 0.0, 0.25, 0.5, and 1.0 mA. Stimulation at 0.0 and 0.25 mA had no effect on NE concentrations, while the 0.5 mA stimulation increased NE concentrations significantly in the hippocampus (23%), but not the cortex. However, 1.0 mA stimulation significantly increased NE concentrations in both the cortex (39%) and hippocampus (28%) bilaterally. The increases in NE were transient and confined to the stimulation periods. VNS did not alter NE concentrations in either structure during the inter-stimulation baseline periods. No differences were observed between NE levels in the initial baseline and the post-stimulation baselines. These findings support the hypothesis that VNS increases extracellular NE concentrations in both the hippocampus and cortex.

Brain research · 324 citationsread the source →

Problematic Internet use: an overview

The “global village”, a metaphor used to describe how the Internet has shortened distances and facilitated the flow of information, has grown to over one billion users 1. Statistics from across the world highlight its reach and penetrance: 90% of South Korean households connect to high-speed, inexpensive broadband 2; Londoners spend an average of 45 days a year online, more than they spend watching TV 3; and the rate of increase in the number of Internet users in Africa and the Middle East exceeded 1,300% between 2000 and 2009 4. For the majority of Internet users, the World Wide Web represents a tremendous wellspring of opportunity that enhances well-being. For others, however, it can lead to a state that appears to meet the DSM definition of a mental disorder, described as a “clinically significant behavioral or psychological syndrome…that is associated with present distress… or with a significantly increased risk of suffering death, pain, disability, or an important loss of freedom” 5. Scientific understanding of that state has lagged behind media attention 6, in part because of inconsistency in defining the problem 7, disagreement about its very existence 8, and the variable research methodology used in studying it. Still, a body of data by scientists from the East and West (with the East increasingly leading the way) tells a cautionary tale about the Internet's potential to bring about psychological harm. In 1996, the psychologist K. Young became the first to publish a detailed case report of problematic Internet use 9. Her “patient zero” was a non-technologically oriented 43-year-old homemaker with a “content home life and no prior addiction or psychiatric history”, who, within three months of discovering chat rooms, was spending up to 60 hours per week online. She reported feeling excited in front of the computer, and depressed, anxious, and irritable when she would log off. She described having an addiction to the medium “like one would to alcohol”. Within one year of purchasing her home computer, she was ignoring household chores, had quit social activities she used to enjoy, and had become estranged from her two teenage daughters and her husband of 17 years. Based on this and other patients she interviewed, Young proposed the first set of diagnostic criteria for what she termed “Internet addiction”. She modeled them on the DSM-IV definition for substance dependence because of similarities she observed with the states of tolerance (needing more of the substance to achieve the same effect) and withdrawal (psychological and physical discomfort upon reducing or stopping the substance) 9. Others conceptualized problematic Internet use as a behavioral addiction not involving an intoxicant 10, and Young subsequently updated her definition, adapting the DSM-IV criteria for pathological gambling, an impulse control disorder often described as a behavioral addiction, into her Diagnostic Questionnaire 11 (Table 1). The questionnaire, which required at least five of the eight criteria be met for the Internet addiction diagnosis, has not received adequate psychometric testing. Shapira et al 12 proposed five years later a more inclusive diagnostic schema in the general style of the impulse control disorders. They argued that definitions based solely on substance dependence or pathological gambling were too narrow to capture the population of problematic Internet users and could lead to premature conclusions about the new disorder and the patients. They eschewed the “Internet addiction” label for lack of scientific proof for true addiction and favored the less controversial “problematic Internet use”, defining it as: a) maladaptive preoccupation with Internet use, experienced as irresistible use for periods of time longer than intended; b) significant distress or impairment resulting from the behavior; and c) the absence of other Axis I pathology that might explain the behavior, such as mania or hypomania. To date, only two studies have attempted to develop diagnostic criteria empirically by testing them against the diagnosis made on the basis of a systematic psychiatric interview. Ko et al 13 tested a set of criteria in 468 Taiwanese high school students. Starting with 13 candidate criteria, they eliminated those with low diagnostic accuracy, and determined that a cutoff of six out of the nine remaining criteria had the best diagnostic accuracy while maintaining high specificity (97.1%) and acceptable sensitivity (87.5%). The criterion for functional impairment was listed separately as criterion B and was required for the diagnosis (Table 2). In a second study, Ko et al 14 confirmed the diagnostic accuracy of their criteria in an older cohort of 216 Taiwanese college students. However, the relatively small size of both studies and the non-representative nature of the groups studied limit the applicability of the proposed criteria to the general population. Several assessment scales have been proposed to screen for, and help diagnose, problematic Internet use. As a group, these instruments show no consensus on the underlying dimensions that constitute the condition 6,15. In addition to Young's Diagnostic Questionnaire, two are in relatively common use in research and/or clinical settings: Young's Internet Addiction Test 16 and the Chen Internet Addiction Scale 17. Young's Internet Addiction Test 16 consists of 20 “how-often” questions, each rated on a scale of 1 to 5 (1=rarely; 2=occasionally; 3=frequently; 4=often; 5=always.) A score of 80 or above is consistent with problematic use (Table 3). The psychometric properties of the instrument were studied in 86 subjects 18. Six factors were extracted from the questionnaire: salience, excessive use, neglect of work, anticipation, lack of control, and neglect of social life. These factors showed good concurrent validity and internal consistency. Salience explained most of the variance and was also found to be the most reliable as indicated by its Cronbach's alpha. However, the selection bias introduced by online recruitment and the small size of the study limit its value. The Chen Internet Addiction Scale 17 is a self-report instrument composed of 26 items rated on a 4-point Likert scale (adapted in Table 4). It assesses five domains of Internet-related problems: compulsive use, withdrawal, tolerance, interpersonal and health consequences, and time management difficulties. Scores range from 26 to 104. In a study of 454 Taiwanese adolescents who completed the scale and received a structured diagnostic interview, a cutoff of 64 was shown to have high diagnostic accuracy and specificity (88% and 92.6%, respectively) 19. The internal reliability of the scale and subscales in the original study ranged from 0.79 to 0.93 17. Due to the lack of consensus on diagnostic criteria and the dearth of large epidemiological studies, the prevalence of problematic Internet use in the general population has not been established. Overall, prevalence surveys conducted in various countries fall into two main categories, online vs. offline studies, with the former typically yielding higher rates, most likely because of inherent selection bias 20. Only two epidemiological studies exploring the prevalence of problematic Internet use in the general population have been published. One was conducted in the US, the other in Norway 20,21. The US study used random-digit telephone dialing (cellular phone numbers were not included) to interview 2,513 adults taken from all 50 states in a manner proportional to the population in each state 20. More than half of the people reached agreed to be interviewed. Participants’ average age was 48, and 51% fell in the middle class socioeconomic stratum. 68.9% were regular Internet users. The authors’ diagnostic definition, based on published criteria and on similarities with impulse control disorders, substance dependence and obsessive-compulsive disorder, required: a) Internet use that interferes in personal relationships; b) preoccupation with the Internet when offline; c) unsuccessful attempts at quitting or cutting down; and d) staying online longer than intended. This definition yielded a point prevalence of 0.7%. Less stringent definitions yielded higher prevalence rates, and individual features consistent with problematic Internet use were endorsed by as many as 13.7% (respondents who found it hard to stay offline for days in a row). In the second study, Bakken et al 21 mailed Young's Diagnostic Questionnaire to 10,000 inhabitants of Norway, randomly selected from a database of the entire population. 3,399 completed questionnaires were returned (a somewhat lower response rate than the US study). Recipients of the mailed questionnaire also had the option of completing it online. Among respondents, 87% were Internet users. The prevalence of “addicted Internet use” (≥5 questions answered “yes”) was calculated to be 1%, whereas the prevalence of “at risk” Internet use (3–4 questions answered “yes”) was 5.2%. Multivariate analysis showed young age, male gender, higher educational achievement, and financial stress to be positively associated with “problematic Internet use” (defined by the authors to include both “Internet addicts” and “at risk” respondents). Prevalence rates among adolescents have been researched more extensively, perhaps because the so-called “digital natives” grew up incorporating the Internet in many aspects of life and as a result are perceived to be at higher risk. However, even when online-based surveys are excluded, the results can vary widely and are difficult to compare, due to differences in Internet access, recruitment methodology, the exact age bracket studied, and the definitions utilized. Considering only relatively large and offline studies, research from China 22, South Korea 23,24, Greece 25, Norway 26, and Iran 27 has yielded prevalence estimates ranging between 2% and 11%. Problematic Internet use has not been incorporated into large-scale epidemiological studies aimed at estimating the relative prevalence of mental disorders. Still, a review of published studies reveals that the presence of other psychiatric conditions in patients with problematic Internet use is the rule rather than the exception 6. The studies, however, were not designed or statistically powered to detect the nature of the association (cause, effect, or independent). In Bakken's general-population study 21, based on subjects’ self-report, 41.4% of Internet “addicts” reported feelings of depression in the 12-month period prior to the study, compared to 15.8% of non-problematic users. Sleep disturbances, anxious feelings, and alcohol and substance abuse were also more common (38.6% vs. 26.4%, 36.4% vs. 5%, and 13.6% vs. 1.1%, respectively). However, the questions used to assess co-occurring psychological impairment were not based on established criteria for mood, sleep, anxiety, or substance use disorders. Two US case series involved face-to-face interviews of adult patients with problematic Internet use. Black et al 28 assessed 21 subjects with the Diagnostic Interview Schedule and found the lifetime prevalence of mood disorders and major depression to be 33% and 15%, respectively. Further, 38% had a lifetime substance use disorder and 19% had a lifetime diagnosis of anxiety disorder. In a case series that included 20 patients, Shapira et al 29 found a very high (70%) lifetime prevalence for bipolar affective disorder, type I or II, compared with 15% for major depression. Fifty-five percent had a lifetime prevalence of substance abuse, and 45% met criteria for social anxiety disorder. Fifty percent of subjects had a lifetime diagnosis of an impulse control disorder. The authors highlight their observation that patients’ Internet-related symptoms were more impulsive and egosyntonic than compulsive and egodystonic, concluding that problematic Internet use resembles the DSM-IV definition of an impulse control disorder more closely than that of obsessive-compulsive disorder. Our clinical experience supports this conclusion. As a group, surveys conducted among high school and college students show similarly high comorbidity rates with mood and anxiety disorders, but a link between attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and problematic Internet use seems more obvious than among adults. One study in 752 South Korean elementary students found that 33% of those with ADHD also met criteria for problematic Internet use 30. Another study in 216 Taiwanese college students showed that 32% subjects with problematic Internet use also had ADHD compared to only 8% of regular Internet users 31. Whether Web-based activities appeal to the short attention span of ADHD sufferers or whether excessive Internet use may cause inattention remains to be elucidated. The clinical evaluation of the patient with problematic Internet use should include a careful assessment of the comorbid conditions frequently present. Those should then be treated according to established treatment guidelines. To the extent that the Internet-related problem may stem from another diagnosis (e.g., a patient with severe social anxiety who starts leading a “virtual” life at the expense of offline interactions), it might improve as the primary condition is addressed. Pharmacotherapeutic and psychotherapeutic interventions specific to problematic Internet use have not yet received adequate testing in large, rigorous studies. Pharmacotherapy often begins with selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs). However, while effective in treating obsessive-compulsive disorder, SSRIs have shown mixed results in impulse control disorders 32,33,34,35–36. In light of the greater similarity between problematic Internet use and impulse control disorders compared to obsessive-compulsive disorder 29, it is unclear whether SSRIs will ultimately prove beneficial, and no double-blind placebo-controlled studies have been published so far. One discontinuation study tested escitalopram, 20 mg/day, in 19 subjects with problematic Internet use 37. During the 10-week open-label phase, subjects showed significant decreases in weekly hours spent online (from a mean of 36.8 hours to 16.5 hours) and improvement in global functioning. At the end of the 10 weeks, subjects were blindly randomized to either continued escitalopram treatment or to placebo. Beyond that, they were followed for 9 weeks. No significant difference was seen between the two groups at the end of the second phase, as gains achieved at week 10 were maintained in both treatment groups. The authors speculate that nine weeks may have not been sufficient for the effect to be lost in the placebo group or for additional gains to be made in the escitalopram group, but do not rule out the possibility that the improvement seen in the open-label phase may have been a placebo response. One case study reported successful treatment with naltrexone 38, a drug that has shown benefit in other impulse control disorders 39,40. The patient was a 31 year old male with compulsive cybersexual behavior who had failed antidepressants, group and individual psychotherapy, Sexual Addicts Anonymous, and pastoral counseling. Naltrexone (150 mg/day), gradually added to a stable dose of sertraline which on its own had been ineffective in treating his problematic Internet use, helped induce a three-year remission. The authors hypothesize that, by blocking the capacity of endogenous opioids to trigger dopamine release in response to reward, naltrexone may block the reinforcing nature of compulsive Internet sexual activity. Another case study reported the successful use of an atypical antipsychotic, quetiapine, 200 mg/day, gradually added to citalopram, in a 23 year old subject with problematic Internet use 41. The improvement was maintained at four-month follow-up. More recently, a study tested methylphenidate in 62 children with ADHD who were Internet video game players 42. Participants’ average age was around 9. After 8 weeks of treatment (average dose 30.5 mg/day), Internet usage decreased significantly and correlated with reduction in ADHD symptoms. The authors cautiously suggest that methylphenidate might be beneficial as a treatment for problematic Internet use, especially when co-occurring with ADHD. Of the psychotherapy approaches used, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) has received the most empiric investigation. The largest study enrolled 114 adult subjects and employed CBT interventions including: keeping a daily log of Internet activity, teaching time management skills, and confronting cognitive distortions and rationalizations frequently used by patients to justify continued Internet usage, such as “just a few more minutes won't hurt” 43. Most subjects were able to control their symptoms by the eighth session, and improvement was sustained over a 6-month follow-up. For children and adolescents, family-based interventions that improve communication and teach family monitoring of Internet use can be helpful 44. However, the intensive (and typically very expensive) residential treatment options that have received much media attention have undergone little empiric investigation to warrant a strong recommendation 2,45. The same applies to online treatment websites that encourage the person with problematic Internet use to “click here if you are addicted to the Internet”. For a medium that has so radically changed the way we conduct our lives, the Internet's effects on our psychological health remain understudied. Simply stating that similar fears were raised when the radio, movies and early video games were introduced is not sufficient: the immersive and interactive qualities of the virtual world, and its sheer penetrance, make it potentially more serious. Also deserving of exploration are the more subtle psychological changes that occur in the virtual world, such as online disinhibition and increased risk-taking 46. Those changes are not necessarily evidence of “Internet addiction”, and may not be pathological, but, as important features of the new virtual psychology, should also be studied. As our field continues to debate whether their condition belongs in the next edition of the DSM 47, patients continue to present with symptoms born out of the digital age, and their symptoms are changing as the technology evolves from browsers, to “crackberries”, to “smart phones” that combine texting, talking, video games, and browsing in one device that to many is like a new appendage. Even the “problematic Internet use” designation now seems outdated, which is why some have wisely opted for “pathological use of electronic media”, instead 47. Technology, like media outlets, remains far ahead of scientific investigation. Given the dramatic changes that our society is undergoing as a result of the Internet revolution, it behooves us to try to bridge the gap.

World Psychiatry · 340 citationsread the source →

An attachment perspective on psychopathology

Attachment theory 1,2,3 has proven to be a very fruitful framework for studying emotion regulation and mental health. In particular, research on adult attachment processes and individual differences in attachment orientations has provided strong evidence for the anxiety-buffering function of what Bowlby 2 called the attachment behavioral system and for the relevance of attachment-related individual differences to coping with stress, managing distress, and retaining psychological resilience 4. In this paper, we offer a brief overview of the attachment perspective on psychopathology. Following a brief account of attachment theory's basic concepts, we review research findings showing that attachment insecurities — called attachment anxiety and avoidance in the theory — are associated with mental disorders, and that increases in attachment security are an important part of successfully treating these disorders. Bowlby 2 claimed that human beings are born with an innate psychobiological system (the attachment behavioral system) that motivates them to seek proximity to significant others (attachment figures) in times of need. Bowlby 1 also outlined major individual differences in the functioning of the attachment system. Interactions with attachment figures who are available in times of need, and who are sensitive and responsive to bids for proximity and support, promote a stable sense of attachment security and build positive mental representations of self and others. But when a person's attachment figures are not reliably available and supportive, proximity seeking fails to relieve distress, felt security is undermined, negative models of self and others are formed, and the likelihood of later emotional problems and maladjustment increases. When testing this theory in studies of adults, most researchers have focused on the systematic pattern of relational expectations, emotions, and behavior that results from one's attachment history — what Hazan and Shaver 5 called attachment style. Research clearly indicates that attachment styles can be measured in terms of two independent dimensions, attachment-related anxiety and avoidance 6. A person's position on the anxiety dimension indicates the degree to which he or she worries that a partner will not be available and responsive in times of need. A person's position on the avoidance dimension indicates the extent to which he or she distrusts relationship partners’ good will and strives to maintain behavioral independence, self-reliance, and emotional distance. The two dimensions can be measured with reliable and valid self-report scales (e.g., 6), and they are associated in theoretically predictable ways with relationship quality and adjustment 4. Mikulincer and Shaver 4 proposed that a person's location in the two-dimensional conceptual space defined by attachment anxiety and avoidance reflects both the person's sense of attachment security and the ways in which he or she deals with threats and distress. People who score low on these dimensions are generally secure and tend to employ constructive and effective affect-regulation strategies. Those who score high on either the attachment anxiety or the avoidance dimension (or both) suffer from insecurity and tend to rely on what Cassidy and Kobak 7 called secondary attachment strategies, either deactivating or hyperactivating their attachment system in an effort to cope with threats. According to Mikulincer and Shaver 4, people scoring high on avoidant attachment tend to rely on deactivating strategies — trying not to seek proximity, denying attachment needs, and avoiding closeness and interdependence in relationships. These strategies develop in relationships with attachment figures who disapprove of and punish closeness and expressions of need or vulnerability 8. In contrast, people scoring high on attachment anxiety tend to rely on hyperactivating strategies — energetic attempts to achieve proximity, support, and love combined with lack of confidence that these resources will be provided and with resentment and anger when they are not provided 7. These reactions occur in relationships in which an attachment figure is sometimes responsive but unreliably so, placing the needy person on a partial reinforcement schedule that rewards persistence in proximity-seeking attempts, because they sometimes succeed. Individual differences in attachment styles begin in interactions with parents during infancy and childhood (e.g., 9). However, Bowlby 3 claimed that meaningful relational interactions during adolescence and adulthood can move a person from one region to another of the two-dimensional conceptual space defined by attachment anxiety and avoidance. Moreover, a growing body of research shows that attachment style can change, subtly or dramatically, depending on current context, recent experiences, and recent relationships (e.g., 10,11). According to attachment theory, interactions with inconsistent, unreliable, or insensitive attachment figures interfere with the development of a secure, stable mental foundation; reduce resilience in coping with stressful life events; and predispose a person to break down psychologically in times of crisis 3. Attachment insecurity can therefore be viewed as a general vulnerability to mental disorders, with the particular symptomatology depending on genetic, developmental, and environmental factors. Mikulincer and Shaver 4 reviewed hundreds of cross-sectional, longitudinal, and prospective studies of both clinical and non-clinical samples and found that attachment insecurity was common among people with a wide variety of mental disorders, ranging from mild distress to severe personality disorders and even schizophrenia. Consistently compatible results have also been reported in recent studies. For example, attachment insecurities (of both the anxious and avoidant varieties) are associated with depression (e.g., 12), clinically significant anxiety (e.g., 13), obsessive-compulsive disorder (e.g., 14), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) (e.g., 15), suicidal tendencies (e.g., 16), and eating disorders (e.g., 17). Attachment insecurity is also a key feature of many personality disorders (e.g., 18,19). However, the specific kind of attachment insecurity differs across disorders. Anxious attachment is associated with dependent, histrionic, and borderline disorders, whereas avoidant attachment is associated with schizoid and avoidant disorders. Crawford et al 18 found that attachment anxiety is associated with what Livesley 20 called the “emotional dysregulation” component of personality disorders, which includes identity confusion, anxiety, emotional lability, cognitive distortions, submissiveness, oppositionality, self-harm, narcissism, and suspiciousness. Crawford et al 19 also found that avoidant attachment is associated with what Livesley 20 called the “inhibitedness” component of personality problems, including restricted expression of emotions, problems with intimacy, and social avoidance. Another related issue concerning the associations between attachment insecurities and psychopathology is the extent to which attachment insecurities are a sufficient cause of mental disorders. In our view, beyond disorders such as separation anxiety and pathological grief, in which attachment injuries are the main causes and themes, attachment insecurities per se are unlikely to be sufficient causes of mental disorders. Other factors (e.g., genetically determined temperament; intelligence; life history, including abuse) are likely to converge with or amplify the effects of attachment experiences on the way to psychopathology. Consider, for example, the relation between attachment-related avoidance and psychological distress. Many studies of large community samples have found no association between avoidant attachment and self-report measures of global distress 4. However, studies that focus on highly stressful events, such as exposure to missile attacks, living in a dangerous neighborhood, or giving birth to a handicapped infant, have indicated that avoidance is related to greater distress and poorer long-term adjustment 4. Life history factors are also important. For example, the association between attachment insecurity and depression is higher among adults with a childhood history of physical, psychological, or sexual abuse (e.g., 21). Stressful life events, poverty, physical health problems, and involvement in turbulent romantic relationships during adolescence also strengthen the link between attachment insecurity and psychopathology (e.g., 22). The causal links between attachment and psychopathology are also complicated by research findings showing that psychological problems can increase attachment insecurity. Davila et al 23, for example, found that late adolescent women who became less securely attached over periods of 6 to 24 months were more likely than their peers to have a history of psychopathology. Cozzarelli et al 24 found that women who moved in the direction of insecure attachment over a 2-year period following abortion were more likely than other women who had an abortion to have a prior history of depression or abuse. Solomon et al 25 assessed attachment insecurities and PTSD symptoms among Israeli ex-prisoners of war (along with a matched control group of veterans) 18 and 30 years after their release from captivity. Attachment anxiety and avoidance increased over time among the ex-prisoners, and the increases were predicted by the severity of PTSD symptoms at the first wave of measurement. Overall, attachment insecurities seem to contribute nonspecifically to many kinds of psychopathology. However, particular forms of attachment insecurity seem to predispose a person to particular configurations of mental disorders. The attachment-psychopathology link is moderated by a large array of biological, psychological, and socio-cultural factors, and mental disorders per se can erode a person's sense of attachment security. If attachment insecurities are risk factors for psychopathology, then the creation, maintenance, or restoration of a sense of attachment security should increase resilience and improve mental health. According to attachment theory, interactions with available and supportive attachment figures impart a sense of safety, trigger positive emotions (e.g., relief, satisfaction, gratitude, love), and provide psychological resources for dealing with problems and adversities. Secure individuals remain relatively unperturbed during times of stress, recover faster from episodes of distress, and experience longer periods of positive affectivity, which contributes to their overall emotional well-being and mental health. In some of our studies, we have examined the effects of increased security on various indicators of mental health by experimentally activating mental representations of supportive attachment figures (e.g., 26,27). These research techniques, which we 11 refer to as “security priming”, include subliminal pictures suggesting attachment-figure availability, subliminal names of people designated by participants as security-enhancing attachment figures, guided imagery highlighting the availability and supportiveness of an attachment figure, and visualization of the faces of security-enhancing attachment figures. Security priming improves participants’ moods even in threatening contexts and eliminates the detrimental effects of threats on positive moods (e.g., 26). Mikulincer et al 28 found that subliminal priming with security-related words mitigated cognitive symptoms of PTSD (heightened accessibility of trauma-related words in a Stroop-color naming task) in a non-clinical sample. Admoni 29 found that priming the names of each participant's security providers mitigated two cognitive symptoms of eating disorders (distorted body perception and heightened accessibility of food-related words in a Stroop task) in a sample of women hospitalized for eating disorders. There is also preliminary evidence that a sense of security provided by a psychotherapist improves a client's mental health. In a study based on data from the multi-site National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) Treatment of Depression Collaborative Research Program, Zuroff and Blatt 30 found that a client's positive appraisals of his or her therapist's sensitivity and supportiveness predicted relief from depression and maintenance of therapeutic benefits over an 18-month period. The results were not attributable to patient characteristics or severity of depression. In a one-year prospective study of the effectiveness of residential treatment of high-risk adolescents, Gur 31 found that staff members’ provision of a sense of attachment security in the adolescents resulted in lower rates of anger, depression, and behavioral problems. Although these preliminary findings are encouraging, there is still a great need for additional well-controlled research examining the long-term effects of security-enhancing therapeutic figures on clients’ mental health. According to attachment theory 3, the linkage between attachment insecurities (whether in the form of anxiety, avoidance, or both) and psychopathology is mediated by several pathways. In this section, we will review the most important of these pathways. According to attachment theory and research, lack of parental sensitivity and responsiveness contributes to disorders of the self, characterized by lack of self-cohesion, doubts about one's internal coherence and continuity over time, unstable self-esteem, and over-dependence on other people's approval (e.g., 32,33). Insecure people are likely to be overly self-critical, plagued by self-doubts, or prone to using defenses, such as destructive perfectionism, to counter feelings of worthlessness and hopelessness (e.g., 34). These dysfunctional beliefs about oneself increase insecure people's risk for developing mental disorders. Attachment research has also shown that attachment insecurities are associated with pathological narcissism (e.g., 35). Whereas avoidant attachment is associated with overt narcissism or grandiosity, which includes both self-praise and denial of weaknesses 36, attachment anxiety is associated with covert narcissism, characterized by self-focused attention, hypersensitivity to other people's evaluations, and an exaggerated sense of entitlement 36. According to attachment theory, interactions with available attachment figures and the resulting sense of attachment security provide actual and symbolic supports for learning constructive emotion-regulation strategies. For example, interactions with emotionally accessible and responsive others provide a context in which a child can learn that acknowledgment and display of emotions is an important step toward restoring emotional balance, and that it is useful and socially acceptable to express, explore, and try to understand one's feelings 37. Unlike relatively secure people, avoidant individuals often prefer to cordon off emotions from their thoughts and actions. As a result, they tend to present a façade of security and composure, but leave suppressed distress unresolved in ways that impair their ability to deal with life's inevitable adversities. This impairment is particularly likely during prolonged, demanding stressful experiences that require active coping with a problem and mobilization of external sources of support (e.g., 38). People who score high on attachment anxiety, in contrast, often find negative emotions to be congruent with their attachment-system hyperactivation. For them, “emotion regulation” can mean emotion amplification and exaggeration of worries, depressive reactions to actual or potential losses and failures, and PTSD intrusion symptoms following traumas. Attachment anxiety is also associated with socially destructive outbursts of anger and impulsive, demanding behavior toward relationship partners, sometimes including violence 4. According to attachment theory, recurrent failure to obtain support from attachment figures and to sustain a sense of security, and the resulting reliance on secondary attachment strategies (hyperactivation and deactivation), interfere with the acquisition of social skills and create serious problems in interpersonal relations. Bartholomew and Horowitz 32, using as an assessment device the Inventory of Interpersonal Problems 39, found that attachment anxiety was associated with more interpersonal problems in general. Secure individuals did not show notable elevations in any particular sections of the problems circle, but avoidant people generally had problems with nurturance (being cold, introverted, or competitive), and anxious people had problems with emotionality (e.g., being overly expressive). These problems seem to underlie insecure individuals’ self-reported loneliness and social isolation (e.g., 40) and their relatively low relationship satisfaction, more frequent relationship breakups, and more frequent conflicts and violence 4. Attachment insecurities are associated with a wide variety of mental disorders, ranging from mild negative affectivity to severe, disorganizing, and paralyzing personality disorders. The evidence suggests that insecure attachment orientations (whether anxious or avoidant) are fairly general pathogenic states. Although many of the research findings supporting these ideas are correlational, several studies show a prospective connection between attachment insecurities and vulnerability to disorders. From a therapeutic standpoint, we have reviewed preliminary evidence that situationally heightening people's sense of attachment security reduces the likelihood and intensity of psychiatric symptoms (e.g., PTSD, eating disorders). This evidence underscores the soothing, healing, therapeutic effects of actual support offered by relationship partners, including therapists, and the comfort and safety offered by mental representations of supportive experiences and loving and caring attachment figures. The research evidence causes us to be optimistic about the utility of clinical interventions that increase clients’ sense of attachment security. In the long run, research on attachment security and insecurity, and on the connections between insecurity and psychopathology, should contribute to a strongly social conception of the human mind and its vulnerability to pathologies. In a pioneering chapter on the social neuroscience of attachment processes, Coan 41 proposed what he calls social baseline theory. According to this theory, the human brain evolved in a highly social environment, and many of its basic functions rely on social co-regulation of emotions and physiological states. This means that, rather than conceptualizing human beings as separate entities whose interactions with each other need to be understood, it makes more sense to consider social relatedness and its mental correlates as the normal “baseline” condition. Using this as a starting point helps us to see why experiences of separation, isolation, rejection, abuse, and neglect are so psychologically painful, and why dysfunctional relationships are often the causes or amplifiers of mental disorders.

World Psychiatry · 939 citationsread the source →

A social neuroscience perspective on clinical empathy

Clinical empathy is an important element of quality health care. Empathic communication is associated with improved patient satisfaction, increased adherence to treatment, and fewer malpractice complaints 1. Patients' perceptions of their physicians' empathy are positively related to more favorable health outcomes 2-4. In addition to improving patient outcomes, clinical empathy is associated with increased overall well-being for the physician 5. High levels of practitioner empathy have been associated with decreased burnout, personal distress, depression and anxiety, along with increased life satisfaction and psychological well-being 6, 7. Despite increasing appreciation of the value of empathy, medical educators continue to struggle with how best to educate students and residents on empathy maintenance. There have been several promising creative approaches that have shown demonstrable short-term success 8. However, there is a lack of evidence for enduring success, that is, for interventions during medical education that will enable physicians to sustain empathy throughout their careers. A more comprehensive and precise understanding of the subcomponents of empathy and how they are influenced by stress and anxiety is needed in order to design targeted interventions. Empathy is difficult to define, and an operational definition remains elusive. In medicine, empathy has often been conceptualized as consisting of two primary features: cognitive empathy, defined as the ability to recognize and understand another's experience, to communicate and confirm that understanding with the other person, and to take effective action to then act appropriately in a helpful manner 9, and affective empathy, defined as emotional resonance with the patient 10. Cognitive empathy has been singled out as beneficial in the clinical relationship, while affective empathy has been viewed as interfering with the physician's ability to make effective diagnoses and facilitate better outcomes. This has resulted in the teaching and practice of “detached concern”, a process where physicians establish a certain emotional distance from their patients in order to maintain objectivity and limit exposure to the negative emotions routinely experienced by those patients 11. However, recent research has demonstrated that the underlying rationale for implementing a “detached concern” approach is no longer tenable. First, affective engagement contributes to empathy, improving cognitive accuracy as well as affective understanding 12. Second, patients respond differently to emotionally engaged physicians. Patients who perceive their physicians as emotionally attuned or genuinely concerned disclose more, are more adherent to treatment, and show greater agency in addressing serious health problems such as cancer 11. Furthermore, there is now convincing empirical evidence that cognitive and affective aspects interact in the experience of empathy 13. Finally, the primary motivation behind the “detached concern” approach, that emotional connection will necessarily lead individuals into emotional turmoil, is not supported by the literature 14. Despite the clear importance of empathy in clinical settings, many physicians experience difficulty empathizing with their patients. For instance, a study which coded interviews between physicians and lung cancer patients found that, out of 384 empathic opportunities – defined as patients' statements including an explicit description of emotion or patients' statements or clues that indicated an underlying emotion – physicians responded empathically to only 39 (10%), most often reacting with little emotional support and shifting to biomedical questions and statements 15. Using patient-physician interaction videos where students are taught to identify and code these types of empathic opportunities, as well as what would be appropriate empathic responses, could help them more effectively address those opportunities. Additionally, sustaining empathy during distressing moments begins with doctors learning to take their own emotional temperatures, so that they can notice when they are anxious and take a deep breath or count to ten before responding to the patient. Both implementing mindfulness skills 16 and learning to return focus on the patient by becoming curious about what the patient is most concerned about at that moment can help physicians maintain empathy 11. Intensive training in mindful communication has been shown to reduce psychological distress and burnout, and increase empathy 17. The vast majority of individuals have the capacity for empathy, and research suggests that medical students start school with similar or higher levels of empathy compared to an age-matched control group 18. However, empathy significantly declines over the course of medical school 10. The precise underlying causes of this decline are not well understood, and multiple factors likely play a role. The decrease has been attributed to a curriculum that promotes the objectification of the patient 19, increasing workload, mistreatment by supervisors, and lack of emotional support 6, 20. High levels of burnout, personal distress, depression and anxiety have also been found to contribute to the erosion of empathy in medical school 7, 20. Notably, the decline in empathy is not consistent across students. A longitudinal study of 446 medical students found two distinct groups, with 70% showing a significant decline on the Jefferson Scale of Physician Empathy, and 30% seeming to have protective factors that neutralize the erosion of empathy 10. This study demonstrated that individuals in patient oriented specialties showed less decline in empathy than those in technology oriented specialties, and suggested that students with individual traits that protect against empathy erosion self-select into the more patient focused specialties 10. This could be the case, or it could be that training for patient focused areas places more emphasis on skills such as listening to the patient and how to counteract objectification of the patient, important to maintaining empathy in a patient-physician interaction. Additionally, greater perceived social support from faculty and greater satisfaction with the learning quality of the environment have been associated with increased resilience to burnout, and high levels of stress and fatigue have been associated with decreased resilience to burnout 21. As increased burnout has previously been associated with decreased empathy in medical students 22, it is possible that these protective factors might also contribute to maintaining empathy. Empathy is a natural socio-emotional competency that has evolved with the mammalian brain to form and maintain social bonds, and which encompasses different components 13. Affective sharing, the first element of empathy to appear during ontogeny, refers to the unconscious sharing of the affective state of another, which can be assessed by measures of concordance of skin conductance (an index of autonomic arousal) between two individuals 23. Empathic understanding entails the conscious awareness of the emotional state of another person. Empathic concern refers to a motivation to care for someone in need. Successful emotion regulation enables the control of emotion, drive and motivation in the service of adaptive behavior. Even though these components are intertwined and not independent of one another, it is helpful to consider them separately, as each contributes to various aspects of the experience of empathy, and could be the target of specific interventions to promote clinical empathy in medical students 24. Recent work in social neuroscience using functional neuroimaging demonstrates that the affective, cognitive and regulatory components of empathy involve interacting neural circuits 25. Empathic arousal is mediated by strong bidirectional connections between the brainstem, amygdala and sensory cortices, as well as connections with the hypothalamus, insula and somatosensory cortex 13, 24. The cognitive aspects of empathy, such as emotion understanding and emotion regulation, are closely related to processes involved in perspective taking, self-regulation, and executive attention subserved by the medial prefrontal cortex, dorsolateral prefrontal cortex and temporo-parietal junction. Finally, the ability to feel concern and care for others has deep evolutionary roots that likely evolved in the context of parental care 26. Its neural underpinnings are found in subcortical neural systems similar to those known to regulate maternal behavior, especially the hypothalamus and orbitofrontal cortex 27. These components differently contribute to the experience of clinical empathy. Affective sharing may act as a gain antecedent to empathic understanding, while cognitive components are important for representing the mental states of self and other, necessary to make decisions in a medical context 24. Importantly, the type of emotion regulation an individual employs largely determines whether cognitive resources are drained or primed 28. Specifically, research shows that a detached perspective can quickly dampen emotional reactions or filter out emotional information. This can be adaptive to a surgeon while operating on his anesthetized patient, but maladaptive when the same physician interacts with his patient after the surgery 28. This example illustrates the flexibility of emotion regulation in clinical settings, depending on both the physician's goals and the patient's needs. The perception of pain in others acts as an empathic signal, alerting individuals that another person is at risk, attracting their attention and motivating social behaviors. The neural response to the pain and distress of others, a situation familiar to physicians, has been used in social neuroscience research as a window into the neurobiological underpinnings of empathy. Several regions involved in the experience of physical pain, including the anterior cingulate cortex, insula, periaqueductal gray, orbitofrontal cortex and amygdala, are activated by the perception or even the imagination of another individual in pain 29. Importantly, the pattern of neural response is highly flexible and can be modulated by a number of contextual, cognitive, social and interpersonal factors 25. In the context of medicine, two neuroimaging experiments examined the neurophysiological response to the perception of pain in physicians 30, 31. Physicians as well as matched non-physician controls underwent functional magnetic resonance imaging while watching videos of needles being inserted into another person's body parts (face, hands and feet), as well as videos of the same areas being touched by a cotton bud 30. Physicians showed significantly less activation in brain areas involved in empathy for pain (anterior cingulate cortex, insula) than did non-physicians. In addition, physicians showed significantly greater activation in areas involved in executive control, self-regulation, and mental states understanding. These findings suggest less empathic arousal and greater cognitive regulation of an emotional response among the physicians, and indicate that physicians' down-regulation of the pain response dampens their negative arousal to the pain of others. This may have beneficial consequences by freeing up cognitive resources necessary for being of assistance and perhaps even for expressing empathic concern. These results may also inform individual differences in empathic decline and professional distress. Meta-analyses show that clinicians' distress is a key determinant of empathy decline 6. Medical students who are most vulnerable to professional distress, which may lead to emotional exhaustion, detachment and a low sense of accomplishment, may be those who have difficulties regulating their negative emotions. On the other hand, students with overly suppressed pain responses and insufficient negative arousal will also have problems with empathy. Some modicum empathic arousal (or affective sharing) may be necessary to help physicians attune to and empathically understand patients' emotions. A positive emotional reappraisal requires emotional content from the patient to be reinterpreted, molding potentially important information once it is available 28. Empathic disposition varies across individuals, and these differences are likely in part accounted for by interactions between an individual's life history, psychological traits and genetic makeup. Attachment is one construct, first proposed by Bowlby 32, which appears to reside at the interface of all three of these determinants. Attachment theory offers a compelling framework for understanding one's capacity to connect with others and develop supportive relationships as coping resources, and predicts individual differences in empathy 33. Security of attachment correlates with the individual degree of empathy and successful emotion regulation, and is inversely related to pain report and emotional distress 34. Empirical research also indicates that attachment security provides a foundation for empathic concern and caregiving 35. Importantly, these attachment styles are relatively stable across the lifespan. In recent years, a great deal of work has begun to reveal some of the underlying neuroanatomical and neurochemical foundations of attachment-related processes and the variance in such attributes both between and within species 36. Such research has identified a number of neuropeptides that are clearly involved in an array of attachment-related social behaviors, including opioids, vasopressin and oxytocin. Oxytocin, for example, has been demonstrated to play a central role in the initiation of maternal behaviors, social recognition and pair bonding in rodents 37. Studies in humans have demonstrated that oxytocin infusion can modulate a number of attachment-related behaviors, including trust, generosity, empathic concern, and empathic accuracy 38. Oxytocin administration selectively reduces emotional arousal to threatening social images 39 and differentially modulates visual attention toward social signals of positive approach 40. Moreover, it appears that individuals lacking high quality social connections show significantly reduced responses to oxytocin administration 39, which may reflect reduced receptor sensitivity. Research into the influence of genetic variation within the oxytocin receptor has provided converging evidence of the role that oxytocin plays in human social behavior. Polymorphisms within the oxytocin receptor have been shown to be related to affiliative behavior, behavioral and dispositional empathy, and perceived social connectedness 41. Similarly, genetic variation in the oxytocin receptor is related to decreased neuroendocrine and autonomic reactivity to social stress and interacts with perceived social support to dampen physiological reactivity to social-evaluative threat 41. Importantly, this does not suggest that empathy-related behaviors are genetically determined. Particular alleles in the oxytocin receptor system (or vasopressin or opioid systems) previously considered “vulnerability genes” can actually be viewed as “plasticity genes” in that they allow some individuals to be more sensitive to the social environment in general 42. This is consistent with the observation of large individual differences in what can be viewed as a “biological sensitivity to context”, in which people are especially interpersonally adept in socially supportive environments and especially anxious and withdrawn in noxious environments 43. A meta-analysis of studies that evaluated various contextual influences on patient outcomes found that physicians who adopted a reassuring warm and friendly approach were more effective than those employing detached concern 44. Empathic medical care may provide patients with a sense of personal connection and perceived control over their health that results in more effective coping strategies, influencing health outcomes through chronic modulation of physiological stress responses. In fact, a quarter century of research in neuroendocrinology and stress physiology has clearly demonstrated that the perception of social support and stressor controllability can have profound influences on the hormonal, cardiovascular and immunological response to a broad array of physiological responses in both humans and non-human animal models 45. Indeed, perceived controllability over a stressor is associated with prefrontal cortex mediated regulation of limbic (amygdala and hypothalamus) and brainstem (dorsal raphe nucleus) structures associated with neuroendocrine and autonomic nervous system reactivity 45. This provides a direct pathway through which the perception of one's ability to control aspects of his/her disease is capable of regulating physiological processes ranging from glucose metabolism and blood pressure to immunomodulation and neurogenesis 46. Physicians routinely present information to their patients capable of generating substantial physiological stress responses. In many such cases, the physician-patient relationship represents the front line in the battle against disease, as it has the potential to shape the endogenous responses to illness-related stress that, in some cases, can have effects similar to pharmacological interventions 3. Empathic concern, as opposed to detached concern, allows physicians to better understand their patients and modify their approach to fit the individuals they are attempting to treat. Given the past quarter century of work showing that quality emotional connection has comparable influences on health outcomes as obesity and hypertension 47, it is clear that empathic approaches are needed for patient care. The current view of empathy in clinical practice is limited and focused primarily on self-reports of physicians, with little understanding of the mechanisms which contribute to declining empathy during medical school and a lack of empathy generally within the medical field. A better scientific understanding of the connections between the mechanisms involved in interpersonal sensitivity, empathy, and care-giving behavior is needed to help physicians maintain high levels of empathy in clinical practice while limiting burnout and personal distress 48. This understanding should be incorporated into research on the organizational and contextual factors that shape medical professionalization. It is now possible to bring to the study of clinical empathy a risk-vulnerability approach that promises to be both more precise and more comprehensive than previous research. This approach will increase our capacity to design better institutions and educational interventions to support empathy within clinical practice and to protect against its decline. Some interventions to improve empathy and communication between physicians and patients have already shown positive effects on both physicians' professional satisfaction and well-being. There is a need, however, for dedicated research to respond to the vital call for empathy enhancement in medicine with programs using social neuroscience-based knowledge. The writing of this paper was supported by grants from the John Templeton Foundation (The Science of Philanthropy Initiative and Wisdom Research at the University of Chicago) and from National Institutes of Health (R01MH087525; R01MH084934) to J. Decety.

World Psychiatry · 97 citationsread the source →

Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next?

Since the traditional clinical paradigm has been replaced by the modern molecular one, medicine set off into new directions. “Prediction”, “prevention” and “personalization” are the programmatic key words of this new approach. Like other medical disciplines, psychiatry has broadened its focus from diagnosis and treatment to the detection and estimation of the risk of disease development, the prediction of its onset and strategies to avoid its manifestation 1,2,3,4. Although treatment of schizophrenia has greatly advanced over the last decades, a significant number of patients continue to take an unfavorable chronic course 5,6. This makes schizophrenia the leading cause for permanent occupational disability among people under 40 years of age in Germany 7, and the 8th most common cause for disability adjusted life years (DALYs) lost among the 15 to 34-year olds worldwide 8, despite its low prevalence. Moreover, schizophrenia involves tremendous direct and indirect societal costs 9 and a huge burden on patients and their families 8,10. It is becoming increasingly clear that schizophrenia is a complex disorder with polygenic heredity and that its pathogenesis is greatly influenced by interactions between different genes and between genes and environment. Associations to variants of the genes for dysbindin and neuregulin-1, the genetic locus G72 and the DAOA (D-amino acid oxidase activator) gene have now been repeatedly confirmed. As with all other complex diseases, research is focusing now on characterizing the polygenetic predisposition and clarifying its influence on the development of the phenotype 11. Research methods range from molecular genetics via proteome research to cell biology, neurophysiology, brain structural and functional imaging and neuropsychology. With all these methods, several indicators for an increased risk of schizophrenia have been identified. However, the currently recognized neurobiological risk factors are not sufficiently predictive to allow the development and application of “selective” prevention measures targeting asymptomatic persons at risk. For neuro-psychological risk factors, this has just become evident in the large-scale attempt of the North American Prodrome Longitudinal Study (NAPLS) group to improve their multivariate model by integrating the examined neurocognitive variables 12. There are also established environmental risk factors for schizophrenia, such as pregnancy or birth complications, growing up in a large city, IQ low but normal and drug consumption. However, with odds ratios around 2, each of these factors appears to increase the lifetime risk of the disease only slightly 13. Thus, the currently known risk factors, either alone or taken together, cannot be used for prediction and prevention without knowledge of the complete predispositional basis and the gene-gene and gene-environment interactions, which are probably numerous. In view of this situation, it may be argued that the current efforts towards prediction and prevention are still premature and that further progress of etiological research is needed. However, a different perspective has emerged from the work of the centers for early recognition and prevention, established first in Melbourne, Australia and in Cologne, Germany in the mid 1990s, and later on in many other places around the world. This resulted from retrospective research of the early course of psychosis, in which the pathophysiologically active disturbances in brain development extend beyond early abnormalities in behavior into psychopathologically definable early risk and ultra high risk (UHR) symptoms, depending on the individual combination of stressors and resilience factors. First episode psychosis (FEP) research has shown that the outbreak of the disease is preceded in about 70% to nearly 100% of cases by an initial prodrome, which lasts for an average of five to six years. Even in highly developed health care systems, an average of one year thereafter elapses from the first manifestation of psychotic positive symptoms to the initiation of adequate treatment 14,15. The period over which the FEP remains untreated (duration of untreated psychosis, DUP) correlates with: delayed and incomplete remission of the symptoms; necessity of more protracted treatment and greater risk of relapse; lower compliance, greater burden on the family, and a higher level of “expressed emotion”; increased risk of depression and suicide; greater impact on the individual's employment or education; increased drug abuse and delinquent behavior; markedly increased costs of treatment 16. These correlations have recently been confirmed by a meta-analysis 17, with coefficients ranging from 0.285 to 0.434 (95% CI). This does not only provide strong arguments in favor of treating the FEP as early as possible, but has also led to a systematic effort to decrease the incidence of psychosis through indicated prevention. Two important studies concerning the early stage prior to the conversion to FEP have demonstrated that the earliest and most common symptoms, which generally dominate during the prodrome, are unspecific and cannot be distinguished from impairment in mood, drive, contact, and concentration of depressive episodes. These are the Age-Beginning-Course (ABC) study of schizophrenia, a retrospective study with optimized methods 14, and the Cologne Early Recognition (CER) Study, a long-term prospective study with an average follow-up period just below 10 years 18. These studies also found striking cognitive impairments in the form of self-experienced disturbances in thought, speech, and perception processes. This subgroup of so-called basic symptoms, which were found in more than a quarter of patients, had high specificity and a high positive predictive power, accompanied by only low rates of false positive predictions 19,20,21. Basic symptoms were first operationalized in the Bonn Scale for the Assessment of Basic Symptoms (BSABS). Shorter versions of the scale for adults and for children and adolescents — the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Adult version (SPI-A) and the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Child and Youth version (SPI-CY) — were later developed from dimensional analyses 22,23,24. While the BSABS only allows an assessment of the current state, the SPI-A and the SPI-CY also allow severity ratings according to the maximum frequency of occurrence within the past 3 months. In the CER study, 385 patients who were presumably in the prodromal phase of schizophrenia were followed up for an average of 9.6 (±7.6) years past baseline. Twenty percent of the initial criterion-positive cases (1 of 66 basic symptoms) who agreed to be followed up developed schizophrenia after 12 months, a further 17% after 24 months, a further 13% after 36 months, and finally a total of 70% after an average of 4.5 years. Thus, only 30% did not convert to schizophrenia. The overall presence/absence of at least one basic symptom correctly predicted presence/absence of a subsequent transition to schizophrenia in 78.1% of cases. From further analyses, two partially overlapping basic symptom criteria for defining at risk mental states (ARMS) for psychosis, primarily schizophrenia, were developed (Table 1). The first criterion, which consists of ten cognitive-perceptive basic symptoms and is abbreviated as COPER, was based on findings concerning the predictive accuracy of individual basic symptoms 18,25. The second was based on a methodological re-analysis of the same data set, in which a cluster of nine cognitive basic symptoms had repeatedly been selected as the most predictive. This cluster was called “cognitive disturbances” (COGDIS). In terms of general predictive accuracy, the two criteria slightly differed in the CER study, as COGDIS tended to be more conservative than COPER, i.e. to perform better in ruling in subsequent schizophrenia at the cost of performing worse in ruling it out. The transition rate throughout the average follow-up period of roughly 10 years was 65% for COPER and 79% for COGDIS, with the majority of transitions occurring within the first 3 years past baseline. In a second prospective study 26, conducted with the SPI-A and with a systematic follow-up of 24 months, 38% of the initially included 146 at-risk subjects developed a frank psychosis, mainly schizophrenia, within 12.3 (±10.4) months on average (1–48; median=9) according to COPER. Thus, the positive results of the CER study were confirmed. Again, COGDIS appeared to be more specific but less sensitive than COPER. As a consequence of these findings, predictive basic symptoms have been established as a set of criteria for risk assessment in international research on the early recognition of psychosis. In particular, the German Research Network on Schizophrenia used these symptoms, together with a combined criterion of functional deterioration and biological risk, in defining an “early at-risk of psychosis state” (ERPS), thereby suggesting a clinical risk staging model (Figure 1). Early and late initial prodromal state: a clinical staging approach The positive symptoms typical of schizophrenia — such as delusions, hallucinations or formal thought disorders — often first appear in an attenuated or transient form during the initial prodromal phase. These symptoms provide a valid prediction of conversion into FEP, particularly in the short term. Warning signs of this sort have been used as ultra-high risk (UHR) criteria 27,28. Notwithstanding their differences across studies, these criteria are generally composed of three alternative elements: attenuated positive symptoms (APS), brief limited intermittent psychotic symptoms (BLIPS), or a combination of one or more risk factors (always including genetic risk) and functional decline within a certain recent period. For the ascertainment of the UHR criteria, the Melbourne group gradually developed a specific instrument, the Comprehensive Assessment of At Risk Mental States (CAARMS) 29. Based on the Australian definition of the UHR criteria, the Structured Interview for Prodromal Syndromes (SIPS), the Scale for Prodromal Syndromes (SOPS) and, subsequently, the Criteria of Prodromal Syndromes (COPS) were developed 30,31. Different UHR-related approaches to an early detection of FEP, particularly schizophrenia, were developed by the Hillside Recognition and Prevention (RAP) program in New York 32 and the Basel Früherkennung von Psychosen (FEPSY) study 33. There have been at least 15 prediction studies using UHR criteria, some of which with large samples 34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41. The 12-month rates of transition into FEP published so far range between approximately 13% and 50%. A substantial variance is even observed with comparable observation periods in the same center 34,35. Yet, as the annual incidence for all forms of psychosis in the general population is only about 0.034% 42, even the lowest conversion rates still indicate a dramatic increase in the relative risk of illness, at least in the help-seeking samples of specialized centers. Table 2 depicts the predictive accuracy measures published so far, with the last five listed studies representing secondary predictor analyses of samples meeting at risk criteria. As a result, in the German Research Network on Schizophrenia, the UHR approach was combined with the basic symptom approach and applied in a slightly modified form for the definition of “late at-risk of psychosis state” (LRPS) (Figure 1). This clinical staging model, which suggests a syndromal sequence for the development of FEP progressing from unspecific prodromal symptoms to predictive basic symptoms, and then to APS, to BLIPS and to full-blown psychotic symptoms, was recently strongly supported 15. Universal or selective prevention measures target healthy population groups or clinically still healthy risk carriers, respectively 43. Indicated prevention, instead, targets individuals with basic symptoms and UHR symptoms. Even at the early stages when these individuals seek advice and help at the early recognition and prevention centers, they must be regarded as ill and in need of treatment. Furthermore, the impending deterioration of psychosocial performance in schizophrenia often already occurs in the initial prodromal phase, even prior to the conversion into FEP 14,15. These clinical and psychosocial impairments justify defining the interventions in EPRS and LPRS as indicated prevention, pursuing the following three objectives: a) improvement in the current burden of prodromal symptoms; b) avoidance or perhaps delay in the development of psychosocial handicap; c) prevention of or at least delay or attenuation of psychosis. Five international intervention studies have attempted to find out whether or to what extent these three objectives can be reached 44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51 (Table 3). The preventive measures used were either cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), adapted to the requirements of the persons at risk, or atypical antipsychotics (risperidone, olanzapine, and amisulpride). These were randomized controlled studies, but there were problems with the blinding condition in the two CBT interventions. This and other methodological shortcomings currently limit conclusions and have encouraged the research groups working in this area to set up new, optimized intervention studies. For example, the protocol of the ongoing parallel group PREVENT study includes careful comparative analyses and superiority and inferiority tests of the psychological and pharmacological treatments 52. A staging of risk, thereby implying a temporal dimension, was considered for the first time in the two intervention studies of the German Research Network on Schizophrenia. One of these studies covered ERPS and only offered CBT as a preventive measure 49,50. The other study was designed for LRPS and used only preventive treatment with amisul-pride 51. When the symptom development in the initial prodromal state follows the sequence shown in Figure 1, it would be beneficial for scientific and especially ethical reasons to focus on psychological interventions in ERPS, which are well tolerated and highly accepted. As soon as the first attenuated or transient psychotic symptoms occur, it seems justifiable to apply well tolerated antipsychotics with few side effects. This differential prevention strategy is now pursued in all German early recognition centers and is also increasingly gaining support in other countries. Another pharmacological option is aripiprazole, tested in a pilot study in UHR states 53. Its possible preventive effects are currently being analyzed in the PREVENT study. Antidepressants were used in a naturalistic, non-randomized observational study of an adolescent sample employing only the APS criterion for inclusion, but, for methodological reasons, this study does not allow any conclusion about differential preventive effects of these medications 54. A critical evaluation of the achievements over the past 15 years through continuous efforts to enhance prediction and prevention of psychoses, particularly of schizophrenia, reveals quite impressive results. However, the results achieved thus far need to be evaluated in the light of the ambitious, initially mentioned objectives of modern predictive and preventive medicine. Once predictive basic symptoms and UHR symptoms have occurred, the underlying pathophysiological process might have already progressed. For such a complex disease with a long-term course and a pre-dispositional basis, this kind of risk identification and risk-oriented prevention may possibly come too late. A more substantial reduction in incidence could be reached with selective and universal prevention measures. Therefore, symptom-based prediction and prevention need to be further developed into the direction of selective prevention for symptom-free risk carriers. In the future, it is necessary to strive for: a) an improvement of risk enrichment with the inclusion of biological risk factors; b) a stronger individualization of the risk estimation by stratification; c) the inclusion of sub-psychotic mental states, as cross-sectionally by current at risk criteria, in the the application of prevention strategies more with the of the the initial prodromal phase for as as then most of the follow-up periods shown in Table 2 are not to the transition A significant number of later may be as and, the predictive of the risk may be 12. Therefore, the first and most important is to out new, optimized large-scale studies with follow-up periods the of the initial prodromal phase, as in the CER study 18. The risk enrichment can also be advanced through the inclusion of following the of recent research on the prediction of through the cognitive impairment This condition a risk for with a conversion rate comparable to the risk for the patients certain imaging and the predictive risk enrichment may be possible for using brain but also impairments of and which are with the psychosis risk and are more and in cases with a later transition to schizophrenia and other new large-scale studies with sufficiently observation periods could whether the risk enrichment can be achieved by of such The of this strategy is on the progress of research on biological and environmental risk factors and their interactions, as is currently attempted in the Network of schizophrenia study In other medical disciplines, such as or a risk which does not in a of is using for multivariate clinical staging by risk In the of study, this approach was into psychosis prediction research for the first time A clinical model was developed based on a including six variables positive disturbances Assessment of in the past and years of Based on the individual a multivariate for further the risk of transition to psychosis into risk was each a increased relative risk to the general with each This model was argued to improve the prediction of psychosis by a of the individual risk in terms of and a more risk estimation or clinical staging of risk, in studies, could the development of risk adapted inclusion criteria for randomized preventive In the first application of this approach in the only clinical and variables were It remains to be whether a model including or environmental variables would increase the predictive accuracy even In studies have to whether such can also be applied to the prediction of psychosis within different time The currently ongoing of the has a about the inclusion of a risk for psychosis in to prevention initially argued this and to the that the application of as criteria could that the high rate of predictions in would be to increase up to in general This is and prior to whether to the in the of the The on the predictive of at risk criteria, thereby the persons meeting at risk criteria already from mental and functional for which they seek Moreover, they psychological and cognitive with and functional the majority of help-seeking at risk persons general criteria for mental disorder a clinically significant behavioral or psychological with disability and have to be considered as i.e. as people with the need and to be these in there are reasons for the inclusion of a clinical in the as by current at risk criteria, not as a prodromal risk for first psychosis, but as an to medical the of such an diagnosis would have the of the by the current mental state to a and Although an increased risk of psychosis would continue to be a of such a the psychological and medical focus would be from an to and At this current state of the criteria would be the for the inclusion of this A for the and of a new of international and studies would be with this inclusion in and later on also in A new prevention approach is by the of and studies a of the onset of psychosis the with the first results are for and The transition rate was lower in an group of UHR adolescents than in a group and this was at a an was evaluated in 10 patients in an pilot and a significant improvement in different was In an study, time was in an UHR group with as with a group suggesting a of This was the first study imaging data on effects in individuals at risk. The preventive of is currently in the process of in the Australian Prodrome study With the of schizophrenia is the first mental disorder to which the prediction and prevention program of modern medicine has been The results are and justify the that in the years to come it be possible to provide preventive strategies to the individual risk of of each In to a reduction in risk assessment has to be by neurobiological and psychosocial risk factors, and indicated prevention has to be further developed towards selective prevention. This a new of large sample studies for prediction as well as prevention, with observation In these studies, of risk selected to predictive must be psychological and pharmacological interventions need to be on a long-term basis, more prevention strategies have to be In to be to and such studies, it would be to mental states, as by the currently used risk symptoms, in the of the

World Psychiatry · 127 citationsread the source →